The Victorian Naturalist The Magazine of the FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA in which is incorporated THE MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY OF VICTORIA Vol. 96 January-December, 1979 COMPILED BY JAMES A. BAINES [D] JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD. 1-13 Abbotsford Street, West Melbourne, 3003 ABORIGINES Hutchinson, C., 104 Hutchinson, M.N., 124 Engraving, Sutherland Creek, 69-71 Kerle, J. A., 169 Lester, M. J., 72 Low, T., 190 ALIEN PLANTS McGregor, B., 105 McInnes, D. E., 174 Aquatic, new Victorian records, 67-69 McKean, J. L., 239 Malipatil, M., 106 Martin, A. A., 97 AMPHIBIANS Martin, J., 88 Mather, P. B., 98 Menkhorst, P. W.,212 Norman, F. I., 137 Osborne, W., 176 Frog preying on tortoise, 104 AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HiSTORY MEDALLION Parkin, R., 116 Pearse, R. J., 48 Trust fund, 34, 53, 105, 136, 189 Robinson, N. H., 168 Ross, J. H., 243 AUTHORS Seed, W. F., 56 Simmons, R., 95, 134, 196 Ambrose, G. J., 8 Smith, B. J., 102, 104, 114 Apps, G. J., 32 Thies, A. W., 53, 107 Aston, H. I., 67 Townsend, S., 35 Backhouse, G. N., 32, 232 Baines, J. A., 63, 107, 153, 199, 201, 249 Bates, M., 29 Beaton, G., 11, 245 Beattie, S., 162 Bell, K. N., 19, 198 Beumer, J. P., 32, 86 Bird, E. C. F.,21 Bishop, H. H., 135 Bolger, P., 69 Brown, R. S., 137 Browne, C. M., 222 Brunner, H., 222 Burn, R., 198 Burns, A. N., 62 Callanan, B. A., 212 Clark, W., 221 Clarke, R.,4 Cockburn, A., 92, 142 Coulson, G. M., 184 Davies, M., 97 Dodds, R., 37 Feehan, H. V. 31 Fleming, M., 92, 142 Friend, G. R., 239 Tyler, M. J., 97 Van Dyck, S., 84 Wainer, J., 92 Wallis, R. L., 54, 101 Warden, J. C., 54 Weste, G., 11, 245 Winsor, L., 155 Young, R. A., 90 BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES Aston, H. I., 199-201 Baines, J. A., 206, 244-245 Baker, A., 37 BIRDS Acceptance of 1080 rabbit bait, 222-226 Using tree holes, Wallaby Creek catchment, 8-10 Book REVIEWS Galbraith, J., 28 Botanists of the Eucalyptus, N. Hall, 53 Garnet, J. R., 244 Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Gill, E. D., 4, 151, 227 Plants in the Victorian Mallee, A. C. Gooley, G. J., 232 Beauglehole, 242-243 Green, K., 176, 230 Pumpkins, Poisons and People, 105 Gullan, P., 242 Tasmanian Odonata, 106 Henshaw, C. H., 145 Western Australian Plant Names and Their Hornsby, P. E., 38 Meanings, F. A. Sharr, 107 CRUSTACEANS Gnathia agwillisi, new species, 56-62, 103 CULTIVATION OF NATIVE PLANTS Information sought, 88-89 FAUNA Vertebrates, trapping, drift fence and pitfall, Big Desert, 92-95 summer survey, Kosciusko National Park, 176-184 ENC.Y. Allied Societies, Western Vic. FNCA, A. C. Beauglehole publishing fund, 37 Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Associa- tion, 72-73 Annual Report, 114-115 Centenary, 172-173, 231 Editor, 42, 101 Financial Statement, 74-78 FISHES Bridgewater Lakes, Portland, 232-238 Galaxias brevipennis, rock climbing, 230-231 Northern Blue-eye, lordosis, 86-88 Wyperfeld National Park, Lake Werrim- bean, 32-34 FLORA Citadel Island, Wilsons Promontory, vegeta- tion, 137-142 FUNGI Discomycetes, Victorian check list, 245-249 Small, 5 species new to Victoria, 11-19 GEOLOGY Australite, Simpson, Victoria, 31 Clarke’s SLip, Eastern View, Otway Coast, 4-7 Lava flow, Tyrendarra near Portland, 227- 229 iii Quartz arenite and calcarenite coast, Warr- nambool, 151-153 HISTORY Naturalists of yesteryear, 95, 134, 196 INSECTS Ants preying on frogs, 97 Butterflies, Gold Coast, 62-63 Wasp Eucarsia formosa, parasitic on White Fly Trialeurodes vaporariorum, 29-31 MAMMALS Bat, Chocolate Wattle, parturition, litter size, 90-91 Eastern Horseshoe, extension of range, 169-172 Taphozous kapalgensis, new species, 239- 24] Hare Lepus europaeus, raising of leveret, 35- 37 Kangaroo, surveying methods, 184-189 Ningaui, new genus of Dasyurids in Victoria, 142-145 Possum, Striped, mating behaviour, 84-85 Seal, Australian Fur, Tasmania, distribution and conservation, 48-53 Small, activity patterns, 54-55 Wallaby, Pearson Island Rock, behaviour, 38-41 Using tree holes, Wallaby Creek Catchment, 8-10 Whale, Southern Right, NSW, 168-169 feeding recent records, MOLLUSCS Cuttle Sepia apama, breeding time, growth rate, 19-20 Hydrobia buccinoides, eggs wrongly iden- tified as a foraminiferum Webbinella bassensis, 198-199 Paper Nautilus Argonauta nodosa, 135-136 Snails, introduced, Theba pisana and Cionella lubrica, new to Melbourne, 102 MONOCOTYLEDONS Duckweed, Tiny, in flower, 174-176 Wolffia australiana, Pontederia cordata, new to Victoria, 67-69 Pterostylis curta, Blunt Greenhood, flowers twice in a season, 28 Water Nymph Najas marina, new to Vic- toria, 67-69 NOMENCLATURE Origin of generic names, Victorian flora, Pilularia to Stenochilus, 63, 107, 153, 201, 249 OBITUARIES Baines, J. A., 206, 244-245 PLACES AND LOCALITIES Big Desert, trapping by drift fence and pit- fall, 92-95 Bridgewater Lakes, Portland, fish fauna, 232-238 Bundanoon, excursion, 116-118 Citadel Island, Wilsons Promontory, vegeta- tion, 137-142 Otway coast, Clarke’s Slip, Eastern View, 4-7 East Gippsland, CCV Awareness Tour May 1979, 145-150 Gold Coast, butterflies, 62-63 Kinglake National Park, reptiles, 124-134 Kosciusko National Park, vertebrate survey, 176-184 Melbourne, Botanic planarians, 155-161 2 new introduced snail species, 102 NSW, Southern Right Whale, recent records, 168-169 Sites of special scientific interest, 21-28 Sutherland Creek, aboriginal engraving, 69- 71 Tasmania, Australian Fur Seal, distribution and conservation, 48-53 Tyrendarra, Western Victoria, lava flow, 227-229 Wallaby Creek Catchment, use of tree holes by mammals and birds, 8-10 Warrnambool, quartz arenite and calcarenite coast, 151-153 Werribee Gorge, mammals, 212-221 Wyperfeld National Park, fishes, Lake Wer- rimbean, 32-34 reptile fauna, pitfall trapping, 98-101 Gardens, land iv PROTOZOA Webbinella bassensis, actually the mollusc Hydrobia buccinoides, 198-199 REPTILES Gecko Gehyra catenata, new species, 190-196 Kinglake National Park, 124-134 TREES Eucalyptus paintings, S. Kelly, donated to National Herbarium, 243-244 WORMS Flatworms, do they eat snails? 104-105 Land planarians, Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, 155-161 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Centenary 1880-1980 CALENDAR OF EVENTS March-December 1980 Supplement to The Victorian Naturalist Jan/Feb 1980 FNCV Calendar of Events 1980 Special Centenary events are indicated by bold type MARCH Sun 2. General and Geology Group Excursion to FNCV Kinglake property; Leader Mr Graeme Love on ‘‘Fingerprints of minerals" Mon 3. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Dr Brian Smith on **Evolution of molluscs”. Tues 4. Mammal Survey Group: Introductory talk — field identification of mammals. Wed 5. Geology Group: Mr I Robinson on "'Seismology"'. Sat-Mon 8-10, Labour Day Weekend. Annual Meeting and camp of Victorian Field Naturalist Clubs Association at Benalla. Mammal Survey camp at Strathbogie. Thurs 13. Botany Group: Mr Bruce Fuhrer on “A trip through the Big Desert". Sat-Sun 15-16. Special Study Trip: Reptiles, Baw Baw/Tanjil Bren. Mon 17. General Meeting: programme hosted by the Geology Group. Wed 19, Microscopy Group: Introduction to the microscope with display of various types. Thurs 20, Day Group: Blessington Gardens, St Kilda. Sat 22. Botany Group Excursion to Mt Mace- don re trees; Leader Miss Pat Carolan. APRIL Special FNCY display at the National Museum to begin during this month and to continue for several weeks. Tues 1, Mammal Survey Group: Introductory talk on identification of Bandicoots. Wed 2. Geology Group: Antimony. Fri-Tues 4-8, Easter. Camp at Strathbogie of Hawthorn Juniors; all FNCV members welcome. Mammal Survey camp at Strathbogie. Thurs 10. Botany Group: Mr Bleakley on "Australian Alpine Flora". Sun 13, Geology Group Excursion to Mt Rob- ertson for trilobites, Mon 14. General Meeting: Dr Barry Wilson, Director of National Museum, on “Aspects of Marine Life”, Wed 16. Microscopy Group: Methods of light- ing objects for micro examination. Thurs 17. Day Group: ‘‘Puffing Billy" to Emerald, Note: Programmes may be changed at short notice; please check wi Sat 19. Special Study Trip: Birds, Lerderderg Gorge. Sat 26. Botany Group Excursion to Coranderrk area near Healesville. MAY Sun 4. Centenary Picnic at Bruce's Creek, Whittlesea. Mon 5. Centenary Meeting at the State Film Centre to be opened by the State Governor Sir Henry Winneke, patron of the FNCV. The speaker will be Dr J H Willis, Tues 6. Mammal Survey Group. Identification of Kangaroos — new method. Wed 7. Geology Group: Occurrence and use of Phosphate. Thurs 8. Botany Group: Dr Elizabeth Turner on '*'Natural history of the Kwangsi area of Southern China. Sat-Sun 10-11. Mammal Survey Camp at Bux- ton. Sun 11. Geology Group Excursion to Spring Gully, Bendigo. Mon 12. Annual General Meeting: programme hosted by the Botany Group. Thurs 15. Day Group: Carlton walk. Sun 18. Special Study Trip: Cryptozoic life in Toolangi Forest. Wed 21. Microscopy Giroup: Simple methods of mounting objects for micro examination. Sat 31. Botany Group Excursion to Upper Packenham for ferns and fungi. JUNE Sun 1. General Excursion to Doon Galla Estate. Mon 2. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Mr Peter Kelly on ‘‘Revision of the beetle genus Paropsis’’. Tues 3. Mammal Survey Group: Film night. Wed 4. Geology Group: Prof E Sherbon Hills will be the speaker. Mon 9. General Meeting: programme hosted by Microscopy Group. Thurs 12, Botany Group: Dr J H Willis on “Fungi in Victoria". Sat-Mon 14-16, Queen's Birthday Weekend: Mammal Survey camp at Eildon. Wed 18. Microscopy Group: Use of various mountants in preparing micro slides. j Thurs 19. Day Group: Coburg Park Lake Reserve. Sat-Sun 21-22. Special Study Trip: Mammals, area to be announced. Sat 28. Botany Group Excursion to Kinglake FNCV property for fungi. JULY Tues 1. Mammal Survey Group: Identification of Pigmy Possums. Wed2. Geology Group: Dr Andrew Prentice on **The Solar System". Sun 6, General Excursion: Leader Mr Graeme Love on **Building stones of the city”. Mon 7. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Mr Peter Carwardine on **How to identify Insect Larvae"'. Thurs 10. Botany Group: to be announced. Sat-Sun 12-13. Mammal Survey Group. Mon 14. General Meeting: Dr D M Churchill, Director of National Herbarium, on '*Co- operation of the Herbarium with layman botanists''. Wed 16. Microscopy Group: Pond and Marine microscopic life. Thurs 17. Day Group: Ancient Times House, Little Bourke Street. Sat 19. Special Study Group: Fungi and forest vegetation, Buxton area. Sat 26. Botany Group Excursion to the Dande- nongs. Sun 27. All Day Symposium at Rusden State College on **Effects of introduced plants and animals". AUGUST Sun 3. General Excursion to Pound Bend and Jumping Creek Reserve with leader Mr Ian Morrison. Mon 4. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Mrs Zillah Lee on **Natural history of some Wasps”. Tues 5. Mammal Survey Group: subject to be announced. Wed 6. Geology Group: Dr Chris Gray, subject to be announced. Sat-Sun 9-10, Mammal Survey Camp. Mon 11, General Meeting: programme hosted by Mammal Survey Group; Mr Bob Warneke of Arthur Rylah Research Institute on “Forest Mammals Research Units". Thurs 14. Botany Group: Mr lan Morrison on “Flora of the Grampians”. Sun 17. Special Study Trip: Cathedral Range for geology and vegetation type in compari- son with Buxton. Wed 20. Microscopy Group: Botanical section cutting, straining and mounting. Thurs 21. Day Group: Cheltenham. Sat 30. Botany Group Excursion to Lysterfield area for wattles. SEPTEMBER Mon |. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Mr Urwin Bates on **Galls and gall insects". Tues 2. Mammal Survey Group: an introduc- tory talk, subject to be announced. Wed 3. Geology Group: Mr M Garrett on **Pal- aeontology”’. Sun 7. General Excursion to Mornington Peninsula with leaders from Botony Group. Mon 8. General Meeting: Speaker will be Mr Don Saunders, Director of National Parks. Thurs 11. Botany Group: Mr Leon Costermans will be the speaker. Sat-Sun 13-14, Mammal Survey Camp. Wed 17. Microscopy Group: Polarised light and the interference microscope. Thurs 18. Day Group: Wattle Park. Sat-Sun 20-21. Special Study Trip: Botany of coastal heathlands, Angahook Forest. Sat 27. Botany Group Excursion to Antonio Park, Mitcham, and nearby areas. OCTOBER Wed 1. Geology Group: hopefully the speaker will be Mr A Goad (Arts Centre Contractual Engineer). Sun 5. General Excursion to Bendigo Whipstick with leader Mr Frank Robbins. Mon 6. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Mr David Harbeck on *'Insect fruit pests”. Tues 7. Mammal Survey Group: Mammals of Wilsons Promontory. Fri-Sun 10-12. Centenary Nature Show at the Lower Melbourne Town Hall. Mon 13. General Meeting: Wilsons Promon- tory study evening by the Study Groups. Wed 15. Microscopy Group: Photography through the microscope. Thurs 16. Day Group: Blackburn Lake. Sat 18. Special Study Trip: Effects of Phytop- thora (cinnamon fungus), Brisbane Ranges. Sat 25. Botany Group Excursion to Langwarrin and Cribb Point. Wed 29. Mammal Survey Group's November meeting; subject to be announced. th the latest Naturalist or phone the relevant number as listed overleaf NOVEMBER Sat-Sat 1-8. Centenary Camp at Wilsons Prom- ontory. No meetings of Marine Biology & Entomology, Mammal Survey, and Geology Groups be- cause of the Centenary Camp. Mon 10. General Meeting: Speaker will be the winner of 1980 Natural History Medallion. Thurs 13. Botany Group: Miss Madge Lester on “Plants of costal sand dunes". Wed 19. Microscopy Group: Movie photogra- phy through the microscope. Thurs 20. Day Group: Altona Beach. Sat 29, Botony Group Excursion to Gembrook and Beenak. DECEMBER Mon |. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: ABC meeting, supper. Tues 2. Mammal Survey Group: Discussion and preparations for Christmas camp. Wed 3. Geology Group: Members' Night. Sun 7. General Excursion to Anglesea. Mon 8. General Meeting: Programme hosted by Hawthorn Junior FNC. Thurs 11. Botany Group: to be announced. No meetings of the Microscopy Group and Day Group in December. Fri 26 continuing for 7-10 days. Mammal Sur- vey Camp, high plains in East Gippsland. Location of FNCV General Meetings and FNCV Study Group Meetings Each meeting occurs once a month General Meetings: National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra; second Monday. Botany Group: National Herbarium, The Do- main, South Yarra; second Thursday. Day Group: No evening meetings, different meeting place each month; third Thursday. Geology Group: National Herbarium, The Do- main, South Yarra; first Wednesday. Mammal Survey Group: National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra; first Tuesday. Marine Biology & Entomology Group: Confer- ence Room, National Museum, enter from Latrobe St, parking in court; first Monday. Microscopy Group: National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra; third Wednesday. All evening meetings commence at 8.00pm and continue to 10.00pm. Other regular events: General Excursions are on the first Sunday. Special Study Trips are on third weekend in the sequence Saturday, Saturday-Sunday camp, Sunday. Botany Group excursions on last Saturday. Mammal Survey camps on second weekend or on long holiday weekend. For further information please phone the relevant number FNCV Secretary 859 8091. Gen Excursions 527 2749. Spec Sty Trips 859 8091. Botany Group 557 6045. Day Group 578 1879. Geology 697 6596 (bus.hrs). Mammal Survey 874 4408. Marine Bio & Ento 211 2427. Micro Group 211 2427. 3l. 97, No. 1 January/February, 1980 - V. E we i. - -j s L s . Published by the | _in which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria - > i | ! ; 1 MP TA ^ “i a A J ^ud dies Bene 5 4 Me » by ee ae oy = wv l4 | * | " -A for posting as a publication — Category "'B'' "d ( $175 FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra Monday, 11 February, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr. Martin Gomon, Curator of Fishes, National Museum of Victoria. Subject: Fish Research in Victoria. Monday, 17 March, 8.00 p.m. (Note meeting a week late due to holiday) Special Study Meeting to be hosted by the Geology Group. Topic to be arranged. Monday, 14 April, 8.00 p.m. Speaker: Dr B.R. Wilson, Director, National Museum of Victoria. Subject: Aspects of Marine Life. (This is one of the special meetings of this Centenary Year). Advance Notice Monday, 5 May — CENTENARY MEETING State Film Centre, 1 MacArthur Street. In the presence of Sir Henry and Lady Winneke. Speaker: Dr J.H. Willis. (Note: As demand for seats may be greater than the number available some form of allocation may be necessary. Special arrangements for this appear on p.42). New Members — January/February General Meetings Ordinary: Mr R. Vagi, 6 Beryl Street, Burwood. Mr R. Murray, 20 Essex Road, Surrey Hills. Mr J. Grusovin, 46 Leigh Street, Oakleigh. Country: Mr P. Rolley, ‘‘Wirralea’’, Ducks Lane, Seville. Mr E. Peters, 32 Hunter Street, Castlemaine. Joint: Mr & Mrs R.A. Moon, 28 Fahey Crescent, Macleod. FNCV EXCURSIONS Sunday, 2 March. Kinglake. Field identification of minerals with the Geology Group. There will be a display of minerals at the Kinglake Block, and Mr G. Love will explain “Fingerprints of minerals’ for the layman. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $5.00. Bring a picnic lunch. Members going by car should be at the Block by 11.30 a.m. Saturday, 8 March — Monday, 10 March. Labour Day Weekend. Benalla. This is the annual gathering of the Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association, hosted this year by the Benalla F.N.C. There will be meetings on Saturday and Sunday evenings, and excursions on Saturday, Sunday and Monday mornings. The former army camp (now Council owned) will be the venue for the meetings and the starting place for excursions. Members may camp in the buildings for $1.00 per night. Sleeping gear will be required as there are no beds, but facilities are good with stoves, cool room, chairs, tables, etc. Eating and cooking utensils should be taken. There is room for caravans, and some motel accommodation has been reserved for members not wishing to camp. Camp and motel are available on Friday night. At present it is proposed to use private cars or go by train, but a coach could be chartered if sufficient members desired it. Please let the Excursion Secretary know at once if you are going and if you need motel accommodation, Friday, 4 April — Tuesday, 8 April. Easter. Strathbogie campout organized by the Hawthorn Junior F.N.C. All members are welcome and there may be a few seats on the coach, ‘which will leave McKenzies, 53 Barkers Road, Kew, at 8.00 a.m. Friday. For bookings and details contact Miss Rosalind St Clair, 4 Westgarth Street, East Malvern. Phone 509 2621. Sunday, 4 May. Centenary picnic — Bruce’s Creek, on the property of Mr Alan Parker. This adjoins State forest with good walks, and is next to a scout camp, the buildings of which will be available if the weather is bad. There is scope for the active but also an opportunity for (Continued on page 42) Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 te 4 1 WS. "S o RS A ® we, MUT os Sesser The Victorian Naturalist Volume 97, Number 1 January/February, 1980 Centenary Year 1880 — 1980 Editor: Robert L. Wallis Editorial Committee: H. Cohn, M. Corrick, R. Kent, B. Smith Extension of Range of the Western Grey Kangaroo, Macropus fuliginosus, in Victoria by G.M. Coulson ............... sese 4 The Breeding Seasons of Frogs in Victoria and Tasmania by A.J. Brooke 75 sm Vb cet e SERERE ET Cat RU. SNC TRENT TEC 6 Survey of Fishes in the West Branch of the Tarwin River above Berry S Creek OV PID Jackson ote o Doe bL IBI r4 Ste 11 The Importance of Basalt in Eastern Australia by A.W. Beasley .. 15 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 12 by M.G. (ofa) Sas) ee IUS E ed Apa tese ni eeu MENA DENT o Sco BINE ETT RUD 19 Naturalists of Yesteryear by R. Simmons............... sese 25 A Comparison of Three Techniques Used in a Reptile Survey of the Conondale Ranges by D.A. Milton.....................- 26 A Recent Stranding of the Strap-toothed whale, Mesoplodon layardi (Gray) (Ziphii dae) from Victoria, and a Review of Australian Records of the Species by J.M. Dixon............. 34 Cover illustration: Differences in coat colour between M. fuliginosus (left) and M. giganteus (right). Note particularly the darker face in M. fuliginosus. Photograph taken at the Royal Melbourne Zoological Gardens. Extension of Range of the Western Grey Kangaroo, Macropus fuliginosus, in Victoria By G. M. CouLson* Identification The two species of grey kangaroo in- habit areas of forest or woodland, and are often observed feeding in adjacent open areas. Both the eastern grey, Macropus giganteus, and the western grey, Macropus fuliginosus, occur in Victoria, with a narrow zone of sym- patry extending southwards from the Swan Hill area into the Grampians Ranges, then westwards into south- eastern South Australia (Figure 1). These closely related species cannot be distinguished by skeletal characteristics, but may be separated on the basis of criteria such as length of oestrous cycle and of gestation period, hair follicle density and blood serum proteins (Kirsch and Poole, 1972). An experienc- ed observer can identify animals in the field by their coat colour: eastern greys range from silver-grey to grey-brown whereas western greys are a darker chocolate-brown with a dark brown to black face and ears (see cover illustra- tion). Extension of Range The discovery near Inglewood, central Victoria, of two specimens of the western grey kangaroo represents an eastward extension of approximately 100 km of the known range of this species (Figure 1). Both specimens were road kills found by the author. They were lodged with the National Museum of Victoria and their identity was con- firmed by W. E. Poole, CSIRO Wildlife Research, Canberra. The first specimen (C17186), a female, was collected on _27/7/77 approximately 5 km south-west of Inglewood on the main Kingower road (36?30'36'' S, 143?40'55'' E), *Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria, 3052. n The southern side of the road was cleared farmland while the vegetation to the north was a woodland of yellow gum, Eucalyptus leucoxylon, and grey box, E. microcarpa, with an understorey predominantly of gold-dust wattle, Acacia acinacea, golden wattle, A. pycnantha, and Chinese scrub, Cassinia arcuata. The second specimen (C22281), also a female, was collected on 13/4/79 about 9 km south-west of Inglewood on the same road (36?30'40'' S, 143?40'39'' E), The pouch contained a naked young with a pes length of 3.4 cm. Vegetation on both sides of the road was a woodland/open forest of yellow gum, E. leucoxylon, grey box, E. microcarpa, and red ironbark, E. sideroxylon, with an understorey of such shrubs as golden wattle, A. pycnantha, spreading wattle, A. diffusa, Chinese scrub, C. arcuata and flame heath, Styphelia behrii. A brief survey in September 1979 located eleven in- dividuals of M. fuliginosus feeding at dusk in cleared farmland about 3 km north of the localities of the specimens collected (Figure 1). To date the eastern grey kangaroo has not been observed in the Inglewood area. The only other large macropod sighted is the black or swamp wallaby, Wallabia bicolor. Distribution Kirsch and Poole (1972) noted that the distribution of M. fuliginosus follows closely that of mallee associa- tions in Victoria and New South Wales. Although Inglewood is surrounded by discontinuous areas of mallee, M. fuliginosus has not yet been positively identified within any of these areas and is clearly not confined to them. Without detailed knowledge of the species’ habitat requirements it is difficult to delineate the probable limits to its distribution. However, the absence of Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Kilometres Fig. 1. Map of the Inglewood area, central Victoria. Stippling indicates areas of woodland and forest. Localities of museum specimens of M. fuliginosus are shown by circles; the triangle indicates sightings any sizeable stands of woodland or forest for some distance to the east of Inglewood (Figure 1) suggests that M. fuliginosus is unlikely to extend beyond the Loddon River, except perhaps near its junction with the Murray River at Swan Hill. There are substantial areas of apparently suitable habitat south of In- glewood, but the extent of distribution in this direction is unknown. Surveys of distribution are being con- tinued; the author would be grateful for Loddon R. of M. fuliginosus. The inset shows the map locality and the presumed limits of the range of M. giganteus (E) and. M. fuliginosus (W) after Kirsch and Poole (1972). any information about grey kangaroo populations in this area. REFERENCES Kirsch, J. A. W. and Poole, W. E. (1972). Tax- onomy and distribution of the grey kangaroos “Macropus giganteus Shaw and Macropus fuliginosus (Desmarest) and their subspecies (Marsupialia: Macropodidae). Aust. J. Zool. 20: 315-339. Poole, W. E. (1977). The eastern grey kangaroo, Macropus giganteus, in south-east South Australia: its limited distribution and need of conservation. CSIRO Div. Wildl. Res. Tech. Pap. No. 31. eS HAVE YOU PAID YOUR SUBSCRIPTION FOR 1980? The new subscription rates for 1980 are printed on the back page of this issue. Please assist the Club by posting your sub. straight away to the Subscription Sect. Mr K. Koth, 21 Smart St., Hawthorn 3122, Vic. January/February The Breeding Seasons of Frogs in Victoria and Tasmania BY A. J. BROOK* Introduction Although Littlejohn and Martin (1974) summarized data on breeding seasons for frogs in Tasmania, no similar summary has been published for frogs in Victoria. This paper presents all available information on breeding seasons to the end of 1978, for both Tasmanian and Victorian frogs. Methods Most data were obtained from the field notes of Dr M. J. Littlejohn, Dr A. A. Martin, Dr G. F. Watson and Mr A.J. Brook of the Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, with some additional information from Dr D. F. Gartside, Mr P. A. Rawlinson and Mr R.H. Green. Literature references with breeding season in- formation were Blanchard (1929), Littlejohn (1963a, 1963b), Littlejohn and Martin (1964, 1967), Martin (1965, 1967a, 1972), Martin and Littlejohn (1966), Watson, Loftus-Hills and Little- john (1971) and Woodruff (1972). Three types of data were collected: presence of egg masses, observations of amplexus, and voice records. Records of egg masses and vocalizations have been used only where species-specific, or where only one species with the par- ticular type of egg mass or characteristic call was known to occur. Two subjectively-determined classes of vocal activity were recognized: (a) chorus-calling — vocal activity by a group of conspecific frogs calling in close proximity, and between which there appeared to be behavioural inter- dependence; and (b) non-chorus calling — spasmodic calling by a few, scattered individuals, between which there was lit- tle or no obvious interaction. *Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne. Species Identification and Nomenclature Species identification and nomenclature is based on the arrange- ment of Barker and Grigg (1977), except for Neobatrachus. Roberts (1978) has redefined Neobatrachus pictus, so that the species of the Neobatrachus occurr- ing in the north-west of Victoria, previously known as N. centralis, is now N. pictus, and the wide-spread species previously referred to as N. pictus, is now N. sudelli (Brook, 1979a). Results The data on breeding seasons are summarised in Figures 1 and 2. Discussion (i) Interpretation of Data In general, egg — mass records are reliable, direct evidence of recent breed- ing activity, because for most species egg masses rarely last longer than one or two weeks before hatching. However, egg masses of the genera Pseudophryne and Geocrinia, which are laid on land, may remain viable for up to three months (Martin, 1967b), and cannot be used to indicate the duration of breeding unless specifically examined for developmental stages. In this analysis, records of amplexus (mating) are treated as direct evidence of breeding activity because available evidence indicates that in most species, non-breeding females keep away from calling males, and only gravid females approach males and are likely to be amplexed. Considerable caution was taken when relating voice records to the breeding season. Chorus calling may not indicate breeding activity, since such calling may proceed or extend beyond egglaying (un- published observations). On the other Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 hand, in some species oviposition has been observed to be associated with non- chorus calling. Frogs of the Family Hylidae are noted for non-breeding call- ing activity (Bogert, 1960). For example, Litoria verreauxi (as Hyla ewingi, Har- rison, 1922), L. ewingi (English, 1910) and L. paraewingi (unpublished ob- servations) frequently utter calls when there is no breeding activity. Conse- quently, the total calling activity of a species must be well understood before Geoerinia laevis Limnodynastes dumerili Limnodynastes peront Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Litorta burrowst Litoria ewingi Litoria raniformis Pseudophryne semimarmorata Ranidella signifera Ranidella tasmaniensts Calling e X Non-chorus —> The probable breeding season is underlined. voice records can be reliably used as evidence for the breeding season. Even so, for most species the duration of chorus calling appears to be a good in- dicator of the potential breeding season. (ii) Completeness of Data In Victoria, observations on vocal ac- tivity have been made systematically over most of the State during each month of the year. Consequently, except for species which occur in the far east lexus Eggs af Amplex Cone: AXE O Fig. 1. Summary of seasonal breeding data for frogs in Tasmania (excluding Flinders and King Islands). Note that the annual monthly sequence commences in July. January/February TAXON MONTH Crinia haswelli Geoerinia laevis Geoerinta victoriana e R Q t (e. & Q e s m Heleioporus aus Ltmnodynastes dumerili Limnodynastes fletchert Limnodynastes interioris" Limnodynastes peroni Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Litoria aurea Litoria ettropa Litoria ewingt Litoria jervisiensis Litorta lesueurt Litorta maculata Litoria paraewingt Litoria peroni Litoria phyllochroa (Fig. 2, Part 1) JASJON DiJ F MJAM Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 TAXON MONTH Litorta rantformts 8 t 8 g 8 8 e 8 Litorta verreauxt alpina muse $ et*l.. LM i e : e Litoria v. verreauxt e 3 8 t 1 8 $ 8 8 e o o0 Mixophyes balbus E e Neobatrachus pictus .906.../.e0,9.. Neobatrachus sudellt 8 9935. e 0 | i ‘ be Lt h e Philoria frosti . . . 0050 7 5 e Pseudophryne bibroni ees E 8 | | (J Pseudophryne dendyt EE E i | a 3 O Pseudophryne semtmarmorata rs. regens Matin cts Ps 2 i i i e. Ranidella parinsignifera eso e eso |e9^ eso | eso eso |e eso |e ee |e eo e eso ee es |e ese | ee ese |09 ee - Rantdella signifera es esc eo ee e e Rantdella sloanet Uperoleta marmorata ee Or Oe 3» e Uperoleta rugosa pee OO: ONO) | 25 6 I nn KEY Eggs. . or _- Amplexus : F Chorus. O Sore ies t Non-chorus — 9 The probable breeding season is underlined. (Fig. 2, Part 2) Fig. 2. Summary of seasonal breeding data for frogs in Victoria. Note that the annual monthly sequence commences in July. January/February 9 and north-west of Victoria, the observa- tions on calling activity should be rela- tively complete. The potential complete- ness of records on amplexus, and par- ticularly eggs, varies from species to species. For example, the entire range of Litoria verreauxi verreauxi in Victoria is sympatric with L. ewingi (Brook, 1975, 19792), and since the egg masses of both species are identical (Martin, Littlejohn and Rawlinson, 1966), no egg masses of L. verreauxi verreauxi can be identified in Victoria for species — specific data unless oviposition is observed. On the other hand, the large floating egg masses of Limnodynastes dumerili are con- spicuous and easily identified, and records appear complete. The Tasmanian observations appear to be incomplete, even for voice records of common species. (Fig. 1). (iii) Patterns and Variation in the Breeding Season For most species in Victoria, the data in Figure 2, represent the maximum potential breeding season, and do not indicate the relative intensity of breeding activity nor seasonal and geographic variations. Although there are insuffi- cient data for detailed analysis, generalizations based on the three classes of breeding pattern recognized by Littlejohn (1971) can be made: (a) A short, regular breeding season which occurs about the same time each year and is confined to a 4-6 week period. Geocrinia victoriana al low altitudes, G. /aevis and the three species of Pseudophryne breed during autumn. At high altitudes G. victoriana com- mences a shorter breeding season in summer (Littlejohn, 1971). (b) A short, irregular breeding season which follows heavy rain and lasts only two to three days. Neobatrachus pictus breeds at any time of the year in South Australia (Roberts, 1978) and the same pattern is likely in Victoria. Neobatrachus sudelli may have short ir- 10 regular breeding, but probably not dur- ing the winter months. (c) An extended breeding season characterized by intermittent breeding activity over an extended period. In Litoria ewingi, L. paraewingi and Ranidella signifera, breeding com- mences with the first heavy rains of autumn and continues into the early summer. Extension into mid-summer may occur in south-eastern Victoria. Breeding activity follows rainfall associated with the regular movement of cold fronts over southern Victoria. The remaining species begin breeding late in winter or spring and continue through into summer, with a second peak in autumn for some species. Continuation of breeding through summer appears rare in western Victoria but may be com- mon in south-eastern Victoria. Both the short, regular breeding pat- tern and the extended breeding pattern occur in Tasmania. However, spring breeding apparently begins later, and autumn breeding ends earlier in Tas- mania than in Victoria, presumably due to the lower temperatures associated with higher latitudes. Acknowledgements Much of the field work by M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin and G. F. Watson was carried out with grants from the Society of the Sigma Xi, the Nuffield Foundation, the Australian Research Grants Committee (Grant 66/16172), and the University of Mel- bourne Standing Research Vote. The author was assisted by the Australian Biological Resources Study, I am indebted to Dr A. A. Martin, Dr G. F. Watson and particularly Dr M. J. Littlejohn of the Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, for permitting access to their field notes, for valuable assistance and continuous en- couragement. The manuscript was criticised by Dr Littlejohn, and typed by my wife, Mary. Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 REFERENCES Barker, J. and Grigg, G. C. (1977). A Field Guide to Australian Frogs. Rigby Ltd, Adelaide, Blanchard, F. N. (1929). Rediscovery of Crinia tasmaniensis. Aust. Zool. 5: 324-328. Bogert, C. M. (1960). The influence of sound on the behaviour of amphibians and reptiles, In: Animal Sounds and Communication. (W. E. Lanyon and W. N. Tavolga, eds.) American Institute of Biological Sciences, Washington, D.C. 137-320. Brook, A. J. (1975). The distribution of anuran am- phibians in Victoria. Victorian Nat. 92: 104-120. Brook, A. J. (19792). Atlas of Frogs of Victoria. Department of Zoology, University of Mel- bourne. Publication No. 2. Brook, A. J. (1979b). Atlas of Frogs of Tasmania. Department of Zoology, University of Mel- bourne. Publication No. 3, English, T. S. M. (1910). Some notes on Tasmanian frogs. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 2: 627-634. Harrison, L. (1922). On the breeding habits of some Australian frogs. Aust. Zool. 3: 17-34. Littlejohn, M. J. (1963a). Frogs of the Melbourne area. Victorian Nat. 79: 296-304, Littlejohn, M, J. (1963b). The breeding biology of the Baw Baw frog Philoria frosti Spencer. Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W, 88: 273-6. Littlejohn, M. J. (1971), Amphibians of Victoria. Victorian Year Book 85: 1-11. Littlejohn, M. J. and Martin, A. A. (1964). The Crinia laevis complex (Anura: Leptodactylidae) in south-eastern Australia. Aust. J. Zool. 12: 70-83. Littlejohn, M. J. and Martin, A. A, (1967). The re- discovery of Heleioporus australiacus (Shaw) (Anura: Leptodactylidae) in eastern Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 80: 31-35. Littlejohn, M. J. and Martin, A. A. (1974). The Amphibia of Tasmania. In: Biogeography and Ecology in Tasmania. (W. D. Williams, ed.) Junk: The Hague. PP 251-289. Martin, A.A. (1965). Tadpoles of the Melbourne area, Victorian Nat, 82: 139-149. Martin, A. A. (1967a). The early development of Tasmania’s endemic Anura, with comments on their relationships. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 92: 107-116. Martin, A. A. (1967b). Australian anuran life histories. In: Australian Inland Waters and Their Fauna. (A. H. Weatherley, ed.) Australian Na- tional University Press, Canberra, PP 175-191. Martin, A. A. (1972), Studies in Australian Am- phibia III. The Limnodynastes dorsalis complex (Anura: Leptodactylidae). Aust. J. Zool. 20: 165-211. Martin, A. A. and Littlejohn, M. J. (1966). The breeding biology and larval development of Hyla Jervisiensis (Anura: Hylidae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 91: 47-57. Martin, A. A., Littlejohn, M. J. and Rawlinson, P, A. (1966). A key to the anuran eggs of the Mel- bourne area, and an addition to the anuran fauna, Victorian Nat. 83: 312-315. Roberts, J. D. (1978). Redefinition of the Aus- tralian Leptodactylid frog Neobatrachus pictus Peters. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 102 (4): 97-105. Watson, G. F., Loftus-Hills, J, J. and Littlejohn, M. J. (1971). The Litoría ewingi complex (Anura: Hylidae) in south-eastern Australia, 1. A new species from Victoria. Aust. J. Zool, 19: 401-416. Woodruff, D. S. (1972). The evolutionary sig- nificance of hybrid zones in Pseudophryne (Anura: Leptodactylidae), Ph.D. Thesis, Univer- sity of Melbourne. Survey of Fishes in the West Branch of the Tarwin River above Berrys Creek BY P. D. JACKSON* Introduction Little is known about the distribution of native species of fish in Victorian inland waters. With man's increasing pressure on the aquatic environment the documentation of species present in particular waters is, as a first step towards formulating conservation measures, a matter of some urgency. The present paper documents the results of a fish survey of the west branch of the Tarwin River and its tributaries above its confluence with Berrys Creek. The *Freshwater Fisheries Section, Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, 123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, Vic. 3084. January/February work was carried out between 3 April and 10 May 1979, The west branch of the Tarwin rises at an altitude of about 500m on the southern slopes of the Strzelecki Ranges in south-eastern Victoria and has a steep catchment. The survey area is mostly cleared farmland with only occasional isolated eucalypt forests; consequently the river is heavily silted. The river has a mean width of 2 m and mean depth of 0.08 m in the head- waters and a mean width of 4 m and mean depth of 2 m just before its con- fluence with Berry's Creek. 11 | Allambee Allambee , South Fig. 1. Locality Map. Materials and Methods About 100 m of river at each of the 10 sampling stations (Fig. 1) was fished with a pulsed D.C. electrofisher. All fish captured were identified, anaesthetised with quinaldine, and measured (total length to the nearest mm). The fish identified in the field were returned to the river; others were preserved in 10% Formalin (V/V) and identified in the laboratory. At Stations 8, 9 and 10, where deeper water and high turbidity made electro- fishing more difficult, unbaited fyke nets (mesh size 25 mm) were used. At these three stations, 4 double-winged and 10 single-winged nets were set within a 200 m length of river; nets were set in the afternoon and lifted the following morning. The bag ends of the nets were always tied so as to be above the water to allow any platypus that may have been captured access to air. 12 Results Ten species of fish were recorded (Table 1); nine are native and one, brown trout, is exotic to Australia. The species of fish captured with each sampling method are shown in Table 2. Electrofishing was the least selective (in terms of species caught), and captured all species recorded during the survey. Only river blackfish were captured alive in fyke nets. The smaller common galaxias and the Australian grayling were captured when they became gilled in the wings of the nets and could not be released alive. Attaching the bag ends of the nets above the water proved success- ful. On one night nine platypus were captured and were released alive the following day. The numbers and size range of each species captured at each sampling station are shown in Table 3. The most commonly occurring native species were the short-finned eel (7 stations) and the river blackfish (6 stations). The galaxias show a longitudinal succession in that the climbing galaxias occurred furthest upstream (stations 1 and 2), the spotted galaxias (stations 4 and 5) in the middle reaches and the common galaxias furthest downstream (stations 7 to 10). The introduced brown trout occurred at only two stations. At station 9, hook and line fishing was carried out between 1800 h and 1930 h on one night only. Discussion The nature of the Tarwin River, par- ticularly the very turbid water, made sampling difficult. Electrofishing was the least selective method of sampling and was undoubtedly inefficient in terms of the numbers of fish collected. The results therefore give only an indica- tion of the fish species present but not their abundance. The number of native species (9) is high for a Victorian river and may reflect the relatively short distance Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Table 1. Fish species taken in west branch of Tarwin River above Berrys Creek ARR—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————— Scientific name Common name a Gadopsis marmoratus (Richardson, 1848) Galaxias truttaceus Valenciennes, 1838 Galaxias brevipinnis (Gunther, 1866) Galaxias maculatus (Jenyns, 1842) Pseudaphritis urvilli (Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1831) Retropinna semoni Weber, 1895 Prototroctes maraena Günther, 1864 Anguilla australis ^ Richardson, 1848 Geotria australis Gray, 1851 *Salmo trutta Linnaeus, 1758 *Introduced species River blackfish Spotted galaxias Climbing galaxias (formerly known Cox's mountain galaxias) Common galaxias Tupong Australian smelt Australian grayling Short-finned eel Pouched lamprey Brown trout Table 2 Survey methods and species captured at sampling stations ——— aaaaaaaaiaiaaaaaaaalalllllllalaslalaiÂiaiaIaessssososost— Station Sampling method Species captured esse aaaaaaasaasasaaasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasssssslslM— All Stations Electrofishing 8,9,10 Fyke nets 9 Rod and line All species Gadopsis marmoratus Prototroctes maraena Galaxias maculatus Gadopsis marmoratus (about 85 km) from the sampling region to a large estuary, Andersons Inlet. Only the river blackfish and possibly Aus- tralian smelt are obligatory permanent residents of freshwater. The spotted galaxias, climbing galaxias and common galaxias are facultative catadromous species (may migrate to estuaries to spawn although landlocked forms can complete their life cycle in fresh water) whilst the tupong is an obligatory cata- dromous species (must migrate to January/February estuaries to spawn). The pouched lamprey and probably the Australian grayling are obligatory anadromous species (spend part of their life cycle at sea and migrate to fresh water to spawn). The introduced brown trout is normally a permanent resident of fresh water and its presence at only two stations may reflect the unsuitability of the river for this species, particularly the high turbidity and the lack of suitable gravel on which to spawn. 13 able 3 Number and range of total lengths of species captured at each sampling station. Species Range of total lengths (mm) and, in parentheses, number of ench species caught at the 10 sailing stations Station Na, ! - 3 n 5 - "i B 3 10 Gadopsis mermeratus & 172-395 Wee 165 172-3% 180-335 m 6) G) (1) aq (a) Galaxias truttaceus Yb- T3 21-50 Gal as trevipirràs 58-51 1 10 135 7-178 144-167 u i) (7) (6) ^) 91-207 31-160 e221 134 ) (3) (6 0) etrpirra smri 58-63 Protstroctns meraena 3-3 no n ta) n in Anguilla astralis 238-ü8P 475-630 231-721 308-562 1K 188 5-6 557 2) e (5) (a) (2 nm (2) 1) Getria australis 90 [a] Zalm trutta The longitudinal succession shown by the climbing galaxias, the spotted galaxias and the common galaxias has also been noted by Frankenberg (1974). Although all three may occur together in the lower parts of streams as they all may migrate to estuaries to spawn, they do not co-exist in freshwater; all three show adaptions to different freshwater habitats. The climbing galaxias have ventrally placed, broad pectoral fins associated with its climbing ability and penetrates further upstream than the spotted galaxias. The common galaxias is more prevalent in still open waters and is able to withstand higher water temperatures than either the climbing or the spotted galaxias. The occurrence of Australian grayling in the Tarwin River is of interest. Although once common (Turnbridge 1972), the grayling is now Australia’s most seriously threatened freshwater fish (Lake 1971). Its precise life history is not known but the species probably spawns during late summer-early autumn. The larvae drift downstream and the juveniles return upstream towards the end of their first year (Bishop and Bell 1978). The size range of the specimens captured in this survey (98-113 mm) is just below that of 14 grayling (113-165 mm) estimated to be in their second year of life in the Shoal- haven River, N.S.W. (Bishop and Bell 1978). The grayling captured in the Tarwin may have been juvenile fish returning upstream from the estuary at the end of their first year of life. The Australian grayling is most com- monly associated with clear, gravel- bottomed rivers, e.g. Tambo, Mitchell and Wonnangatta Rivers and its presence, in such a muddy bottomed, heavily silted river is unusual. Whether they can successfully spawn there is uncertain. Acknowledgements Dr D. Evans is thanked for critical comments on the draft manuscript. I am grateful for the assistance of Mr R. Hosking and Mr J. Davies during field work. REFERENCES Bishop, K. A. and Bell, J. D. (1978). Aspects of the biology of the Australian Grayling Prototroctes maraena Gunther (Pisces: Prototroctidae). Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 29: 743-761. Frankenberg, R. (1974). Native freshwater fish. In: Biogeography and Ecology in Tasmania. Ed. W. D. Williams. Junk: The Hague. Lake, J. S. (1971). Freshwater Fishes and Rivers of Australia. Nelson: Melbourne. Tunbridge, B. R. (1972). The elusive grayling. Victorian Fish Wildl. Dep. Freshwater Fish. Newsl. 2: 20-24. Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 The Importance of Basalt in Eastern Australia By A. W. BEASLEY* Basalt is the most common volcanic rock. It is formed from the cooling and solidification of molten lava which was poured out on the land as the result of volcanic activity. Basalts are common in a belt which extends down the eastern part of Australia from Torres Strait to Tasmania and westwards to the Mt. Gambier district in South Australia, This belt was the site of considerable volcanic activity during Cainozoic times, which extend from the present back to about 65 million years ago. Ex- tensive flows of basaltic lava covered some quite large areas, and in many places a succession of lava flows was piled up one above the other. This Cainozoic volcanicity presumably was closely related to the earth movements that gave rise to the Eastern Highlands of our continent. It is interesting to con- sider the economic importance of these basalts, and to realise the pleasure and fascination they can provide for field naturalists interested in minerals and rocks. Soils derived from the weathering of basalts in eastern Australia are un- doubtedly one of Australia’s greatest resources. These soils have a relatively high content of such elements as iron, and are generally rich in plant nutrients. The fertile soils of such important farm- ing regions as the Western District in Victoria and much of the Darling Downs in Queensland are due largely to the weathering and decomposition of basalts under favourable climatic condi- tions. Basalt was used extensively as a building stone during last century, par- ticularly in Victoria where Cainozoic basalts cover about one-fifth of the State. It was favoured particularly for building churches and public buildings, but many private dwellings were made from blocks of basalt during the early *3 Georgian Court, Balwyn, Victoria. Honorary Associate in Geology, National Museum of Vic- toria. January/February days of white settlement. In former times it was commonly used for founda- tion purposes and for the base-courses of buildings, such as the Melbourne Town Hall and many others, Basalt is a hard, fine-grained rock, and the fresh (unweathered) rock ob- tained by quarrying is very resistant to erosion. Localities where the flows of the old basaltic lava are thick are prefer- red for quarries. In quarrying the rock, use is made of natural fractures called joints which are regularly arranged in a pattern. Most of these joints are the result of shrinkage which developed as the lava cooled. Following quarrying, the cutting, shaping and dressing of blocks of basalt to the required sizes for building purposes was an arduous task, and it is no wonder that the stone- masons were Melbourne’s first workers to insist on an eight-hour day. Much of the basalt used for building purposes in the early days of Melbourne came from quarries at Footscray and Malmsbury. Basalt is dark-coloured, and in the building trade is known as bluestone. It is not much favoured now as a building stone, but is still used. For example, it was chosen for building the National Gallery of Victoria, part of the new Arts Centre in Melbourne. Large slabs of basalt are used for paving, particularly in public places such as the Melbourne Civic Square and the adjacent city foot- paths. Blocks of basalt known as bluestone pitchers were used extensively in Vic- toria for road kerbing and guttering in former times. These street gutters are now being replaced by concrete ones, and the bluestone pitchers are being of- fered for sale by municipal authorities. They are very suitable for constructing retaining walls, and I have used them for this purpose in my home garden. Huge blocks of basalt have been quar- ried to build breakwaters at Portland in Victoria, Tweed Heads in New South Wales, and other places around our coast. They have also been used to form 15 Fig. 1. rock cliffs at the top of the beach to pre- vent marine erosion from destroying valuable coastal property, as on the Gold Coast in Queensland. Basalt is used extensively in making roads in many parts of eastern Australia. The rock is first broken up by crushers in the quarry plant and it is then screened to the required size. In former times it was widely used as loose road metal, commonly called blue metal; this has also been extensively us- ed for railway track ballast. Because of its wearing qualities and its adhesion to bitumen, large quantities of basalt are employed as aggregate in bitumen road construction. Basalt screenings are used extensively as a fairly coarse aggregate in concrete. To the mineral collector the main im- portance of basalt is as a source of mineral specimens found in cavities and pockets in the rock. These include car- bonate minerals such as aragonite and calcite, silicates such as minerals of the zeolite group, and silica minerals such as agate (cryptocrystalline quartz) and coarsely crystalline quartz. Cavities are 16 Soil developing from the weathering of basalt near Heywood, Western Victoria, formed in the solidifying lava by the ex- pansion of gases escaping from solution, and they are most abundant near the top of the old lava flows. Some of these cavities, formed by escaping gases and from other causes, have been completely filled with minerals, but many are only lined and partly filled. It seems that some of the minerals were deposited from circulating solutions during the final stages in the cooling down and solidification of the lava, and that others were precipitated at a much later time from aqueous solutions percolating through the rock. The minerals grew inwards from the walls of the spaces they occupy and, when they had sufficient room to grow, they developed their various crystal forms. Many beautiful crystallized specimens have been collected from cavities in basalts in eastern Australia. They have been obtained from quarries and from basalt exposed in cuttings, cliffs and shore platforms. Fossickers usually break the rock first with a large sledge-hammer, and then break down the pieces further with a club hammer and Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 2. House built from blocks of basalt at Camperdown, Victoria. Fig. 3. Crystals of natrolite, a zeolite mineral, in basalt from near Flinders, Victoria. January/February 17 geologist’s hammer until the desired specimen is obtained. Great care must be taken at the last stage not to shatter the crystals. Weathering and decomposition of basalt over long periods of time has released some of the cavity-filling minerals into the soil and into alluvial deposits such as stream gravels. These are the hard and resistant ones such as agate and other silica minerals. This has happened, for example, in the Agate Creek region of northern Queensland where, over a large area of basalt coun- try, hollow geodes and solid nodules of agate may be found lving loose on or near the surface. The geodes represent cavities which were only partly filled with mineral matter, while the solid nodules filled more or less rounded cavities in the basalt. Agate from this region is highly prized as an ornamental stone. Some of the geodes contain crystals of quartz projecting in towards the centre of the cavity. Crystals of sapphire have been observed in basalt that occurs in an ex- tensive area centred around Anakie in Queensland and another large area cen- tred around Inverell in New South Wales. Prolonged weathering of the basalts in these regions has resulted in the occurrence of what are believed to be the largest sapphire gemfields in the world. More than 75 per cent of the world's annual supply of sapphires comes from these regions. Although most is obtained by mining companies and syndicates, an appreciable quantity comes from mining operations con- ducted by individuals. Fossicking in these regions by gem-hunters has become an important tourist attraction. The sapphires originally occurred in the basalt as comparatively large crystals which formed at an early stage when the molten rock-material was deep down in the Earth, probably in the upper part of the Earth’s mantle, the zone below the crust. They crystallized at this con- siderable depth under high pressures, and were brought up to the surface as solid inclusions in the molten material which erupted upon the surface as basaltic lava. It seems most probable that the sapphires were very sparsely distributed in the basaltic lava, and could have been restricted to, or more common in, certain flows. The processes of weathering have caused the decomposition of much of the basalt on the Anakie and the Inverell gemfields, but because sapphire is a hard and resistant mineral it has surviv- ed. It has reached economic grades in alluvial deposits through natural con- centration by water in quick-flowing streams, since it is a heavy mineral. Our basalts provide both profit and pleasure. By searching for mineral specimens in basalt, and from hunting for gemstones released from this rock, one is provided with various stimulating activities. Apart from their hobby value which may be very rewarding, such ac- tivities can have economic and scientific value. AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Amount on hand invested October 1979 Miss M. McLaren (2nd Donation) Total November 1979 $842.00 40.00 $882.00 Back issues of the Victorian Naturalist A member wishes to obtain odd back issues of the early Victorian Naturalist. Exchange or purchase. Miss M. Davis. Tel. 26 6332. 18 Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 12 By M, G. CORRICK* Pultenaea humilis Benth. ex Hook.f. in Flora Tasmaniae 1: 91 (1856). Pultenaea humilis 1s widely distributed through central and western Victoria with isolated occurrences in Gippsland and on Pine Mt. It also occurs in Tasmania. P. humilis is usually a low, spreading and somewhat decumbent shrub about 30-50 cm high, but its growth habit is very variable and erect forms up to a metre high occur in several areas. It is often found in heathland communities where it appears to tolerate quite wet conditions for much of the year. However, in central and eastern Victoria and in parts of the Grampians it may be found in more elevated situations where the soil is rocky and usually dry. The stems are rounded and mostly hairy; the alternate, oblanceolate or elliptic leaves are 6-14 mm long and 1- 4 mm wide with incurved margins and acute, but blunt tips. The underside of the leaf is usually hairy; the upper surface is glabrous and when dried is often paler. The stipules are dark brown with papery margins and are sometimes joined together near the base. The flowers are axillary, usually about 10 mm long with the standard 10 mm long and 10 mm wide. They are on short, but distinct pedicels 2-4 mm long and crowded in spikes towards the ends of the branches with a leafy tip that continues to grow as the flowers develop. They are bright orange with dark red lines on the standard and wings and a dark red or purple tip to the keel. The calyx is usually hairy and the three lower lobes are deeply divided and taper into longer. slender points. The slender, linear bracteoles have incurved, papery margins and may have some rather long loose hairs, * 7 Glenluss St., Balwyn, Victoria. January/February particularly along the mid-rib. They are attached at the base of the calyx and are as long, or slightly longer than it. There are no floral bracts but the leaves within the flower spike may be somewhat reduced and have enlarged stipules. The ovary is glabrous except for a tuft of rather long hairs at the base of the style. The pod is plump and almost hidden by the calyx. Main flowering time is late November extending to mid- December in higher, cooler areas. Pultenaea humilis is a species which shows great variation, not only in size and growth habit but also in the size of the leaves and the«degree of hairiness; it also appears tolerant of a variety of soil types and situations. Pultenaea humilis var. glabrescens H. B. Williamson in Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic. 33: 133 (1921) was described from collections made in several localities, including Creswick, Sale and the Grampians. J. H. Willis (1972) notes that this taxon occurs widely over much of the State mingling with more typical forms. He notes little correlation between leaf shape and degree of hairiness and doubts whether this variety is worthy of recognition. More recent collections and field observations seem to uphold this view. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Between Dartmoor & Wilkin, A.C. Beauglehole 40013, 8.xi.1959 (MEL 530047); Grampians, near Chimney Pot, M.G. Corrick, 16.x.1965 (MEL 532445); Rushworth Forest, M.G. Corrick 3537, 3.xi.1973 (MEL 532446); Grampians, Victoria Valley, P.K, Gullan, 6.1.1977 (MEL 523872); Macedon Range, Mt. Robertson, Barry Kemp, 12.xii.1976 (MEL 519680); Sale, T.A. Robinson 1898 (MEL 530211); Pine Mt., J.H. Willis, 15.1.1964 (MEL 540483) 19 Fig. 15A. Known distribution of Pultenaea humilis and P. subspicata. Pultenaea subspicata Benth. in Fl. Aust. 2: 137 (1864). The distribution of Pultenaea subspicata in Victoria is restricted to a few isolated areas in East Gippsland close to the New South Wales border near Wulgulmerang. It also occurs in N.S.W. and A.C.T. P. subspicata is a low, decumbent or almost prostrate shrub with pale, rounded and mostly glabrous stems. The alternate, obovate leaves are 3-8 mm long and 1-1.5 mm wide with an obtuse tip. They have a short, but distinct petiole about I mm long and the margins are curved up. The upper leaf surface is glabrous, and when dried is paler than the undersurface, which usually has a few scattered pale hairs. The light brown stipules are 1.5-2 mm long, united for about half their length and closely appressed to the stem. The flowers are axillary, usually about 9mm long and arranged in a rather long spike with a leafy tip. They are orange in colour with red-brown markings on keel and standard which is 9 mm high and 7 mm wide. The calyx is 6 mm long with slender, acute lobes; the base of the tube is glabrous and the lobes hirsute with pale hairs. The bracteoles are 2mm long and Fig. 15B, a-g, Pultenaea humilis: a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style; d, leaves and stipules, all from MEL 532445; e, broad leaf form from Rushworth forest, MEL 532446; f, narrow, glabrous leaf form from the Grampians, MEL 519680; g, pod and seed, from MEL 523872. h-n, Pultenaea subspicata: h, habit; i, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a little larger; j, style; k, leaf and stipules, all from MEL 529832; I, East Gippsland form with hairier leaves; m, pod; n, seed, all from MEL 529834. 20 Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 January/February 21 more or less three lobed or winged, with a line of hairs down the mid-rib; they are attached at the base of the calyx and reach about one third of the way up the calyx lobes. There are no floral bracts, but the united stipules of the floral leaves are much enlarged and if the leaf is bent back or broken off these stipules may easily be mistaken for bracts. The ovary is glabrous except for a few hairs at the base of the style. The pod is plump but does not extend beyond the calyx lobes except for the slender, curved style on young pods. P. subspicata is very similar to some forms of P. humilis but may always be recognized by the distinctive, broad three-lobed bracteoles. Also, according to present records, the distribution of the two species does not appear to overlap. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: East Gippsland, Rocky Range Rd., A.C. Beauglehole 36102, 14.1.1971 (MEL §29834); Wulgulmerang, A.W. Howitt 445, 1882 (MEL 529837); Splitters Creek, Wulgulmerang, J.H. Willis, 3.xii. 1962 (MEL 529832). Dandenong and Mount Corranwarrabul The name Dandenong does not, as stared in the report of Mrs Weatherhead’s talk on the botany of Sherbrooke at the April general meeting of F.N.C.V. (Victorian Nat. 96: 114), come from an aboriginal word Ban- yenong meaning ‘bush burnt a long time ago’. It is well documented that the name was given in 1837 by Captain William Lonsdale, who, in an official report on the district, spelt the name Dan-y-nong. He wrote that it was always most difficult to catch the sound of native names as spoken by aborigines, who rapidly ran over ‘d’ and ‘t, making it hard to distinguish bet- ween these two consonants. Hence, the first surveyors, who made the original survey in the 1840's, spelt it Tangenong. They probably interpreted the name dif- ferently from Lonsdale after hearing it pronounced by the tribesmen. This word is rendered Tanjenong by Les Blake in his recently published book ‘Place Names of Victoria', with the meaning given as ‘lofty mountain’. This follows A. E. Martin, who in his ‘Place Names in Victoria and Tasmania' (1944) gives both Dan-y-nong and Tanjenong, with the meaning ‘jofty’. This name for many years referred only to the township (now the city of 22 Dandenong) and Dandenong Creek, not to the mountains now known as the Dandenong Ranges, which in early col- onial times were known as the Eastern Ranges and sometimes by their aboriginal name, Corrhanwarrabul Ranges (sometimes spelt Corranwar- rabul as in the 1884 report referred to in ‘Naturalists of Yesteryear’ in the same issue ( Victorian Nat. 96: 95). It would be more accurate to say that the present Mount Dandenong was called by the blacks Corranwarrabul, restricted in meaning to that mountain alone, as it was not their usual custom to assign names to such large regions as these ranges cover; indeed they had separate names for much smaller areas than an entire mountain. That early F. N.C.V. excursion to Mount Corranwarrabul was actually a trip to Mount Dandenong, which many readers would not have realized. The aborigines used names for places that they did not always know the meaning of, and the meaning ‘lofty’ or ‘lofty mountain’ is probably a white man's assumption. | have searched all the early Victorian vocabularies of Aboriginal words published in the second volume of R. Brough Smyth’s ‘The Aborigines of Vic- toria (1876), and no name like Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Dandenong appears in any of them. Aldo Massola, in *Aboriginal Place Names of South-East Australia and their Meanings’ (1968), has this entry for Dandenong: Dan-y-nong or Tan- jenong, to be going to eat; or tang. frost, jenong, foot, i.e. frost-bitten feet (presumably from bleak weather in the high country). Massola's entry for Dandenong Ranges and Mount Dandenong reads: Cor-han-warabul, the camp of the drinking water of the kangaroo. | do not know what sources he used for the above — he did talk to some of the oldest fullblood survivors, but the tribes near Melbourne died out very early — Dandenong was in the ter- ritory of the Bunurong tribe (known to the white man as the Yarra Yarra tribe), whose lands extended from the Werribee River to Western Port and inland to the Latrobe River. Massela, in ‘Journey to Aboriginal Victoria' (1969), refers to a second Yarra tribe, the Woewurong, who roamed the northern areas of this range (not coastal, like the Bunurong). A. W. Reed, in ‘Place Names of Australia’ (1973) and ‘Aboriginal Place Names and their Meanings' (1967), gives the meaning of Dandenong as ‘high’ or ‘lofty’, but his books were not compiled from primary sources, but from various published aboriginal word books. By the late James A. Baines. a O On Lawns, Wildflowers, Weeds and Orchids It is almost thirty years since we came to Pascoe Vale. That long ago it was a district of open space and sparse settlement, We estab- lished our home on the north-eastern slope of grasslands (mainly ‘‘onion-grass’’ by the way) that dipped down gently from the Gaffney Street plateau to a swamp that eventually drained into the Moonee Ponds Creek. The little valley of the creek that fed the swamp is now built on, the creek itself has been converted to an underground barrel drain and the swamp no longer supports its one-time population of frogs, mosquitoes and other aquatic animal and plant life. Ibis, heron and plover no longer browse there although, occasionally, we do still hear the call of the plover who must surely visit the place for old times’ sake. Now the Indian mynah, sparrow, starling and blackbird have taken over the territory, joined, sometimes, by a mudlark or two. Now and again the air is enlivened by the squawk of some ravens, the cooing of a pair of doves or the trill of an English thrush but, despite the fact that our garden is packed with native trees and shrubs we now see and hear few native birds. Once upon a time we used to glimpse scarlet- breasted robins, restless fly-catchers, willie wagtails, welcome swallows, swifts, superb blue wrens, pallid cuckoos, spinebills, magpies, crimson wattle-birds, little wattle- birds and two or three of the other and smaller honey-eaters and, one evening, an owl! But not now. Certainly, there is plenty of birdlife far above us — flocks of one sort or another on the move to fresh feeding grounds or to roosting sites — but, down below here, wattle-birds, greenies and silver- January/February eyes seem to be the only birds that bother to forage among the foliage and blossoms of our shrubs and trees. However, we acknowledge the advent of the pack of sulphur-crested cockatoos that descended upon us recently (or, to be strictly accurate, that descended on our neighbour's walnut tree) and of a few galahs that have wheeled about the place on some sort of reconnaissance. As it once was When we first came here there were plenty of skinks to be seen scurrying away from wherever they happened to be sunning themselves. We saw no snakes although it was well known that tiger snakes slithered about among the abundant artichoke thistles, box thorn clumps and basalt rocks that were to be seen further down the valley towards the Moonee Ponds Creek. Oddly enough, it was not until 1978, some twenty-eight years after our mahogany gum was planted, that our first **paddy-foot" — a marbled gecko — was discovered. It was sunning itself on the rough bark of that gum tree. We haven't seen it since. Was it a survivor from the past or was it an accidental or deliberate introduction? Loads of firewood are no longer brought to households in our neighbourhood so we feel sure that our gecko did not arrive in a load of firewood — in recent times, at any rate. Our neighbours are not given to collecting live reptiles so we discount that proclivity as a likely means of its introduction here. Surely it is a relic of bygone days or a descendant of such relics. It was seen on only the one occasion but we still 23 hope that it is a resident and that it has access to a mate and that it (or they) dwell among a dreadful collection of timber and derelict hardware that is dumped in the decrepit shed of the people next door and that it has not been discovered and despatched by any of the army of domestic cats that infest the neighbourhood. We have a love-hate relationship with cats. When we possessed them they were showered with affection but we were glad when they eventually departed this life. We are now able to blame other people's cats for the depletion of the once abundant stock of native fauna in our area — especially the small birds, skinks and other little edible creatures that were a part of the ecosystem hereabouts. The establishment of a complete set of houses and their gardens together with the paved streets on what was once those open grasslands has, of course, had a far greater impact on our environment than the cats of the district. Plants, past and present And what of the native vegetation? The first one hundred years of occupation of this region as a pastoral ‘run’ for sheep and cattle altered the composition of the vegeta- tional ground cover bevond recognition by the shade of any European pioneer who may have gazed upon it that long ago. The place where we live is on the edge of a part of one of the ‘‘recent’’ lava flows. Indeed, the soil of our backyard is that heavy and sticky (when wet) or rock-hard (when dry) basaltic clay which cracks open in summer. Probably it supported an array of herbaceous plants of a type that still survive in a few places on the Keilor and Werribee Plains. When we came here we found a few indigenes such as blushing bindweed, billy button, curled everlasting, twining glycine, autumn grass-lily, swamp isotome, both slender and glistening dock, a Spear grass and a couple of wallaby grasses. There were (and still are) a few others such as kidney weed and the native paspalum which refuse to be suppressed. No doubt there were other species in places a little distant from our place but we were, at that time, much too busy establishing hearth and home to thoroughly explore the environs and, by the time we had reached a stage when time for such explora- tion had become available, other houses and gardens had covered the paddocks, As an item of interest we should mention that the lava flow referred to above appears to have terminated at a spot that is now underneath our kitchen, From thereon the soil is a nice workable loam that is faintly coloured with iron oxide, It overlies the white clay and water-worn pebbles that, together, form the bed of what was once an ancient 24 stream. We managed to acquire a sizeable load of this slightly calcareous gravel plus an assortment of sandstone rocks of various shapes and sizes from depths ranging from one to two metres when the trenches were being dug to accommodate sewer pipes. The gravel was excellent for the odd jobs of concreting that we undertook in those days. We still have some! As for the sandstone, it was distributed in strategic places in the front garden to provide root shelter for the many native plants that have been introduced during our years of occupation. Orchids in the lawn Ours is a curious sort of garden; especially so in the front of the house where what are usually shrubs graduate to robust trees and where Mallee plants mingle agreeably with those from east coast habitats or from mountain fastnesses, from the sand plains of Western Australia or the banks of the River Murray. Alpine plants have been tried. Some have endured for years and died either of old age, mischance or neglect. Some which others grow with no trouble at all just won't grow in the spots we select for them but, at least, we can now boast of orchids growing in the backyard lawn. That so-called lawn is an area of about seven metres by seven metres. When we first knew it it was well vegetated with couch grass, two kinds of paspalum, onion grass, various docks, dandelion, cape weed, a few sorts of thistle as well as cape tulip and thread iris. We had it rotary hoed and then laid out a conventional lawn. With the passage of time the conventional character has become somewhat subdued. The couch and paspalum have re-established themselves and, in between, there is a rich growth of three or four species of oxalis, a grand crop of thyme speedwell, some kidney weed, nice patches of a little club-rush, Scirpus americanus, a few tufts of onion grass and more than occasional plants of thread iris and cape tulip along with such other gems as cudweeds, a willow-herb, a storksbill, a bitter cress, field madder, corn spurrey and, perhaps, a few others. It would seem that most of these species have just "dropped in" so to say and, finding the habitat agreeable, remain to thrive and multiply until we happen to discover them and wage a campaign of extermination as we have done with clovers, medics, dandelions, cape weeds and sow thistles. However, among these intruders in our lawns is one that was first noticed in 1975, while mowing the grass (and other plants). I noticed a leaf that reminded me of that of an onion orchid or à leek orchid. The site was left unmown to allow the leaf to develop. It did but eventually it withered leaving the identity of the plant unrevealed. In the winter of the Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 following year there appeared two of those leaves at the same spot and, in November a flower spike emerged to reveal that the orchid was Microtis unifolia, Since that time the number of plants has steadily increased until now, in 1979, there are eleven. From the six plants noted in 1978 there developed three flower spikes. We got half a dozen spikes this year. Because of the history of the '*lawn'' it is highly improbable that the tubers of the plant were there in 1950. Rotary hoeing tends to bury surface material a bit too deep down for survival of anything less tenacious of life than paspalum which can make its way back to the surface through nearly half a metre of soil. We have never brought Microtis tubers on to the property and even had we done so we would not have discarded them onto the backyard lawn. No. The first plant must surely have derived from an air-borne seed that just chanced to lodge in a suitable niche in the grass and then, perhaps, washed into the soil by rain or hosing, there to germinate under conditions which were just right. In the world of plants native orchids were our first love. We have never lost interest in them nor ceased to admire them but |, at least, have a sneaking regret that chance did not blow in a seed of, say, a purple diuris. That species was once a native of the district, as we know, because, years ago, we came upon a small surviving colony of it in flower in the railway reserve beside the track between Fawkner and Campbellfield. We wonder whether the colony still persists there. Another experience we have enjoyed suggests that it is not all that peculiar to have purple diuris growing in a backyard lawn. Years ago, when in Queensland, we visited the rather unique freshwater lake Cooloolah which is situated in the dunes and about a couple of kilometres inland from Laguna Bay. After lunching beside the lake we tracked through the bush towards the coast and came upon a week-ender’s holiday house not far from the beach. To our astonishment we saw dozens of flowering plants of the diuris scattered about on the spacious lawn. We recognized it as a backyard lawn because there was a clothes hoist in the middle of it. And we believe there is a lesson to be learned from such occurrences: don’t overdo your lawn mowing. Among the consequent rank growth you may chance to discover something rare, uncommon or unusual! J. Ros. Garnet O Naturalists of Yesteryear By R. SIMMONS An interesting issue of **The Victorian Naturalist’? is Number 9 of Volume 4. The whole issue is given over to what ap- pears to be a major exercise by the Club, an expedition to King Island. The issue gives an excellent insight into the condi- tions which early naturalists had to suf- fer in their quest for knowledge, as well as showing the contribution to science that naturalist excursions make. When landing on King Island, *'Mr. Garraway, the Superintendent of the Wickham lighthouse had come out to meet us in his boat and kindly volun- teered to accompany us to our main camping ground." However, ‘towing to the nature of the coast and sea, we had to be landed a mile and a half to the south of the landing site." Because of this unfortunate occurrence it was necessary to carry all our luggage but “by dint of hard work we had all impor- tant stores under shelter and tents up January/February before dark". This was lucky for the ex- pedition as ‘‘the evening brought rain, and the next morning broke dull and threatening, with a cold, easterly wind. “The first two or three days were oc- cupied, between intervals of pouring rain, in making short excursions for some few miles into the surrounding country." It was decided “‘that the party separate — some to go right across the island to the east coast’’. This party which had the longest route to follow suffered greatly from the elements. “Travelling was rendered extremely un- comfortable by the rain, which fell in torrents," they followed a track which ‘lies completely under water, rendering walking somewhat difficult until the hunter's hut, known as Bertie Camp, was reached. Here a halt was made, a huge camp-fire lighted, and ti-tree boughs laid down to sleep upon, as the ground was soaking wet." Because of these conditions '*when a start was made 25 (early next morning), two members of the party were staving at Bertie — one being too unwell to proceed and the other remaining behind to tend him." Despite these setbacks and conditions the expedition gathered much informa- tion about King Island. ** With regard to the botany, specimens of plants have been submitted to the Baron von Mueller who kindly promised to name them for the Club. So far as it goes at present the list is seen to contain 204 species, of which 16 are imported weeds leaving 187 common to Victoria and Tasmania and one found in Tasmania and not in Victoria.” The fauna was “of considerably greater interest than the flora and shows the island to be Tasmanian rather than Victorian. With regard to mammals the evidence is both negative and positive. In the lowest forms, the Monotremes, the platypus was not captured, but the echidna is more distinctly the hairy variety (E. setosa) of Tasmania. In the marsupials the evidence is negative in the absence of numerous forms found in Victoria and positive in the presence of the wallaby (Halmaturus billardierii) and brush kangaroo (H. bennettii) of Tasmania. In the birds the evidence is more strik- ing. So far, 69 species have been iden- tified of which 54 are common to Tasmania and Victoria, 14 are peculiar to Tasmania, and only | to Victoria.” The reptiles and fresh-water fish “were forms common to Tasmania and Victoria" but from the evidence that was collected the author concluded “that King Island is allied naturally as well as politically to Tasmania. Zoologically, the differences between the mainland and Tasmania are not very great, consisting in the presence of a cer- tain number of different species of mammals and birds peculiar to Tasmania King Island is still poorer, zoologically; but in its peculiar species, as already seen, it resembles Tasmania.” Editor's note: The three species of mam- mals reported in this article have all since had their names updated, Thus the echidna is Tachyglossus aculeatus (there exists only one species of Tachyglossus) and as for the macropodids, H. billiardierii (the pademelon) is Thylogale billardierii whilst H. bennetti (Ben- nett’s wallaby) is considered con- specific with the mainland red-neck wallaby (Macropus rufogriseus). A Comparison of Three Techniques Used in a Reptile Survey of the Conondale Ranges BY DAVID A. MILTON* Introduction The purpose of the majority of faunal surveys has been to provide information on species distribution and habitat preference. They have tended to involve short-term intensive fieldwork, while attempting to maximize return in terms of species present and numbers of in- dividuals. Suitable faunal survey tech- niques should ensure that all habitats have been sampled effectively (Pat- temore, 1977). *10 Stanford Street, Robertson, Qld. 4109. June 1979, 26 A recent study has compared reptile survey techniques in Queensland rain forests (Queensland Museum, 1977) and concluded that knowledgeable search and hand collection was the most effec- tive technique for surveying rain forests reptiles. The Conondale Ranges, an area of wet sclerophyll and rain forest, 120km N.W., of Brisbane (see Figure 1), has a unique and specialized faunal assemblage. Several vertebrate species have restricted ranges and are of great scientific interest. For example, Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 1. Sampling Area. the leptodactylid frogs Rheobatrachus situs and Assa darlingtoni both possess reproductive strategies which do not oc- cur in other amphibia (Corben et a/ 1974, Ingram etal 1975). Czechura (1976, 1978) listed the reptiles of the Conondale Range and established a range extension for Litoria brevipalmata. The complex reptile fauna and vegetation of the Conondale Ranges of Queensland offer a natural laboratory for comparing the three survey methods. The present study will compare the knowledgeable search and hand collec- tion technique with two other techniques of reptile surveying: road transects and walking transects, and assess their relative efficiency in terms of species and specimen numbers returned. January/February LEGEND a Atel ment boundary Ò road transects T walking transects HE Approrimate Area where Knowledgable Hand Collecting was undertaken Methods A. Collection Methods: Three techniques were employed to systematically sample the reptile fauna of Coongoongibber Creek catchment: (Figure 1) (1) Knowledgeable hand collecting: The technique involved turning and destructive sampling of logs, litter, trees and pursuit of specimens. The tech- nique, although qualitative, has been widely used to obtain the full comple- ment of reptile species in an area when undertaken by experienced field workers (Cogger and Lindner, 1974; Storr and Smith, 1975, 1977; Queensland Museum, 1976, 1977). (2) Road transects: The technique in- volves travelling in a vehicle set 27 distances at a predetermined speed, along roads. The method has been used to determine relative changes in densities of animal populations (Wight, 1959; Newman, 1959; Kline, 1965). Data can be expressed as the average number of specimens observed per kilometre travelled. In this study, well-used forestry roads were travelled at night and during the day. (3) Walking transects: The technique involves walking an arbitrarily defined distance at a predetermined rate (x paces/hr) and during this time, turn- ing all logs, stones, bark, etc. and searching the ground and canopy by eye and identifying any specimens observed. Pattmore (1977) recommended that for simple survey work, extended walking transects in cold and/or overcast con- ditions could be most effective, as animals are likely to be torpid and easier to capture. During this study, the method was employed along forestry trails, little used roads and in straight lines across the terrain. This differs from (1) above, in that it was employed along defined routes, independent of habitat. Knowledgeable hand collection, though, is habitat selective, being biass- ed by the collector's concepts of the most suitable habitats to detect specimens. B. Methods of Analysis: To determine whether the three methods were comparable, in terms of species collected, an overlap of return Index was calculated, using the com- munity comparison coefficient of Whit- taker (1973), Sab Sa + Sp where DI-— Overlap Index Sa= number of species detected by method A only DIS Sb = number of species detected by method B only 28 Sa = number of species detected by methods A and B. The index has been used primarily to compare the species composition of two floristic communities, however the cal- culations are meaningful in faunal assemblages. The relative efficiency of each method was assessed by a simple efficiency index for species and specimens collected. EA = SA ta where Ea = efficiency of method A (Sp./hr) SA= species collected by method A ta = time (hrs.) expended using method A S Esxi— LAU [xi where Esx — efficiency of Method X (no./hr.) Sx: = total specimens collected by method S X! = time expended using method X (hrs.). Results A total of 138 specimens were col- lected using the three methods between 17 September 1978 and 29 October 1978, representing 29 reptile species from nine families. Table 1 contains a list of the species collected and the number of individuals of each species, using the three tech- niques, including the total number of specimens from each species (A) and the total number of specimens collected us- ing each technique (B). The table shows that walking transects produced the largest number of specimens and species while hand collecting provided the least. The best represented family from the Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 TABLE 1 Numbers of each species collected by the three techniques. TECHNIQUE A Family Species Driving Walking Hand Total No. Individuals Chelidae: Elseya latirostrum —— 3 — 3 Gekkonidae: Oedura tryoni — 4 — 4 Agamidae: Amphibolurus barbatus 3 — — 3 Physignathus leseurii 1 7 3 11 Varanidae: Varanus varius 15 8 — 23 Scinidae: Anomalopus verreauxii — 4 1 5 Ctenotus robustus — 1 5 6 Egernia frerei 6 1 7 E. major — — 1 1 Hemiergis graciloides — 2 — 2) Leiolopisma sp. (delicata) — 3 4 7 L. challengeri — 2 — 2 Morethia boulengeri — 2 — 2 Sphenomorphus murrayi — S 4 9 S. quoyii — 3 — 2: S. tenuis — 2 1 2) S. scutirostrum — — 1 1 Tiliqua gerrardii 4 — — 4 Typhlopidae: Typhlina sp. — 9 — 9 Boidae: Morelia spilotes 1 — — 1 Colubridae: Amphiesma mairii 1 1 — ps Dendrelaphis punctatus ze 8 1 16 Elapidae: Cryptophis nigrescens 3 2 — 5 Demansia psammophis 2 — — 2 Hemiapis signata — 1 — 1 Pseudechis porphyriacus S — 1 6 Pseudonaja textilis 1 — — 1 Trophidechis carinatus 1 — — 1 B TOTAL 44 71 23 138 TABLE2 TABLE 3 Species efficiency index of the Overlap index comparison between the three three methods. techniques. : Time Methods Compared Overlap Index Species Involved Efficiency " Technique Collected (hrs) Index Hand vs. walking 0.258 — Walking vs. driving 0.161 Driving Transects 12 10.7 1.12 Driving vs. hand 0.125 Walking Transects 19 23.0 0.83 Hand Collecting 11 14.0 0.86 TABLE 4 Specimen efficiency indexes of the three methods. Time Specimens Involved Efficiency Technique Collected (hrs) Index Driving Transects 44 10.7 CY bk ee) Walking Transects 71 23.0 3.22+0.77 Hand Collecting 23 14.0 1.64+ 0.00 January/February 29 table was scincidae, with 52 specimens of a total of 139 while Varanus varius was the most abundant species with 23 individuals sighted. Table 2 contains an analysis of the composition of the fauna of the three techniques using a co-efficient of com- munity, from Whittaker (1973). As expected, the hand collecting and walking transects showed the greatest similarity, due to the employment of basically similar techniques. Walking and driving transects were the next most similar both having followed established forestry roads. Driving and hand collec- tion yielded the lowest overlap Index. Table 3 contains a simple species effi- ciency index for the three methods used. It shows that the walking transects and hand collecting appear to be equally ef- ficient while driving transects was some- what more efficient than the other two techniques. All compare favourably with the overall species efficiency index of 0.61. The results presented in Table 4 show that hand collecting appears to be less efficient in specimens returned than the other two techniques. While driving returned the highest specimen efficien- cy, it also has the highest variability in return with a much greater standard er- ror than the other two techniques. Walking transects appears to produce the most reliable high specimen return. The overall specimen efficiency, of 2.89, is less than either of the two transect col- lecting techniques, while greater than hand collecting methods. Table 5 shows that walking transects provided over half the species and specimens obtained, which represented 40% of the 46 known reptile species of the area. While the other two techniques produced only slightly more than half this percentage. The total species number collected, in 47.7 hours of field- work, provided over 60% of the known reptile fauna, which was compiled from ten years data (G. Czechura, pers. comm.). 30 Discussion A total of 29 species of reptiles were collected during this study which com- pares favourably with the 46 known species recorded by Czechura (1976). These species probably represent the commonest or more accessible species in this area. There were several habitat types which were not represented in the Coongoongibber Creek catchment but which were included in Czechura’s (1976) discussion of the Conondale Range reptile fauna. This suggests that 29 species represents a fairly close ap- proximation of the total reptile fauna present in the Coongoongibber Creek catchment. Table 2 indicates that the three tech- niques employed in their study sampled different reptile fauna elements. Whit- taker (1973) stated that an overlap Index of less than 0.5, suggests that the tech- niques employed are sampling different communities. This contention is sup- ported in this study by the data obtained from road transects (see Table 1). A total of 21 snakes were collected by the road transect technique while only 14 specimens were collected by the other two techniques combined. This pro- bably can be explained in terms of snake thermo regulatory behaviour, which results in their seeking warm open areas, such as roads, for rapid heat uptake. The result of the species efficiency In- dex in Table 3, compared the rate of detection of new species, between the sampling techniques and overall the sampling techniques. It indicates that there is little relative difference in the species detection efficiency between the three techniques using this index. However, the fact that each method's species efficiency index was higher than the overall species index means that, although they sampled different faunal elements, there was some species redun- dancy between the techniques. The specimen efficiency index presented in Table 4 demonstrated that the technique of driving transects produced the Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 greatest number of reptile specimens per hour. However this technique had the greatest redundancy of previously en- countered species, where some species are encountered more frequently than new species. The technique of driving transects also has the problem that detection rate is extremely variable. The number of specimens located in each transect varies greatly. This suggests that the efficiency of this technique is closely dependent on environmental conditions in each transect, e.g. ambient temperature. This study has highlighted several of the problems facing scientists con- ducting short-term faunal surveys of an area. To be effective, the data presented here suggests that the techniques used must account for behavioural require- ments and habitat preferences of species present. Surveys which employ only one method are restricted in the groups of reptile likely to be encountered. The results of the survey will reflect this un- conscious bias in the habitats sampled and the species detected. An example of this can be found in (Storr and Smith 1975, 1977), where few snakes were col- lected, relative to a likely complement present. It appears that if a reptile faunal survey is to adequately sample the largest proportion of the total reptile complement in any particular area that at least two methods are necessary. The most effective techniques will vary within the vegetation structure of the area in question. In this study, con- ducted in closed forest and tall open forest it appears that the two transect techniques employed were the most ef- fective. They provided 26 of the total 29 species collected. Acknowledgements I wish to acknowledge the help of Dr M. Sabath for supervising the project and for critically reading the manu- script. Mr P. Mather offered valuable help in manuscript preparation and in January/February the field, Travelling expenses were met by the School of Australian Environ- mental Studies, Griffith University. REFERENCES Cogger, H. G. and Lindner, D. A. (1974). Frogs and reptiles. /n Frith, H. J, and Calaby, J. H. (eds.) Faunal Survey of the Port Essington District, Coburg Peninsula, N.T. CSIRO Div. Wildlife Res. Techn, Paper No. 28: 68-107. *Cogger, H. G. (1975). Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia. Reed: Sydney. Corben, C. J., Ingram, G. J. and Tyler, M. J. (1974). Gastric Brooding: Unique Form of Paren- tal Care in an Australian Frog. Science 186: 146-7. Czechura, G. V. (1976). Additional Notes on the Conondale Range Herpeto Fauna. Herpeto fauna 8 (2): 2-5. Ingram, G. J., Anstis, M. and Tyler, M. J. (1975), Observations on the Australian Leptodactylid. Frog Assa darlington, Herpetologica 31 (4): 425- 9 Kline, P. G. (1965), Factors Influencing Roadside Counts of Cotton Tails. J, Wildlife Mgmt. 29: 665-71. Newman, D. E. (1959). Factors influencing the winter roadside count of cotton tails. J. Wildlife Mgmt. 23: 290-4. Pattemore, V. (1977). Effects of the pulpwood in- dustry on the wildlife in Tasmania. NPWS, Tasmania, Wildlife Div. Techn. report 77/1: 1- 142, Queensland Museum (1976). The National Estate: Moreton and Wide Bay Burnett Regions. Co- ordinator Gen. Dept. Brisbane. (1977). Fauna of Eastern Australian Rain Forest: A preliminary report on sites surveyed by the Queensland Museum in south-eastern and far north-eastern Queensland with additional results from sites surveyed previously in north-eastern Queensland. Qld. Mus. Brisbane. Storr, G. M. and Smith, L. A. (1975). Amphibians and reptiles of the Prince Regent River Reserve, north-western Australia. /rr Miles, J. M. and Bur- bridge, A. A. (eds.) A Biological Survey of the Prince Regent River Reserve, North-west Kimberleys, W. Australia in Aug. 1974. Wildlife Res. Bull. West. Aust, 3: 1-116. Storr, G. M. and Smith, L. A. (1977). Amphibians and reptiles of the Dryside River National Park, North Kimberley, W.A., In Kabay, E. D. and Burbridge, A. A. (eds.). A Biological Survey of the Dryside River National Park North Kimberley, W.A. in Aug. 1975. Wildlife Res. Bull, W. Aust. 6: 1-133. Whittaker, R. H, (1973). Communities and Ecosystems, 2nd ed. McMillan; New York, Wight, H, (1959). Eleven years of Rabbit Popula- tion Data in Missouri. J. Wildlife Mgmt, 23: 34-40. 31 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 249 in the previous issue) By JAMES A. BAINES Stenopetalum. Gk stenos, narrow; petalon, petal; because the petals taper into long points, sometimes twisted after flowering. Our 3 species are known as different kinds of Thread-petal. The genus is cruciferous. *Stenotaphrum. Gk stenos, narrow; taphron, a trench; alluding to the nar- row rhachis of the spike. "S. secundatum, Buffalo Grass, is the well- known coarse lawn grass, and it is thoroughly naturalized in many parts of Victoria. Native to Africa and tropical America, the U.S. vernacular name, St. Augustine Grass, comes from the name of the oldest town in Florida, founded by Spaniards in 1565. Sticherus. Gk stichos, a row or line; er- possibly from erion, wool; from the woolly appearance of the rows of sori. The genus was set up by C. Presl in 1836, but it is only since 1940 that three of our fan-ferns, formerly in Gleichenia, have been transferred to it, a change not endorsed by all botanists. The family is Gleicheniaceae. Stipa. Lat stipa, tow, the coarse part of flax (from Gk stuppe, tow); from the feathery inflorescence. Victoria has 22 native species, all known as kinds of spear-grass except S. setacea, Cork- screw Grass, and S. nitida, Balcarra Grass, and 1 introduced species, *S. neesiana (named after the botanist C. G. Nees von Esenbeck), indigenous to temperate South America. Strongylospermum. Gk strongylos, round; sperma, seed; a former name of Cotula reptans, Creeping Cotula, superseded since 1867. Family Com- positae. 32 Stylidium. Gk stylos, column; because the stamens are united with the style to form a column. Australia has 110 endemic species, with 80 restricted to the S.W. of W.A., but Victoria has only 8 — the widespread Grass Trigger- plant, the Giant Trigger-plant, S. laricifolium (= larch-leaved) in far East Gippsland (Wingan Inlet), Grampians Trigger-plant, S. soboliferum ( = bear- ing shoots or sprouts). Hundreds and Thousands, S. inundatum, and 4 others. The genus gives its name to fami- ly Stylidiaceae. Stypandra. Gk stype (stuppe or styppe), tow, the coarse fibre of hemp or flax; alluding to the woolly stamens; aner, andros, man. Victoria has 2 species, known as Nodding Blue-lily and Tufted Blue-lily respectively. The genus is close to Dianella in family Liliaceae. Styphelia. Gk styphelos, hard, rough; alluding to the stiff prickly-pointed leaves. Victoria has 2 species, including S. adscendens, Golden Heath. Some botanists have included in Styphelia species of Leucopogon, Astroloma, Lissanthe and some other epacridaceous genera, but the splitters appear to have won out against the lumpers! Suaeda. Arabic suwaida, blackish, the Arabs' name for S. vera (according to Black), for S. baccata (according to Gilbert-Carter). "Victoria's species are S. australis, Austral Seablite, and an unidentified introduced species grow- ing at South Kensington. Blite has no relation to the English word blight, but comes from Lat blitum (Gk bliton), a tasteless herb used in salad. The genus belongs to family Chenopodiaceae. Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 OBITUARY A.J. Swaby At its last general meeting the Club neglected to refer to the passing of one of its oldest and most respected members — Mr Arthur James Swaby — who died on 20th October, 1979 at the age of 92. To make amends for this omission it is proper that an appropriate tribute be paid at this meeting by reminding older members and informing more recent members of the significant part Arthur Swaby played in Club affairs from the time he became a member in July, 1928 until recent years when age brought about its restraints. I understand that he was born in Benalla and, in course of time, joined the Education Department which he served with distinction until his retirement in 1952. He was said to have been a very capable teacher and, had his family circumstances allowed of it, he could have proceeded to a degree course at the Teachers’ College. However, that did not happen and he followed the usual course and eventually became the head master at several country schools — notably Horsham, and finally at Hampton. His stay at Horsham accounts for his deep interest in the natural history of the Wimmera, including the Little Desert and The Grampians which he explored during those earlier years. Remember, he had as contemporaries such men as H.B. Williamson and Charles Daley — both teachers. Indeed he joined the Club at a time when its membership included many of our most notable amateur botanists and field naturalists of considerable ability and renown. His own natural history interests were wide, as indicated by reference to the Club’s Author Index in which his contributions to the Naturalist from 1934 to 1970 included 48 entries dealing with an interesting diversity of topics, many of them containing an overt or covert appeal to Club members to observe, investigate and record those little bits of information that, in toto, provide an answer to those many mysteries and problems that beset the biologist. January/February His first note in the Naturalist was an account of a Club excursion to Belgrave. In typical Swaby style he acknowledged the help he had received as leader of the excursion from a young Forestry Officer — one J.H. Willis who was credited with a profound knowledge of the cryptogams of the area. He was a regular exhibitor at general meetings, most of his exhibits being items that seemed to demand an explanation or arouse the question ‘‘Why is it so?” If he had the answer, he gave it. During his first year of membership he assisted in running the Club’s Wildflower Show and by that time, having become well known to other members, was, in 1931, elected to the office of Assistant Honorary Secretary and Librarian. Following the illness and subsequent death of Mr Rodda, the then Honorary Secretary, he succeeded to the office and held it until October, 1932 when he induced Mr Stan Colliver to take over the duties. The proposal to establish a Botany Group in 1945 brought Mr Swaby back into active involvement in Club affairs. In view of his long experience as a teacher it was inevitable that he should conduct a course in elementary botany with especial reference to native plants. When the Wildflower Garden Section was formed he was in that too — pressing the cause of preservation of Australian plants by cultivation in the garden. In May, 1947 he was elected Vice President but, because of his many other commitments, he steadfastly declined to accept subsequent nomination as President. Some of those other commitments included his involyement with the post-war League of Youth and the Club’s own sub-committees including Heathland Reserves, Youth Movements and the Maranoa Gardens Advisory Committee. In-1955, having retired from the Education Department, he was encouraged to serve on the Club’s Council in place of Mr Fred Lewis and, after compelling persuasion, was nominated as President, an office he occupied with distinction in the year 1956-57. Now approaching his seventies, he remained active and alert. His only complaint (made to me personally) was 33 that his term as President had obliged him to acquire a hearing aid! In that year he (with a couple of other enthusiasts — I was one) laboured with pick and shovel to lay out a nature trail in the Coranderrk Sanctuary. This project was undertaken at the request of the Committee of Management of the Sanctuary. The trail may still be there for all | know. Another enterprise in which he concerned himself was the Kalorama Show at which garden grown native plants were prominently featured. This and similar events in other districts set him thinking about’bringing together these growers of native plants. In no time the thought had crystallized into action and he gently converted the Club's Wildflower Garden Section into an independent body which he named the Society of Growing Australian Plants. Its first meeting took place in June, 1957. It is worth putting on record that all of the officers of the new society were members of the FNCV. Not only was Arthur Swaby its founder and Organizing Secretary but he produced and edited a printed newsletter. Eleven of these leaflets were issued between January, 1957 and March, 1959. In June, 1961 its place was taken by a roneoed newsletter which continued for eight years during which time Mr Swaby, in recognition of his services to the, by that time, well established and Commonwealth-wide Society, was elected an honorary life member. In 1968, after having served the Field Naturalists Club with what can only be described as unremitting energy for forty years, he qualified for election as one of its honorary life members. Being then in his 81st year the distinction was, to say the least, well merited. On the occasion of the presentation of his certificate of honorary membership in July of that year, his friend of long standing, J.H. Willis, recounted some of the achievements of the recipient. I feel honoured to have been invited to dwell upon and, where appropriated even enlarge upon some of them. Along with several others, I have been closely associated with him during the past thirty years and will always recall his self-effacing modesty, his reluctance to pose as an expert in matters in which he was indeed one and his ever-present urge to impart knowledge. Obviously, his vocation was education and, insofar as it affected his fellow members of the Club, he pursued it successfully. My wife and I were among the too few members of the FNCV who attended his funeral. J. Ros. Garnet. A recent stranding of the Strap-toothed Whale, Mesoplodon layardi (Gray) (Ziphiidae) from Victoria, and a review of Australian records of the species. BY JOAN M. DIXON* Introduction Little is known of the biology of the strap-toothed whale Mesoplodon layar- di. Described by Gray (1865), and known from southern waters only, there are few documented records of this species. Bruyns (1971) mentioned that approximately thirty-seven specimens are known. Gaskin (1968) and Baker *Curator of Mammals, National Museum of Vic- toria. 34 (1972) listed nineteen and twenty specimens from New Zealand respec- tively. The Australian records have never been documented. An investiga- tion of the holdings of the species in Australian museums has revealed the ex- istence of twenty-three specimens from Australia excluding photographs and in- cluding the most recent record which is reported here. This specimen is the third record of the species from Victoria and the first male from the State. Vic.Nat. Vol. 97 The family Ziphiidae, commonly known as Beaked Whales, contains five genera and eighteen species. The promi- nent beak is common to all members of the family, and in most species, the lower jaw which is slightly longer than the toothless upper jaw, has one or two pairs of teeth. These show considerable sexual dimorphism. As a rule they are small or rudimentary in females, and larger and more conspicuous in males of the same species. Mesoplodon layardi, the strap- toothed whale, was described by J. E. Gray (1865) following observations made by E. L. Layard, Keeper of the South African Museum at Capetown en- titled **Notes on Whales of the Cape”. 199°] lè 140* 135° 130° 125° 120° 115° | | | uea2o aiyioeg unos att we | ] o | | ERO A | DEA a I] oO | SUE o 2 b = Bases) e Ne. 5 S S 5 4 & « c ~ 5 go o I B, r $, 5 £ B e ia FEN: v it 9o — in. = I T im bs: NX Y X D 4) 3 c S "m [e] ed T Q - E * p o g E: r i $ UO o E $4 Oo Oo " a z: © e pag So i [^7] { d [ > v a Seer (ul (0 es) kE ad n 0 3 Rod 0 3 Loy a a a 3 0 nh A d 2 £& Tj, Sh HR Td E RUN dd Roc! d es er iE RIMIS eti e Ww cd d A o e Dod A A g Bow dod A o P g od A Roo p epu esr v & B aj N El v S gi RE A 2 E ur ye e 2? & Ge ei wh Ss ECTS De a0 eda er £ 3 OP Mey) wi as E 3 SETTE ot os cy " 9 E& m" Gee o 9 & $3 Mu o 9 Sd T oE m9 = y 3 cm Gs] & ES vu E = d i ds n = ze m m m e 2 2 B m E e z m RC BOE dc. pris 29) TAS I a CE Mes cM ce py co mth 755 Da a Hae Gy a D Da Cc) uo | ch wG wa g us o MAMMATS AD od DO, SD E zo eer Au. fei) ie em ae ire hey Sed A y a 9 BÓ »9 d MAMMALS oo et eS aa eh A Gla & S 4a se a AlAs fk cut oe. eu UE T2 K x wd , z i ; e = r Sugar glider Petaurus breviceps ERN RE MIT Pee ONES TE DR Mr uit; EE coh dotem. Tuar Phascogale tapoatafa STIR SNG O t T pi 3rush-tail possum Trichosurus vulpecula rz + Uy NET J Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus + BIRDS “azpie Gymnorhina tibicen a 6 6 8 6 | Is B March/April Fig. 1. A powerful owl pellet, intact, showing cranial remains of an adult tuan. Photograph by A. Easton, Queensland Museum. = wn Fig. 2. Adult male tuan trapped recently in the study area on Mt. Alexander, central Victoria. Photograph by D. Gibbons. 60 collected on four occasions during 1979; 7 June, 26 July, 15 August and 30 September. Identifications were made from both cranial and postcranial skeletal material and in some cases from hairs. All intact pellets were dried, weighed (average individual whole weight, 6 g) and examined separately. Disintegrated pellets were weighed to provide an estimate of the numbers of pellets originally present. Material col- lected 7 June represented approximately 23 pellets (dry weight 140 g), that col- lected 26 July approximately 50 pellets (305 g, 35 intact), that collected 15 August approximately 40 pellets (240 g, 24 intact) and that collected 30 September approximately 60 pellets (360 g, 20 intact). Maximum numbers of prey species were best indicated by dentary and max- illary counts for mammals and humerus counts for birds. Table 1 shows that heaviest predation on tuans occured in the May-June period while insignificant numbers were taken in July, August and Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 September. Predation on sugar gliders continued throughout the study period with greatest numbers taken during July. Heavy predation on brush-tail possums Trichosurus vulpecula Oc- curred in September. All brush-tail re- mains in pellets were those of juveniles whose permanent premolars had not erupted. During July and August, when mammal prey diversity was at its lowest, heavy predation on magpies occurred, Fig. 1 shows a powerful owl pellet, in- tact, containing cranial remains of an adult tuan. Discussion Results shown here point to the ob- vious absence of ringtails in the owl's diet. Although Menkhorst and Gilmore (1979) indicate that ringtails are ‘uncom- mon and widespread' in central Vic- toria, and although the Forests Commis- sion, Victoria records ringtails as oc- curring on Mt. Alexander, their com- plete absence in owl pellets supports the observation of the Bendigo Mammal Survey Group that although ringtails oc- cur in central Victoria, they do not occur in the study area. In the absence of ringtails and greater gliders the Mt Alexander powerful owls take sugar gliders as their primary winter mammal prey item, with heaviest predation occuring in July. These gliders are also considered ‘uncommon and widespread’ in central Victoria (Menkhorst and Gilmore 1979). In a study of the feeding ecology of powerful owls, Tilley (1979) found that at Cor- anderrk (Healesville, Vic) and Gor- mandale, Vic, sugar gliders formed a significant part of the owls’ diet (second to ringtails) and that while these gliders were present at a third locality, Pt. Ad- dis, Vic, they were replaced as secondary food items by the Australian magpie Gymnorhina tibicen, the Australian raven Corvus coronoides and the grey currawong Strepera versicolor. Tilley also noted that, at Healesville, the sugar gliders were primarily preyed on in autumn and the ringtails in winter. March/April Although the sugar gliders at Mt Alexander appear in each month's pellets, lowest numbers were taken in August, at which time highest predation on magpies was recorded. Whether this change reflects on a low mammal (and particularly a low glider) availability, a more accessible magpie pool or a change in preferences associated with the owls' possible nesting activities at that time it is not known. The dramatic appearance of young brush-tails in the diet during September and the concurrent disappearance of magpies reflects the owls’ preference for large but manageable mammalian prey. During this month, owls capitalized on the emergence of autumn-born brush- tail joeys, which travel on their mothers’ backs for about two months after emergence from the pouch (Tyndale- Biscoe 1973). It is possible that during these months the young possums are at- tacked and snatched by the owls while riding on their mothers’ backs. The heavy predation indicates a significant factor involved in the extremely high mortality rate which operates on juvenile brush-tails (Tyndale-Biscoe 1973), The heavy predation on tuans is uni- que. Although tuans are regarded as ‘uncommon to rare in the south, not recorded in the north’ of central Vic- toria (Menkhorst and Gilmore 1979), it appears that at Mt Alexander relatively high densities occur. This is supported by the results of a trapping survey con- ducted on Mt Alexander by the Bendigo Mammal Survey Group during 1979. From a total of seven sites on the moun- tain, three individual males and two in- dividual female tuans were collected during the period 24 February-2 March, while during the period 8-12 May four individual males and four individual females were trapped, marked and released. Of these six were trapped at heights exceeding 5 m from the ground. One of these individuals, an adult male caught 11 May 1979 is shown in Fig 2. 61 Fig. 3. Adult tuan Phascogale tapoatafa, a newly recorded addition to the diet of powerful owls Ninox strenua. Photograph by Stan Breeden, Queensland Museum. 62 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Other mammals trapped in the area in- cluded the house mouse Mus musculus, black rat Rattus rattus, and the yellow- footed antechinus Antechinus flavipes. Although the same sites were trapped on every night between August 11-25 only one female tuan was caught (24 August). This female had seven hairless pouch young indicating their birth in early July. A number of other observations suggest a mid-winter parturition for Vic- torian tuans. In 1934 Fleay recorded the early July births of three young to a cap- tive female tuan. A female, lactating from eight nipples was trapped at Mt. Alexander on 25 November 1976 (Menkhorst and Gilmore 1979). In the light of mid-winter births of tuans in Victoria, the poor trapping results during August, and the abrupt decline in tuan predation by powerful owls after June it is very tempting to view these events in light of the well documented stereotyped antechinus reproductive pattern — the most rele- vant features of which include a popula- tion peak around autumn, a frantic mid- year period of mate-seeking and wandering by males, followed by a male *die-off' and female nest-attachment and trap-shyness. The substance of these predictions will, no doubt, be elucidated by the results of the current trapping program being undertaken by the Ben- digo Mammal Survey Group. Acknowledgements The field assistance of Mr. R. Speechley and Mr. J. Robinson is gratefully acknowledged and our thanks are due to the Bendigo Mammal Survey Group for access to their records and the Victorian Fisheries and Wildlife Divi- sion for their co-operation with permits. We wish to thank Mr John Seebeck of the Arthur Rylah Institute for En- vironmental Research, Victoria and Ms. Jeanette Covacevich of the Queensland Museum for reading and criticizing this work. REFERENCES FLEAY, D. (1934). The brush-tailed phascogale. First record of breeding habits. Victorian Nat. 51: 88-100. (1949). The Brush-tailed Tuan. A Story of a fruitless vigil. Wildlife. March. (1968) Nightwatchmen of Bush and Plain, Brisbane: Jacaranda Press. FORESTS COMMISSION, VICTORIA. Mt. Alex- ander State Forest. (Information booklet). MENKHORST, P.W, and GILMORE, A.M. (1979) Mammals and Reptiles of North Central Victoria. Mem. Natn. Mus. Vict., 40: 1-33. SEEBECK, J. H. (1976) The diet of the Powerful Owl Ninox strenua in Western Victoria. Emu 76: 167-169. TILLEY, S. (1979) Predation by the Powerful Owl (Ninox strenua) on small marsupials in Victoria. Aust. Mam. Soc. Inc. Bull 5(2):28. TYNDALE-BISCOE, C. H. (1973) Life of Mar- supials. Edwards Arnold, London. The Effects of Introduced Animals and Plants in Australia The FNCV in conjunction with the Depart- ment of Environmental Studies at Rusden State College, are planning to hold a Sym- posium on *''The Effects of Introduced Animals and Plants in Australia"' on Sunday, 27 July, 1980. The symposium arose orginally from an idea of having a special issue of the Victorian Naturalist based on this theme; but in view of the public interest in this area and also that 1980 is the FNCV's Centenary Year, it is now planned to hold a Symposium in which invited speakers will present papers on different aspects of exotic flora and fauna in Australia. It is hoped that the following will be covered during the Symposium: dogs, cats, birds, pigs, carp, trout, molluscs, March/April weeds, boneseed, blackberry and aquatic plants. The venue is to be lecture theatre AB 100, Rusden State College, 662 Blackburn Rd, Clayton. We anticipate that the Symposium will commence at 9.00 a,m. and be concluded by 4.30 p.m., and that pre-registration of people wishing to attend will be necessary (to facilitate printing of abstracts, catering etc.). It is hoped that each paper will be publish- ed in booklet form during September, as well as be printed in Volume 98 of the Victorian Naturalist. Further details regarding speakers and their subjects and on registration will appear in the next issue of the Victorian Naturalist. 63 Mesoplodon bowdoini Andrews (Ziphiidae): a New Whale Record from New South Wales Bv C. R. TIDEMANN* Abstract Two female specimens of Andrew's Beaked Whale, Mesoplodon bowdoini, were stranded on the NSW Coast, south of Bermagui, in August, 1974. These ap- pear to be the fifth and sixth records of this species stranded in Australian waters and considerably extend its known distribution, Introduction Andrew's Beaked Whale, Mesoplodon bowdoini, has been known previously in Australia from only four specimens. The first of these stranded at Bunbury, Western Australia in 1944, (Glauert, 1947), the second and third in Tasmania, at Stanley in 1947 and Marion Bay in 1967, (R. M. Warneke, personal communication; Guiler, 1967) and the last at Hordern Vale Beach, in Victoria, in 1968 (Dixon, 1970) (Fig. 1). Only six animals are known to have come ashore in New Zealand (Gaskin, 1968). M. bowdoini, thus appears to be either a rare animal, or an uncommon strander, in Australia and New Zealand. Stranded animals Both whales reported here came ashore at about the same time, August 23, 1974. The first washed up at Bunga Beach, 16 km south of Bermagui and the other 7 km south of Bermagui at Bar- ragga Bay (Fig. 1). They were in an ad- vanced state of decomposition when | recovered them in October 1974. The first animal was still lying on the beach and it was possible to partially flense it. The second had been buried below the high tide mark by local residents and flensing was not feasible, Li Department of Zoology, Australian National University, Box 4,, PO, Canberra, ACT 2600. 64 The skeletons of both animals were macerated and are now stored in the Zoology Department collection, registered numbers 2180 and 2181. Ex- cept for some damage to the ribs, the smaller skeleton (2180) is virtually entire and has been articulated. Extensive damage had been done to the skull, vertebrae and ribs of the other, presumably by wave action on rocks, and it has been stored disarticulated. 2180 is a subadult female, as judged by the unfilled pulp cavities in the teeth and unfused vertebral epiphyses. The total length from the tip of the beak to the caudal fork was 329 cm. 2181, also a female, is larger and adult, with com- pletely ankylosed vertebral epiphyses and the pulp cavities of the teeth filled; total length 457 cm. Both animals were identified as Mesoplodon bowdoini by reference to McCann (1962), Moore (1963) and Moore (1968). Acknowledgements I should like to record thanks to Mr J. B. Russack of Dignam's Creek, NSW for reporting to me the locations of the stranded whales and for stoically endur- ing the unpleasant smell during the recoveries; and Wendy Lees for drawing the figure. REFERENCES Dixon, J. M. (1970) Two new whale records from Victoria Mesoplodon bowdoini Andrews (Ziphiidae) and Balaenoptera edeni Anderson (Balaenoptenidae). Victorian Nat. 87: 88-93. Gaskin, D. E. (1968) The New Zealand Cetacea. Fish. Res. Bull. No. 1 (New Series), N.Z. Guiler, E. R. (1967) Strandings of three species of Mesoplodon in Tasmania. J. Mammal. 48: 650-652, McCann, C. (1962) Key to the family Ziphiidae, Beaked Whales. Tuatara 10: 13-18. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Moore, J. C. (1963) Recognizing certain species of beaked whales of the Pacific Ocean. Am. Midl. Nat. 70: 396-429. Moore, J. C. (1968) Relationships among the living genera of beaked whales with classification, diagnoses and keys. Fieldiana, Zool, 53: 209- 298. Figure 1. Records of stranded Mesoplodon bowdoini in Australia and New Zealand. Animals reported in this paper and other occurrences. A Check List of the Victorian Pyrenomycetes and Loculoascomycetes What are Pyrenomycetes and Loculoascomycetes? Like the Discomycetes, they are fungi which belong to the Ascomycetes, that is, fungi which typically produce 8 spores within a sac-like sporangium or ascus. Pyrenomycetes are very numerous and the asci are contained in flask- shaped or round fruiting bodies. Many of the small black fungi common on dead branches belong to this group. The asci are club- shaped or round, do not open by a hinged lid or operculum, and have a single wall (unitunicate). They are produced in bundles at the base of the flask-shaped fruiting body or in a layer lining the inside of a closed, spherical fruiting body. March/April Fungi belonging to the other group includ- ed in this check list, the Loculoascomycetes, also produce their spores within a sac-like ascus, but the ascus has two distinct, separable walls. These can often be seen with a microscope because the outer wall, which is thick and inextensible ruptures near the apex and the thin inner wall expands into a long cylindrical sac with an apical pore through which the ascospores are discharged in suc- cession. The asci are embedded in cavities in a mass (stroma) of fungal tissue. The following Check list of Victorian Pyrenomycetes and Loculoascomycetes is compiled mainly from collections made in Victoria since 1963. Except in a few cases where the collection was too small for divi- sion, part of each collection was sent either to Kew Herbarium or the Commonwealth 65 Mycological Institute, England. In these two Institutions all local determinations were either confirmed or corrected and unnamed collections identified where possible. Experience would seem to indicate that this list contains most of the larger Victorian species, as collecting during the last few years has yielded little not previously recorded. No doubt there are still numbers of the smaller and inconspicuous species that have not been collected but here again, perhaps due to changing forest distribution and climatic con- ditions, the last few years have yielded very few species not previously gathered. An in- crease in the number of collectors would help greatly but because of the inconspicuous ap- pearance of the Pyrenomycetes and their allies, even those who are interested in the fungi tend to overlook them. With this Check List we have followed the same course as with the Discomycete check list and, with one exception, have ignored all previously published lists. This is because of the difficulty in identifying with certainty the species and genera contained in these lists. The exception is the list of Cordyceps species with key published by Dr J. H. Willis in Muelleria, Vol. 1, No. 2, 1959. Here we have listed all species recorded for Victoria, keep- ing separate those species we have not col- lected or examined; these are species of which further collections are urgently needed. The taxonomic systems used are, for the Pyrenomycetes, that of E. Muller and J. A. von Arx and for the Loculoascomycetes, E. S. Lutterell, both from The Fungi, Vol. IV A, edited by Ainsworth, Sparrow and Sussman and published by Academic Press, 1973. The following is a short list of references useful in the determination of the Pyrenomycetes and their allies: Dennis R.W.G. British Ascomycetes, J. Cramer, 1968 & 1977, also British Cup Fungi, Ray Society, 1960. Luttrell E. S. Loculoascomycetes in The Fungi, Vol. IV A Martin P. Studies in the Xylariaceae l- VIII, Journal of South African Botany, 1967-70 Miller J. H. A Monograph of the World Species of Hypoxylon, University of Georgia Press, 1961 Muller R. & von Arx J. A. Pyrenomycetes in The Fungi, Vol. IV A Munk A. Danish Pyrenomycetes, Copenhagen, 1966 (reprint) Willis J. H. Australian Species of the Fungal Genus Cordyceps, Muelleria, Vol. 1, No. 2, 67-89, 1959, The list records 117 species of 58 genera from 19 families of Pyrenomycetes and Loculoascomycetes collected in Victoria. ASCOMYCOTINA PYRENOMYCETES Meliolales Meliolaceae Asteridiella coprosmae Hansf. Meliola baileyi Hansf. M, lanosa Pat. var. funerea (McAlp.) Hansf. M. sp. Coronophorales Coronophoraceae Calyculosphaeria collapsa (Romell) Fitzp. Fracchiaea heterogena Sacc. Nitschkia floridana Fitzp. Thaxteria leptosporoides (Wint.) Fitzp. Sphaeriales Melanosporaceae Microthecium beatonii Hawksw. M. perplexum Hawksw. Phaeostoma lagenarium (Pers. ex Fr.) Munk Verrucariaceae Pharcidia epicymatia (Wallr.) Wint. Sordariaceae Bombardia facsiculata Fr. Lasiosphaeria hirsuta (Fr.) Ces. & de Not. L. ovina (Fr.) Ces. & de Not. L. spermoides (Hollm. ex Fr.) Ces. & de Not. ESSm Pleurage Fr. sp, Sordaria anserina (Ces.) Wint. S. bombardioides Auersw. Polystigmataceae ? Glomerella Spauld. & Schrenk sp. Hypocreaceae Creopus Link - Chromocrea Seaver C. gelatinosus (Tode ex Fr.) Link C. sp. Gibberella cyanogena (Desm.) Sacc. Hypocrea citrina (Pers. ex Fr.) Fr. H. macrospora Dingley H. sulphurea Schw. H. sp. Nectria haematococca Berk. & Br. N. cf. inventa Pethybridge Nectria mammoidea Phill. & Plowr. N. ochroleuca (Schw.) Berk. N. sp. Protocrea farinosa (Berk. & Br.) Petch Sphaeriaceae Anthostoma Nitschke sp. Calosphaeria Tul. sp. CM (Uepfiiap, callimorpha (Mont.) Sacc. . Sp. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Niesslia exosporioides (Desm.) Wint. Rhynchomeliola Speg. sp. R. sp. Diaporthaceae Ceratosphaeria crinigra (Cke.) Sacc. Endoxyla Fuckel sp. Clavicipitaceae Barya agaricicola (Berk.) Hohnel Claviceps purpurea (Fr. ex Fr.) Tul. Cordyceps cranstounii Olliff C. gunnii (Berk.) Berk. C. hawkesii (Gray) Cke. C. militaris (Fr.) Link C. robertsii (Hook.) Berk. C. scottiana Berk. ex Olliff C. taylori (Berk.) Sacc. C. zebrina Willis & Beaton (unpublished). Cordyceps species in Willis (1959) not col- lected or seen. C. aphodii J. Mathieson C. ?bicephala Berk. C. brittlebankii McLennan & Cookson C. coxii Olliff C. furcata McLennan & Cookson C. meneristitis F. Muell. & Berk. Diatrypaceae Diatrype stigma (Hoffm. ex Fr.) Fr. Eutypella russodes (Berk. & Br.) Berl. Peroneutypa heteracantha (Sacc.) Berl. Xylariaceae Anthostomella chionostoma (Dur. & Mont.) Sacc. A. wyalongensis Petr. A. sp. Daldinia concentrica (Bull. ex Fr.) Ces. & de Not. Hypoxylina Starb. sp. Hypoxylon archeri Berk. . bovei Speg. bovei Speg. var. microspora Miller . confluens (Tode ex Fr.) West. cf. diatrypeoides Rehm . hians (Berk.) Cke. howieanum Peck . investiens (Schw.) Curt. nummularium Bull. ex Fr. . rubiginosum (Pers. ex Fr.) Fr. . serperis (Pers. ex Fr.) Kickx H. serpens (Pers. ex Fr.) Kickx var. macrospora Miller H. uniapiculatum (Penz. & Sacc.) Miller H. vogesiacum Pers. var. microspora Miller Penzigia cf. cantarirense P. Henn. Poronia punctata (L. ex Fr.) Fr. Rosellinia inspersa (Berl.) Sacc. R. cf. nitens Ces. R. thelena (Fr.) Rab. R. sp. Sarcostromella spathulata (Berk. & Br.) Boed. rrIIEILIIIE March/April Xylaria anisopleura (Mont.) Fr. X. apiculata Cke. X. feejeensis Berk. var ?faveolis (Lloyd) Dennis . mellisii Berk. .. multiplex Sacc. c, readeri Muller -. zealandica Cke. sp. Amphisphaeriaceae Lejosphaerella Hohn. sp. LOCULOASCOMYCETES Dothideales Capnodiaceae Capnodium salicinum Mont. Dothideaceae Mycosphaerella lineolata (Rob. & Desm.) Schroet. Pleosporales Botryosphaeriaceae Botryosphaeria dothidea (Moug. ex Fr.) Ces. & de Not. Sporormiaceae Delitschia bisporula Phill. & Plowr. D. winteri Phill. & Plowr. Sporormia megalospora Auers. Pleosporaceae Asteromassaria macrospora (Desm.) Hohnel Didymosphaeria Fuckel sp. Leptosphaeria juncicola Rehm L. parvula Niessl L. plagia (Cke. & Mass.) Hohn. L. sp. Ophiochaeta (Sacc.) Sace. sp. Pleospora herbarum (Fr.) Rab. Trematosphaeria Fuckel sp. Hysteriales Hysteriaceae Gloniella normandina Rehm Glonium stellatum Muhl. Hysterium angustatum (Schw. & Alb. ex Fr.) Chev. H. cf. berengerii Sacc. Hysterographium mori (Schw.) Rehm Mytilidion Duby sp. xxx G. Beaton, Eildon, Victoria. G. Weste, Botany School, University of Melbourne. 67 Pre-impoundment Distribution of Fishes in the Lerderderg River, Victoria By J. P. BEUMER* AND D. J. HARRINGTON* Introduction If the movement of fishes in the form of upstream or downstream migrations is restricted, the success of the fish com- munity, particularly its longitudinal distribution, abundance, individual growth and spawning success may be impaired (Meek 1916; Heape 1931; Hall 1972). Consequently when the Victorian State Rivers and Water Supply Commis- sion proposed the construction of a small diversion weir on the Lerderderg River the Fisheries and Wildlife Division conducted a number of pre- impoundment surveys of the fish distribution of this river. The Division requested that a fish-ladder be in- corporated in the weir to permit both upstream and downstream movement of aquatic organisms, particularly fishes. The results of those surveys are reported here and the effects of the weir's con- struction are considered. Study Area The Lerderderg River, fed by springs, flows southwards from the Great Dividing Range and forms part of the Werribee River coastal drainage (Fig. 1). The catchment area, about 50 km north-west of Melbourne, falls within a forestry reserve, the habitat of which has been altered little except by gold-prospecting. The diversion weir, about 8 km upstream of the southern end of the Lerderderg Gorge is designed to divert water through a series of tun- nels to the nearby Merrimu Reservoir. *Freshwater Fisheries Section, Arthur Rylah In- stitute for Environmental Research, Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Heidelberg, Victoria. 3084. 68 Fish-ladder The fish-ladder is a pool-type fishway (Sakowicz and Zarnecki 1962) with full weirs and submerged orifices (Fig. 2). The upstream inlet is below the minimum water level in the storage to ensure that the fish-ladder will always be operative. A compensation flow is to be maintained downstream of the weir to provide habitat for aquatic organisms as well as irrigation water for riparian market gardens. Method The Lerderderg River was sampled at irregular intervals from March 1976 to May 1979. Sampling sites (Fig. 1) were selected for accessibility and the location of the weir. O'Briens Crossing was sampled on 6 occasions, the Weir and Lower Gorge on five, and Blackwood on one. At O'Briens Crossing, Weir, and Lower Gorge, four methods of sampling were made: electrofishing (with a 240 v d.c. unit, fishing 100 m of 4 $ 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 $ ua a d aa Fig. 2. Lateral view of fishladder steps, showing full weirs and orifices. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 > March/April Blackwood 1 ® O'Briens Crossing Weir 3 — oO X, oO [S e . eS Merrimu Gorge RG Reservoir D i oO EA Melton Reservoir 144°30'E Fig. 1. Sampling sites in the Lerderderg River and Melton Reservoir, 69 stream); fyke nets (mesh-size 20 mm); mesh nets (mesh-size 65 and 90 mm) and direct observations. The fyke nets and mesh nets were used in pools where the depth of water limited the efficiency of the electrofishing unit. At Blackwood, only electrofishing was us- ed. In addition, Melton Reservoir, situated on the Werribee River, was sampled once (February 1979) with a series of mesh nets (from 25 to 152 mm, in 12.7 mm gradations) and fyke nets (20 mm). Each fish captured in the Lerderderg River was identified, measured (total length) and weighed. Those captured in the Melton Reservoir were identified and fish at the limits of the length and weight ranges were measured. Specimens not required for laboratory analyses were released. Results Distribution of 10 species of fish taken during the survey are present in Table 1. Four species were recorded on- ly from the Lerderderg River System: river blackfish Gadopsis marmoratus Richardson, 1848, common galaxiid, Galaxias maculatus (Jenyns, 1842), Australian smelt, Retropinna semoni (Weber, 1895), and brown trout, Salmo trutta Linnaeus, 1758; two were com- mon to both the Lerderderg River System and Melton Reservoir: short- finned eel, Anguilla australis Richardson, 1841 and roach, Rutilus rutilus (Linnaeus, 1758), and four fur- ther species were recorded only from Melton Reservoir: English perch, Perca fluviatilis Linnaeus, 1859, tench, Tinca tinca (Linnaeus, 1758), common carp, Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus, 1758, and Table 1. Total length and weight ranges of fishes caught at four localities on the Lerderderg River, March 1976 — February 1979, and Melton Reservoir, February 1979. (EN, fyke net; MN, mesh net; EF, electrofishing; +, direct obervations) Locality; Sampling Date — Species No T.L. range (mm) Wt. range (g) method Blackwood Mar.76 — Short-finned eel 1 * Brown trout 29 90-249 5-185 EF O'Briens Crossing Mar.76 — Short-finned eel 2 594-690 400-640 EF River blackfish 4 132-288 25-185 Brown trout 27 107-304 15-250 Jan. 77 — Short-finned eel 2 415-570 110-280 FN River blackfish 5 213-272 30-100 Jan. 78 Short-finned eel Y 313-672 40-520 EF River blackfish 3 78-223 10- 85 Brown trout 1 20 5 Oct. 78 — Short-finned eel 1 495 215 EF River blackfish 2 160-100 35- 70 Brown trout 3 132-148 25- 40 Crayfish l 150 Nov.78 Crayfish I EF Feb. 79 — Short-finned eel 3 445-640 195-520 EF River blackfish 8 100-275 15-125 Brown trout 5 90-225 10-115 Crayfish 3 180-560 70 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Table 1. (Cont'd) Locality/ Sampling Date Species No. T.L. range (mm) Wt. range (g) method Diversion Weir Site Mar.76 — Short-finned eel 9 216-514 20-265 EF River blackfish 14 73-287 5-185 Brown trout 10 106-230 15-115 Jan. 77 . Short-finned eel 5 465-727 160-710 FN River blackfish 4 164-280 20-210 Brown trout 8 215-335 80-310 FN,MN Jan. 78 . Short-finned eel 7 255-482 30-210 EF River blackfish 10 98-236 10-100 Brown trout 8 80-285 5-215 Feb.79 Short-finned eel 1 940 940 EF River blackfish 6 200-305 60-195 Brown trout 5 111-275 20-215 May 79 Short-finned eel 1 B Common galaxiid 1 Brown trout B 120-155 15- 35 EF Lower Gorge Apr.76 River blackfish 17 49-25] 10-120 EF Australian smelt 1 41 Brown trout 3 103-244 10-145 Roach 15 142-165 25- 45 July 78 | River blackfish 1 185 65 EF Nov.78 Short-finned eel 2 470-690 195-660 EF River blackfish 2 167-224 35- 81 Nov.78 Brown trout 2 209-210 102-111 EF Crayfish 1 19 Feb.79 River blackfish 8 100-250 10-120 EF Brown trout 1 270 190 May 79 River blackfish 2 165-200 40- 60 EF Common galaxiid 1 — Brown trout 3 260-370 10-550 EF Melton Reservoir Feb.79 . Short-finned eel 2 603-663 400-570 FN Roach 106 189-284 65-275 FN,MN English perch 69 155-395 35-1095 FN,MN Tench 2 216-364 140-760 MN Common carp 27 126-628 35-3700 FN,MN Goldfish 4 232-271 235-480 MN March/April 71 goldfish, Carassius auratus (Linnaeus, 1758). Of all these species only four are native fishes, the short-finned eel, river blackfish, common galaxiid, and Australian smelt, with the remainder be- ing exotic fishes. In addition, freshwater crayfish (Eustacus sp.) and long-necked tortoise (Chelodina longicollis (Shaw)) were recorded from the Lerderderg River and Melton Reservoir respective- ly. While the numbers of individuals varied between samples and between sites, three species of fishes, short- finned eel, river blackfish and brown trout, were distributed throughout the Lerderderg River System, whereas the remaining species occurred infrequently and at fewer sites. Discussion Construction of a weir and subse- quent diversion of water will alter the distribution of the fishes by modifica- tion of the water-flow regime and physical division of the river. To some extent, the pre-impoundment fish distribution of a river system may be maintained by a suitable fish-ladder which permits upstream and down- stream movement of fishes (Clay 1961). The species most affected by construc- tion of the diversion weir on the Lerderderg River will be the native fishes, short-finned eel and river blackfish, and to a lesser degree, the ex- otic brown trout. Because eels are catadromous, juveniles of this species require unrestricted access to the head- waters and mature adults to the lower reaches of this river system. Although the biology of the river blackfish has not been fully documented, this species is sensitive to modification of habitat (Jackson 1978). Brown trout may often move long distances to locate suitable gravel in which to spawn or to utilise dif- ferent feeding areas. The effect on brown trout below the Weir will be less as annual restocking of the Werribee 72 River with brown trout allows for recolonisation of the lower reaches of the Lerderberg River by this species. Any increased siltation below the Weir, either as a result of the weir's construc- tion or an inadequate compensation flow may affect the spawning of both river blackfish and brown trout as the eggs of both species are demersal. Ex- cessive siltation may also result in changes in the composition of benthic invertebrate and subsequently the food available to fishes. The impoundment created upstream by the Weir may also provide habitat for species other than those presently occurring in the Lerderderg River, the majority of which are exotic species, e.g. English perch, carp, tench, which prefer the more stable habitat afforded by such im- poundments. Acknowledgments We would like to thank Darwin Evans and Peter Jackson for advice and criticism of the draft manuscript. Thanks are also extended to staff members of the Freshwater Fisheries and Environmental Studies Sections, Arthur Rylah Institute for assistance with field work. Alicia McShane prepared the figures. REFERENCES Clay, C. H. (1961), Design of Fishways and other fish facilities. Dept. of Fisheries of Canada, Ot- tawa. 301 pp. Hall, C. A. 5. (1972). Migration and metabolism in a temperate stream ecosystem. Ecology 53: 585- 604 Heape, W. (1931), Emigration, Migration and Nomadism. W. Heffer and Sons, Cambridge. 342 pp. Jackson, P. D. (1978). Spawning and early develop- ment of the river blackfish, Gadopsis mar- moratus Richardson (Gadopsiformes; Gadop- sidae), in the Mackenzie River, Victoria. Aust, J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 29: 293-298. Meek, A. (1916). The Migrations of Fish. Edward Arnold, London. 414 pp. Sakowicz, S. and Zarnecki, S. (1962), Pool passes — biological aspects in their construction (Engl. transl.) Roczniki Nauk Rolniczych 66, Ser.D. (1954): 5-171. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Additional Records of Plants from the Mallee By P.D.C. CHEAL* Introduction The overall aim of Beauglehole (1979) in his report ''The Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee” is **. . . to pre- sent the most reliable and detailed ac- count possible. . .'' (p.1), for use by the relevant land managers and others in- terested in land use. As MacFarlane states in the 'Forward' (sic) to that publication ‘‘It (the report) represents a remarkable individual attempt to docu- ment ... the present distribution and status of plant species over the great area of the Victorian Mallee.” Never- theless, additions, deletions and further qualifications to the report can be ex- pected as the region becomes better known. Much of Beauglehole's field survey work had to be done during sum- mer, some even in drought years, and consequently many species, particularly annuals which are such a feature of the region's flora, would have been missed. After all, the region does comprise 43000 sq. km. — 19% of the state. From February 1978 to February 1979 a team consisting of three research of- ficers (J. C. Day and P.D.C. Cheal and C. W. Meredith) investigated the effects of fire in the Mallee, with funds provid- ed to the National Parks Service (Vic- toria from the Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. An interim report has been prepared and a final report will be published soon. The main study areas investigated were Hattah Lakes National Park, Wyperfeld Na- tional Park, central-west Sunset Coun- try and Little Desert National Park (out- side the Mallee region). A large part of *National Parks Service (Victoria), ; 240 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne, Victoria, 3002. March/April the study consisted of a floristics-based vegetation analysis and, as a conse- quence, much information was collected on the distributions and abundances of many plants. Where this information adds new records or clarifies distribu- tions discussed by Beauglehole (1979) it is presented below. Major and minor grids are given and grid references are taken from the relevant 1:250 000 map- sheet (Mildura or Ouyen). Further records from sites already recorded for the species are not presented (e.g. Acacia myrtifolia at Red Bluff, Acacia trineura from Lake Brambruk). All specimens retained for National Parks Service, Head Office plant collection are annotated ‘NPS’. Nomenclature follows Willis (1970 & 1972), except for Gonocarpus tetragynus which is the preferred name for the plant Willis (1972) refers to as Haloragis tetragyna (see Orchard, 1975). Additional Records to Appendix 5 of Beauglehole (1979) — ‘Rare - Interesting - Restricted Species’ Acacia lineata B43,503588, roadside between Nypo and Yaapeet. Collected by A. Hall, ranger, Wyperfeld N.P., October 1979. Acacia lineolata B24,497618, Wyperfeld N.P. (NPS) 5 mature in- dividuals, (no regeneration) in riverain woodland, collected 26/11/1978, ident. M. A. Todd (Nat. Herb. Vict.). Centrolepis cephaloformis B34,505615, Wyperfeld N.P. — Freeway track (NPS). However, as Willis (1970, p.278) states this plant has been '*. doubtless overlooked because of its diminutive size and moss- like appearance.’’ The species is abun- dant in Wyperfeld (B24, B33, B35, B42) 73 and was also found at Hattah Lakes N.P. (A44, high dune immediately north of Lendrook Plain) and the Sunset Country site (A38, deep sandy dune at grid ref, 432712). Ceratogyne obionoides A39, 435713 Sunset Country — central west (NPS). Cheilanthes tenuifolia B34, 501603, Wyperfeld N.P. — 300 m north from Barry's Track (NPS). Choretrum spicatum B42, 492590, Wyperfeld N.P. — Albacutya exten- sion, in area burnt by December, 1977 fire. Comesperma calymega B33, 494604, Wyperfeld N.P. — Big Desert (NPS) but widespread and common throughout the sand heaths of the western side of Wyperfeld (B23, B24, B33, B34, B42). Danthonia pilosa The tufted Danthonia sp. widespread but uncom- mon throughout the western sand heaths of Wyperfeld N.P. (B23, B24, B32, B33, B34, B42) agreed with the description of this species very well (rings of hairs on the lemma reduced to single marginal tufts). However on one plant collected at Little Desert National Park the lem- mas, within the one spike had rings of hairs varying from reduced to marginal tufts to a complete ring. Drosera glanduligera B35, 524604 and 522606, Wyperfeld N.P. — Frog Lagoon and Dattuck Reference Area, respectively. Eucalyptus polybractea B5, 470677, Pink Lakes State Park — on dunes im- mediately south of Saltbush Flat app. 1.5 km NNW of Lake Becking (NPS). Gonocarpus tetragynus (syn. Haloragis tetragyna). Widespread throughout the sand heaths of Wyperfeld N.P. (B23, B24, B32, B33, B42). Helipterum laeve B32, 481605, Wyperfeld N.P. — Rudd's Rocks (NPS), also seen at B35, 606516, Wyperfeld N.P. — North-south Track and A39, 435713, Sunset Country — central west. 74 Hydrocotyle rugulosa B32, 482615, Wyperfeld N.P. — Big Desert (NPS), but common throughout under dense Melaleuca uncinata (B23, B33, B35) and also from A39, 441713, Sunset Country — central west. Laxmannia sessiliflora B32, 418603, Wyperfeld N.P. — Big Desert (NPS), but widespread throughout the sand heaths of Wyperfeld (B33, B34, B42), Levenhookia dubia B32, 481605, Wyperfeld N.P. — Rudd’s Rocks (NPS), but also B35, 521607, Wyperfeld — Dattuck Reference Area and B34, 514608, Wyperfeld — North-south Track. Microtis unifolia B34, 591603, Wyperfeld N.P. — beside entrance road (NPS), small colonies (app. 20) under Eucalyptus largiflorens. Olearia floribunda B34, 515604, Wyperfeld N.P. — Dattuck Track (NPS); B35, 517613, Wyperfeld N.P. — Lunar clearing (NPS), but also A40, 456712, Sunset Country — central west. Olearia lanuginosa B6, 485674, Pink Lakes S.P. — Southern boundary (NPS); B42, 492587, Wyperfeld N.P. — Albacutya extension (NPS). Orthoceras strictum B33, 485615, Wyperfeld N.P. — Big Desert (NPS), scattered in sand heath. Pimelea dichotoma B32, 483618, Wyperfeld N.P, — Big Desert (NPS). Senecio magnificus A39, 435713, Sunset Country — central west (NPS), only on deep sand in reccently-burnt mallee. Thysanotus tuberosus Undoubtedly most earlier records of this species refer to Thysanotus baueri which is common throughout the region, T. tuberosus was not seen. Trachymene anisocarpa A39, 435713, Sunset Country — central west (NPS), only in recently burnt mallee and mallee- broombrush. Velleia arguta A39, 438714, Sunset Country — central west (NPS). Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Appendix 8 of Beauglehole (1979) — ‘Deletions from the Vascular Flora of Mallee Study Area’: None of the species listed in Appendix 8, with one exception, were seen in the LCC Mallee Study Area. Many of the records (e.g. Cryptandra amara, Dillwynia glaberrima, Drosera auriculata, Hakea rugosa, Opercularia varia and Teucrium corymbosum) are doubtless misidentifications. The excep- tion 1s Lyperanthus nigricans collected from Wyperfeld N.P. — Albacutya ex- tension (at B42; Grid ref. 1:250 000 Series, Ouyen mapsheet, 492586) in sand heath burnt in the December, 1977 fire. Discussion The relatively large number of addi- tional records presented above em- phasises the lack of attention that the flora and vegetation of the Mallee region have traditionally received. For instance, the LCC Mallee Study Area report is the only LCC report that does not include a vegetation map. ''The Distribution and Conversation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee’ is an invaluable document, summarising much distributional data and highlighting significant occurrences (rare species, disjunct records etc). Were it not for this document, then the significance of the above records would not have been fully appreciated. It is interesting to note that many species known from only a few records were found to be locally common, par- ticularly in recently-burnt vegetation. Such species include Calotis cymbacan- tha, Helipterum tietkensii, Nicotiana goodspeedii, Podolepis rugata, Senecio magnificus and Trachymene anisocarpa, all herbaceous and predominantly an- nuals, but also many shrubs, such as Acacia acanthoclada, Acacia wilhel- miana and Eremophila crassifolia. These species and many others may be absent from ‘mature’ vegetation (except as seeds) but soon respond to the tem- porary lack of competition from the dominants post-fire and reappear in abundance. Before the true rarity of plant species can be appropriately assessed their responses to fire need to be known. Lack of records for Acacia lineolata, for example, indicates true rarity; lack of records for Acacia acanthoclada may indicate merely an in- appropriate fire regime (seeds are ap- parently common in the soil, the species is locally abundant post-fire). Acknowledgements Thanks are due to Ms A. Morton for criticism of the manuscript. The data were collected as part of a study funded through the National Parks Service (Vic- toria) by the Australian National Parks & Wildlife Service. REFERENCES Beauglehole, A.C. (1979), The Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee. Pub. Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association: Portland, Vic- toria. Orchard, A.E. (1975). Taxonomic revisions in the family Haloragace 1. The genera Haloragis, Haloragodendron, Glischrocaryon, Meziella and Gonocarpus. Bull. Ackl. Inst. & Mus. 10, 299 pp. Willis, J. H. (1970). A Handbook to Plants in Vic- toria Vol. I Ferns, Conifers and Monocotyledons Pub. Melbourne Univ. Press: Carlton, Victoria. Willis, J. H. (1972). A Handbook to Plants in Vic- toria Vol. II Dicotyledons Pub. Melbourne Univ. Press: Carlton, Victoria. Omission p The caption to Fig. | of the article “Observation on rock climbing by the fish Galaxias brevipinnis’’ which appeared in Vol. 96 (6), page 130, should have had the following: 1 — dry rock; 2 — occasionally washed zone; 3 — permanent water flow, March/April 75 Molluscs on Lake Mountain The F.N.C.V. Excursion to Lake Mountain on December 2, 1979 proved of special interest for molluscan observations. The weather was cool to cold with thick cloud to ground level near the summit and a fine rain. Everywhere was soaking wet with the water running down the smooth bark of the Snow Gum, Eucalyptus pauciflora alpina. Large numbers of the native slug Cystopelta petterdi were seen crawling up the tree trunks with some observed actively crawling over 5m from the ground. There were approximately 5 to 10 slugs on each tree giving a possible number of slugs between the car park and the summit of many thousands all out actively crawling in the ideal conditions. Many of the animals observed were small juveniles (8-15mm long) while animals were observed up to 70-75mm long in a variety of shades from light greeny-buff to dark greeny- brown with large black blotches. Many had large drops of viscous mucus hanging from their caudal gland. A specimen of the carnivorous snail Rhytida (?) capillacea was found by Norman Lu, one of the party. This was also about Im off the ground crawling up the trunk of a tree. Extensive searching failed to reveal any other specimens of this species. The carnivorous snail was placed in a plastic vial with a specimen of the slug found in the same area. Immediately the snail extended its head and everted the anterior part of its pharyngeal region. This was white in colour and extended about 2 or 3mm beyond the normal front of the head. The mouth was open and this was applied to the side of the slug. The slug reacted violently by turning on its side and curving its tail, withdrawing its head and secreting à milkv white mucus from its body wall around the area of attack. This attack procedure was repeated by the snail à number of times to various parts of the slug over the next 5 minutes after which the slug was immobile in a contracted position at the bottom of the tube with à large amount of colourless and milky white mucus around it. The body wall of the slug was ruptured in two places and portions of the viscera were protruding from those ruptures. Two hours later the entire body of the slug except the foot had been eaten by the snail. This is the first record 1 have been able to find of a rhytidid eating a Cvstopelta. A Sphagnum bog was sampled with a dip net and a population of the small freshwater operculate Glacidorbis hedleyi was discovered. These small snails, 1-2mm diameter were found on the vegetation in cold slightly brown acid waters. This constitutes the seventh record of this species for Victoria and adds another valuable locality record to the emerging distribution picture of this minute species (Smith, 1978). Two species of the family Charopidae were also taken on the excursion making it a very interesting day of mollusc collecting. Smith, B.J., 1978. Notes on the molluscs of the Victorian Great Dividing Range. Victorian Nat., 95(6): 236-40. Brian J. Smith Senior Curator (Zoology), N.M.V. A Method of Reconstructing Furred Mammals both Living and Extinct By M. TRAYNOR* AND K. KELI Y* It has long been a problem in natural history museums to construct life-like models of rare, endangered or extinct species of mammals for public exhibi- tion because a method has to be found *National Museum of Victoria 76 to reproduce a furred coat. In the past substitute skins such as calf or foal have been used but these are of limited use and often involve extensive alteration, There are a large number of mammals for which this substitution method Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 would not be suitable because of com- plex colour patterns or variable hair length. Experiments were therefore carried out on methods of artificially reproduc- ing the structure and effect of fur on a model. The method described here is a flocking technique used in preparing a life-sized model of the Thylacine or Tasmanian Tiger/Wolf (Thylacinus cynocephalus) for display (Fig. 1). Flocking Technique Flocking is the application of false hair to a modelled body to represent as closely as possible the true coat of the animal being reconstructed. The flock 1s a vegetable fibre dyed and dried then finely chopped by a guillotine. The col- our used depends, of course, on the animal being flocked, but no one pig- ment will achieve a natural looking col- our texture. As many as five or six dif- ferent colours may be needed to achieve the desirable finish and close study of the fur of the animal will reveal these colours. In the case of extinct or fossil animals a good imagination is helpful. *Dylon'' dyes have been successful for dying the fibre, but marketed col- ours are limited, so mixing is usually necessary. The dyed fibre is then chop- ped by guillotine to the length required which varies depending on: a) Stage of flocking — short flock is us- ed early because of a higher degree of adhesion. b) Part of animal being flocked — short flock around nose etc. c) Final applications — true length of hair used. The maximum length of flock that can be sprayed using the normally available techniques is about 12 to 14 mm. Preparation of Body With the body modelled and cast to the preparator's satisfaction, the eyes, mouth, lips and toenails are masked. The body is then sprayed with a coat of flat oil-based paint coloured as closely as possible to the colour of the animal being reconstructed. This gives a good base on which to work. A tongue can be made and inserted before or after flock- ing, but painting of all soft parts is done on completion. Fig. 1. Completed model of a Thylacine or Tasmanian Tiger furred by the flocking technique. March/April 7T Application of Flock Two spray units are needed, one of which being a flock gun. The adhesive satin finish varnish is sprayed on to the body liberally but without allowing it to run. The hair tracts of the animal are considered carefully and the flock ap- plied through the flock gun in the direc- tion of the tracts. It is advisable to spray the animal in sections. The body can then be moved into different positions so that correct direction of flock is possible. After initial flocking, the body is allowed to dry and is brushed through until all excess flock is removed and all remaining flock has correct direction. Only 20-30% of flock will adhere at first. Many applications will be needed to cover the body, allowing each ap- plication to dry and be brushed. As the flock forms a coat of hair, colour mark- ings are considered. In the case of the Thylacine the stripes were applied by spraying only those areas with varnish, and then applying the darker flock. Flocking is a very slow process. It can- not be rushed, as the varnish must be allowed to dry completely before brushing. Finishing Once a satisfactory coat is achieved, long hair areas, such as whiskers, and those around the feet can be added by hand. Soft parts are coloured and the animal is complete. It should be stressed that the models prepared in this way will not stand close scientific scrutiny. The technique is geared towards public display interest to be viewed at a given distance. Book Review Lichens of South Australia By Rex B. Fitson and Roperick W. ROGERS (Handbook of the Flora and Fauna of South Australia series, Govt. Printer, Adelaide, | Nov. 1979. 21 x 14 cm, 197 pp., 16 colour plates, 28 full-page figures. Price $10.50) South Australia is well ahead of the other States, in having such an excellent series of scientific contributions as its handbooks on flora and fauna which were initiated by the South Australian Branch of the British Science Guild in 1922. First came the Flora of South Australia (vascular plants, native and naturalized), Part 1, by J. M. Black; it sold at a price of three shillings, and it is interesting to note that the third edition of this part — albeit much enlarged and with 16 colour plates — was published only last year for $16 retail! Black’s Flora ran to four parts (1922-29); J. B. Cleland's Toadstools and Mushrooms etc. (1934-35) and A. H. S. Lucas's Seaweeds (1936 and 1947) were both in two parts, Excepting J. G. Wood's Vegetation (1937), no other botanical ti- tle has appeared in the series until now, and it is a great pleasure to welcome the trim volume under review. 78 This noteworthy book is the first at- tempt to give a systematic account of the lichen flora for an Australian State. Such a pioneering venture merits unstinted praise, as it forms a sound basis for further researches by that peculiarly dedicated breed of botanists brave enough to tackle the identification of lichens. In their introductory remarks the authors emphasize that the *'study of lichens has lagged far behind the other fields of botany"', an important reason for such neglect being ''fear of a group that is notoriously difficult tax- onomically". The dual organic com- position of a lichen (i.e. fungal frame- work enclosing a layer of unicellular algae) poses a taxonomic problem, authorities having differed widely in their choice of criteria for the delimita- tion of species. Certainly one cannot progress very far without a powerful microscope, and chemical investigation Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 is often necessary to separate species of very similar appearance. Filson and Rogers have successfully summarized what is known (and unknown) about the lichen species oc- curring in South Australia, most of which extend also to Victoria. After brief chapters on general structure, chemistry, collections from the time of Ferdinand Mueller’s arrival in 1847 to the present day, lichen ecology, field collecting and herbarium techniques, and a modern classification into orders, families and genera, there are simple ar- tificial keys to the South Australian coverage of families, those genera within families, and to genera direct. Then follows the descriptive text which is arranged alphabetically according to genera, a novel departure in the hand- book series. Where a genus has two or more representatives, there is a key to species under the generic description. In addition to genera of known representa- tion, all the ones that occur nearby in neighbouring States, and may be an- ticipated in South Australia, are also fully described. Descriptions and lists of herbarium specimens (the authors having collected a large percentage) are given for a total of 195 species; 63 of these, or almost one third, belong to the large genus Parmelia in which Mr. Filson is particularly in- terested — he was involved in the nam- ing of 17 species, and seven others are as yet without published names. All fruticose and foliose lichens are describ- ed, but in several large and still im- perfectly investigated genera of crustose lichens (e.g. Buellia, Caloplaca, Lecanora and Pertusaria) no attempt has been made to sort out the South Australian entities, except for mention- ing a few typical and widespread kinds. Aided by the glossary on page 171, most botanists would be able to cope with the distinctive lichenial terminology used throughout keys and descriptions, and anyone interested in identification of their collectings should be helped by the photographic illustrations. Black- and-white figures are clear enough; but the colour plates leave much to be desired, being generally dull, fuzzy and featureless — a result of faulty reproduction that must be very disap- pointing to the original careful photo- grapher. Filson’s line drawings, so well known to readers of the Victorian Naturalist, are up to his usual high stan- dard. A handy 15-page list of references and full index conclude this fine work which is printed on glossy paper; it will probably be the last new botanical monograph in the South Australian handbook series. — J. H, Wittis “6 H H , Kosciusko Alpine Flora by A. B. Costin, M. Gray, C. J. Totterdell, D. J. Wimbush 23 cm x 15 em, 408pp including 170 colour pages. CSIRO/ Collins 1979. Board bound. Recommended retail price $25.00. **Kosciusko Alpine Flora" is a book many people have been waiting for. As far as 1 know, nothing has been available about our high country since the 1970 publication on alpine plants by Thistle Harris which includ- ed montane and sub-alpine species as well as alpine ones, was directed to the layman, and did not attempt to be comprehensive. **Kosciusko Alpine Flora'' is limited to alpine plants (i.e. those above the tree-line — ap- proximately 1800 m (6000 ft) in the Kosciusko National Park. It is organised for the professional botanist although the March/April layman will find it equally useful, and is as comprehensive as present knowledge permits. But its interest is not limited to botanists. The book opens with some brief informa- tion on the Kosciusko environment, basic geology, and white man’s exploration, study and impact. Plant communities are discussed, supplemented by vegetation maps, tables, diagrams and photographs of habitats. Then follow botanical keys and descriptions of about 200 species of vascular plants; all but a few are illustrated in the next 126 colour pages. The descriptions are very adequate, 79 accompanied by useful notes on distribution elsewhere as well as at Kosciusko and on habitat. But synonyms are sadly missed. The book ends with a lengthy bibliography, a lengthy glossary, and a com- plex but easily understood index. The visual quality of ‘‘Kosciusko Alpine Flora'' is as good as its scientific contents. It is printed on a firm, matt-surface paper with generous surrounding space, and the classic serifed type remains highly readable even in the smallest italics. The first part of the book includes 17 pages of black and white and 40 pages of colour photographs. They will delight every reader, whether or not he is in- terested in the geological and/or floral aspects they illustrate. There are one, two or three shots per page, some are superb, and the colour reproduction is remarkably good — a sufficient range of tones and none of the raw crude colour that we see in too many books about Australia. Thoughtful typography and generous space make the pages of botanical keys and descriptions as pleasant to look at as they are easy to use. 360 colour photographs of flower species with comments alongside are great aids to identification, especially for the layman. Common names are included but, although form and colour are evident in the pictures, there are no statements regarding size — and photos can be very misleading. Here is an ex- treme example. Photos of the largest and smallest alpine buttercups are on the same page, but the latter is shown larger than the former! The reader must turn to the index to locate the botanical descriptions where he finds that Ranunculus anemoneus is some six times larger than R. millanii. Such faults could be avoided if every photo carried a multiplication number alongside. Photo 176 x 1/3 and 177 x 4 would give the reader an idea of their actual size. The authors of *‘Kosciusko Alpine Flora’’ have surely succeeded in their aim to produce a book of scientific merit combined with popular appeal. Although specific to Kosciusko, I surmise that it will be bought by everyone with an interest in any of our alpine areas. And the book is produced wholly in Australia. It is gratifying that the work of our Australian craftsmen (designer, type-setters, plate-makers, printer, etc.) can equal that of our Australian scientists, long renowned for their high standards. “Kosciusko Alpine Flora’’ is now in the FNCV library. See it and you'll want to possess it! MARGERY J. LESTER AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Amount on hand invested December 1979 Miss Helen Aston Mr Graeme Love (2nd Donation) Blackrock Field Naturalists Club Native Plants Preservation Society (2nd Donation) Western Australian Naturalists Club Field Naturalists Club of Ballarat Field Naturalists Club of Sale & District Mid Murray Field Naturalists Trust Mr E. Jensz Mr Robin Sandell (3rd Donation) Total March 1980 $882.00 $50.00 $ 7.00 $10.00 $10.00 $50.00 $25.00 $ 5.00 $ 7.50 $ 2.00 $ 9.00 $1057.50 IMPORTANT — Subscriptions Secretary New Address — Please post all subscriptions to Subscription Secretary F.N.C.V. C/- National Herbarium. The Domain South Yarra. Victoria. 3141. Do not post to Mr F. Koth as he is no longer Subscription Secretary 80 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The members of Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Report by Executive Council the Executive Council submit herewith Balance sheet as at 31 December 1979 and income and expenditure account for the year ended on that date, and report as follows:— l. a The Net Surplus of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1979 was $461 which, added to the Surplus brought forward at | January 1979 of $9,643, together with a transfer of $136 from Club Improvement Account, resulted in an Ac- cumulated Surplus to be carried forward to next year of $10,240. . The members of the Executive Council took reasonable steps to ascertain, before the income and expenditure account and balance sheet were made out, that all known bad debts were written off and adequate provision was made for doubtful debts, . The members of the Executive Council took reasonable steps, before the income and expen- diture account and balance sheet were made out, to ascertain that the current assets, other than debtors, were shown in the accounting records of the company at a value equal to or below the value that would be expected to be realised in the ordinary course of business. At the date of this report, the members of the Executive Council are not aware of any cir- cumstances which would render the values at- tributable to the current assets in the accounts misleading. No charge on the assets has arisen, since the end of the financial year to the date of this report, to secure the liabilities of another person. No con- tingent liability has arisen since the end of the financial year to the date of this report. . No contingent or other liability has become en- forceable or is likely to become enforceable within the period of twelve months after the end of the financial year which in the opinion of the members of the Executive Council will or may affect the ability of the Club to meet its obliga- tions as and when they fall due. . At the date of this report the members of the Executive Council are not aware of any cir- March/April 9: 10, the any cumstances not otherwise dealt with in report or accounts which would render amount stated in the accounts misleading. . The results of the Club's operations during the financial vear, in the opinion of the members of the Executive Council, were not affected by any item transaction or event of a material and unusual nature. Since 31 December 1979, and to the date of this report, in the opinion of the members of the Ex- ecutive Council, no item transaction or event of a material and unusual nature has occurred, which would affect substantially the results of the Club's operations for the next succeeding financial year. No member of the Executive Council, since the end of the previous financial year, has received or become entitled to receive a benefit by reason of a contract made by the Club with the member or with a firm of which he is a member or with a company in which he has a substantial financial interest. . The principal activities and objects of the Club are to stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian Fauna and Flora. No significant change in the nature of those activities occurred during that period, . The names of the members of the Executive Council in office at the date of this report are as follows: — Dr B. Smith Miss W. Clark Miss M. Allender Mr M. Howes Mr D. Krenus Miss L. Lumsden Mr J. Martindale Mr B. McGregor Mr A. Thies Mr M. Turner This Report is made in accordance with a resolution of the Executive Council dated 25th day of March 1980, 81 680'L 6S7'6S tpt ay, 2xe[Sury ‘wyer “D plore wer a u3no10qKiP]JA *2A12$2 2115907) — pue] ser i a Bae tee NE jjo UNUM Ssoy SM OR os 2 ea quawidinbW pue ainjiuin &1e1qrT ]$02 JB sjassy paxiq P CX cdam xapuy 122fqng isi[e3n]€ N| UP10]20 A MEC TTE EROS syoog 12440|4 aes SS bane 3[PS 104 syoog 122f014 2doosouotr]q Tee LER SS ae R sospeg —1S09 1? pueH uo $x201S d cte Raney Ses a $101qaq Aipung e Ea Es 1902 1? spuog uijea2uouruio yueg ie use Sjassy pua ung SLASSV £6£°6$ L08 SF arai L9c 6c vtt 000°Z 8L9't$ 8.61 99r'l 777 Kse327] JIE AA "JN 72 218183 ÜEC- 84.5 Pe en = ÁK32323] xouy “4 | 212153 DES 2. Mu IUNODIY IID SION “4d WIGS. v Ault ae eek AIZIT IYJ U M “WW 212193 I8T'S M 1uno22y 1uaum404dui| qn[5 oE an vua ere REIN puny Aseiqry 000't pun. uors1n3x3 1apuoj[v suey 000°7 Enn deti puny uotsinoxq ÁU tct'c m **-'pun4 uoisinax3 6Lt' LC Ts apa "> puny uonesyqndg 9$ "2 SSP ee ae Te ee puny auipying sjuno22 y xy spun 4 [E122dS ber’ ss mo ML. A Me i A ae oe aoueape ut pred sqns xapu] 122íqng ISIEIMEN UPLIOIDI A OSS "LL PT (£ 2310N) puey ur sjugje) K1nsea1] "n3 CAT ccu puey ui ueg 1sn1] ure1au] ^v WW Oi - = BS 6 VITRES s1011pa1 Aipung Qe.) ta Shae aoueape ut pred suoidu»sqng saniqsrT 21m?) SAILE IIS VII 6L61 ‘HAAWAOA I£ LV LAAHS AONVIVE VIYOLOIA AO JATO SISTIVHOLLVN ATAI "6L61/21/1£ 1e 21niipuadxo Isurese padde ua2q 10u peu OOS" S$ Suij[e101 stue13 1nq *pa4ia221 u33q JEY 08 /6L61 PU? 6L/8L61 'SL/LL6I “LL/9L61 10j SiueID K1nsga1] 31E1S “puno 2411n32 -X3 2ui JO 12quiaui Aue 01 qn[) ay) Áq pred 319m sjusumjourg ON "qn[) A43 01 SIMAS nəyi jo 122ds21 ui SIOUpPNY ay) Aq p3413223 212 511j2uaq 12410 ON «quo saorA12s Surppne 0j Sep Q£ [S JO uomneijaunumM ,sJoipny IE Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 82 na 9:s 98 SPOS IES OLS ee TEF TT 6c 070000000077] SOUPS) Kspums, 5527 ESE TSF $$ LTES Uu a cu pt pr A xuegie se) GI 000'Z “puny u Jn3x-j &reu2pu2) — 1,904) nny 00s BAIE TII Tete eae EE Se 000 I$ spuog SZULES 1,40€) miy pun uomsinoY3 6LF' IZ 0v0' 81$ Ala tT aeu LEM E -queg Ie qse&) 162 Sa ee CC COE O S. Qi. szo1g2q &ipuns ses euet sSuouspueq q! jo spzig £9c "E Iw isi K3OjUOUIOId COSTA SAPTA 6$ See ac oes ETUEWI?] y PLO, JO Su12 3 wos Tt canny. By Wey ats Se es UE s otor E+9"6S VIS nig Seu VERD ND Se tn "-—— eee zex(roj(sso])sa ums = (cU pun 4 suongogqnd Prat - puny iu2uz240 dur] qro wo mysuery 9ct e d C ELE UM ue 6L/1/1 1e 2oueqeg ci9'6s 1uno32 y snpdans oars ££0's$ dy, GU ID Sakata eee DR BU d: yueg 1e quse) ££ [4s gis Ose Iss Le ae 1502 1 sasmiu2qaq — pr] epues 001 mL Mies ee didis = oot ss 3 z S ON rods UE « te urine 1Uunoco y YID udpey 2upa osz spuog SBUISES 1,409 1y cM Sens sit fc et or ck — 2 ie “nee pun uougrepajN Aso1styy [eJR1EN TIS . = AE oc FTU E puny dijsisquisjx 2jt1 ozs 006°7Z 006°LZ$ QUE 0x Sarto EORR EIE uoxiq AA] 21eIsy Qc GUI SS te ae ee a susodag — 4121305 000°OI OLE "mu «s o pany DEN d H? H'A esc = Zupping 1u2ueurgd peninjq [EeUOUEN ; 06 n ose ae Latah N 06 & M. UI wumwopapripued — or emm os valor aaah epee a E i CS TELE Wut Sr La eg d SHUMBEGXEAUMN . 0$ — wm , LE G ERA CU - 9) d spuog s3ut«Ps 1,407) ueie1isny 00c Lt Sw — o ROPA a 2 Lop tree Pg in £ wis °° spuog 1U2WILIZA0D uere risny oor TOS e RS PIS MEI punj prelOOA P3HIEN or = 1509 j£ spun 4 jo 1uaunsaau] oc wosp "S ^M 218153 oz Lea, KAMAE 19t 6t9 £16°7 601'01$ "LER me ec actor 183A 10} snjdung sees sakes YOOY UO 11jOJd JO 19jsuP1] —1unoooy 1uauraAo4dui qno o»ueunsu[ oec ci ei, ERU ne re AUS wooy uinasnyy pue Aieiqiy '] eH J0 1030 uL E. (1 NON) uorg1oeunuiaM ,S10]tpn y Qr aed Sg aL dd a»ueisiss y [E2113] X SutdÁ T sosuadx4 uorpepajq ÁJOISIH — [EIN eil EIL D saley — sasuadx4 2Xe[8UtM DENN E er EE E E suoneuoq pue suonduosqns 's224 uonei[uJ v. na^ WC sasuadxq [Bleue * 338€10]5 10} WIOOI JO ]UIY rye SNO Erano tg &1ouongiS X 3unutid GE pus LEER V) suoudo[o L X s3e1s0d —sosuadx3 3urX10 M NONE ER P.C Me (E 0N) Aanseaiy MAS ee EX eID 6/6] — ISMAIL urei18uj sjue1c) — ssaT Vp e LM rex ye et qpeuoip3 Surg»iedsaqq 21njrpuadxq $99'7IS 8L8S THIES ESI Shad Oct 060'1 LSS 00! ssl 8s or tcc 891$ $79'8$ 000°Z £FI'T 88L'IIS 99 9I€'l 018 965'68 8L6l cCV IS £8L'0IS Pete ova do Pa diac OS OPE E 162 10} 5501 24 fers hed eel OUS, M. out sa[eg Yoo uo iijo1d HON SOM Om os LES auioou] &ipung xapu] 122[qng 1SI[EJn]EN UBLIOINIA — 1ljOld acta puny uorepajo &101$1H [EJn]EN QW e^ YN pun diusisquiojN 3J'T Ter HN usodag jeniny [PUO EN '* Koe327] JIE "JN 'O — spuog dix rare Koe32 BUA "JN — spuog spuog u1[E2uouluio mr PO Ond iunoooy yueg Cer ers ree lo: 5 pun seq] —paalacay 152121U| rene Mete ecol dava hog v3 Ato Lie beh Male 165 Botanical Safari to the Australian Arid Regions. July 2nd-27th, L2, loe] se, Mog (Tr CPP TTERTEEEDACVET E EH S ARUM 170 Naturalists of Yesteryear by-R. Simmons. ....... mieh eorr 175 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by J. A. HISBUN LS boausete UE (LOU PN VICOERTTLHVETUTPUST goth) ack nee naan 176 ENG VsADnnualikepofri- 1970/41980. A 1. cape mee rue enne a aia tace a 182 Cover illustration: Female crimson-spotted rainbowfish. The Crimson-spotted Rainbowfish, Melanotaenia fluviatilis (Castelnau 1878) By G. N. BackHouse* AND D. J. FRUSHER# Introduction One of Victoria's smallest and most colourful freshwater fish, the crimson- spotted rainbowfish Melanotaenia fluviatilis (Castelnau 1878), belongs to the family Melanotaeniidae. Fishes of this family are found in Australia, New Guinea, Waigeu and Aru Island, usually in tropical watercourses where the max- imum water temperature is 25-33° C and the pH is 7.2-7.8 (Allen 1978; Munro, 1967). The crimson-spotted rainbowfish is an excellent aquarium fish; it is easy to keep and will spawn freely given favourable conditions. In this paper we report the distribu- tion of the two subspecies of M. fluviatilis and describe some aspects of the biology of the Victorian subspecies, especially spawning behaviour and early development. Taxonomy A surprising degree of speciation has occurred within the Melanotaeniidae, there being an estimated 30-40 species. Most of the species are found in New Guinea, where many are restricted to particular watersheds. Because of dif- ficult access to native habitats the biology and taxonomy of the species have not been fully examined and are therefore poorly understood at this time. In Australia there are three genera of melanotaeniids: Quirichthys, the blackmast or strawman;j; Rhadinocentrus, the soft-spined sun- *Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Snobs Creek Freshwater Fisheries Research Station and Hatchery, Private Bag 20, Alexandra, Victoria 3714. #Eastern Districts Aquarium Society Native Fishes Study Group, C/- Honorary Secretary, P.O. Box 502, Ringwood. Victoria 3134, 144 fishes; and Melanotaenia, the rain- bowfishes. Until recently rainbowfishes from Australia were attributed to two genera, Melanotaenia and Nematocentris, but pending a complete revision of the family, Allen (1978) has recommended that Nematocentris be considered synonymous with Melanotaenia. The taxonomy of the rainbowfishes has not been fully elucidated, and they display considerable geographic and in- dividual variation in their colour pat- tern, body shape and meristic characteristics which makes final iden- tification difficult. Fig. 1. Male rainbowfish, crimson-spotted Melanotaenia fluviatilis, L.C.F. 78 mm. Broken Creek, Devenish. 5 3 3 BD Fig. 2. Female crimson-spotted rainbowfish, M. fluviatilis. L.C.F. 62 mm. Broken Creek, Devenish. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 3. Distribution of the crimson-spotted rainbowfish in south-eastern Australia. A. Melanotaenia fluviatilis fluviatilis B. M.f. duboulayi At least 8 species of Melanotaenia are found in Australia, mainly in tropical regions. M. fluviatilis is widespread in the subtropical and temperate fresh waters of eastern Australia (Lake 1978). The species is the only rainbowfish found in Victoria and is restricted to the Murray River system. crimson- Two subspecies of the July/August spotted rainbowfish are recognized; Melanotaenia fluviatilis fluviatilis (Castelnau 1878), which is found in the inland Murray-Darling system in Queensland, New South Wales, Vic- toria and South Australia; and M.f. duboulayi (Castelnau 1878) which oc- curs in the coastal drainages of southern Queensland and northern New South Wales (Fig. 3). 145 Description of adult fish The crimson-spotted rainbowfish has an elongate-oval laterally compressed body with convex dorsal and ventral profiles. Most of the head and body are covered with moderately large cycloid scales. There are two narrowly separated dorsal fins, the first much smaller than the second, and the caudal fin is moderately forked. The fish's body is silvery and has a greenish iridescence. Its dorsal surface is olive-green to dusky brown; its ventral surface is lighter, almost white. Smaller specimens are translucent, and the peritoneum and vertebral column are clearly visible. The fins are colourless to pale yellow and often have black margins. The operculum bears a pink to crimson spot, from which the species derives its common name. The shape and colour of a rain- bowfish vary considerably with age, maturity, habitat and sex. Its body generally becomes deeper with age, while the dorsal and ventral profiles of the head become more concave. In older fish, especially males, the lower jaw often protrudes. Sexual dimorphism of the species is marked, males being larger and more colourful than females. Males are also deeper bodied and develop a nuchal hump and an angulate breast profile as they grow. In mature males the posterior portions of the second dorsal and the anal fins are elongate and pointed, whereas in females they are short and rounded. In older male fish some rays of the first dorsal fin may extend into free filaments. During the spawning season, the male's colour intensifies con- siderably, the body becomes emerald green, the throat and pelvic fins orange, the caudal fin deep red and the dorsal and anal fins yellow with orange flecks and pronounced black margins. Females reach a length of about 70 mm (length to caudal fork: LCF) and males 90 mm (LCF). 146 Distribution and Habitat In Victoria, M.f. fluviatilis is found only in the Murray River system, where it is uncommon and restricted to discreet areas over a wide range (Fig. 3). The species is more common in the northern parts of its range, and its distribution in Victoria is probably limited by low water temperatures. The species inhabits billabongs, streams and the back-waters of large rivers. Waters where subsurface vegeta- tion is abundant seem to be preferred, possibly because they provide lateral concealment from potential aquatic predators, as well as providing suitable foraging and spawning areas. Areas with surface vegetation appear to be avoided, perhaps because the species, is, to a large extent, a surface feeder. Biology Schools of crimson-spotted rain- bowfish, often 30 or more individuals, may be seen swimming just below the water surface. Adults particularly are extremely wary and quickly seek shelter if disturbed. At night they rest, in- dividually, just below the water surface. Rainbowfish are essentially car- nivorous; they feed on aquatic in- vertebrates associated with their weedy habitat, and on terrestrial arthropods that fall or alight on the water surface, but they will take some plant material such as filamentous algae. In Victoria, the crimson-spotted rain- bowfish has been recorded as spawning during October, November and December. In aquaria maintained at 20- 25°C the species spawns readily throughout the year; in aquaria main- tained below 20°C the species did not spawn. Specimens taken from the Goulburn River, just south of Nagambie (Victoria) in October 1977 were transfer- red to an aquarium set up with a sand substrate and thickly planted with aquatic plants. These fish spawned five days later. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Males have à spectacular courtship display. The colour of the body and fins intensified and both dorsal and anal fins were held fully spread, as the male rapidly darted throughout the aquatic plants. The male then swam towards the nearest female, and after swimming rapidly around the female several times, nudged her on the lower abdomen. If the female was not ready to spawn she swam away. If the female did not swim away, the male continued his courtship for a few minutes until the pair moved to a prospective spawning site among the plants. When the male moved up to lie close alongside the female, both fish trembled violently, and the female released a small cloud of up to 10 thread-bearing eggs, which sank slowly among the plants. The female spawned 3-4 times a day for several days, usually in the early morning but occasionally in the early evening, just before dark. Males became very aggressive during this period, attacking other males by rip- ping their fins, and relentlessly courted other females. Pairing lasted only for the spawning sequence, and males spawned with any female that was ready to spawn. After spawning had proceeded for four days, the adults, who would other- wise eat the eggs, were removed from the aquarium. The water-hardened eggs were 1.3-1.8 mm in diameter. At a temperature of 24°C, the eggs hatched in about 7 days. Newly hatched larvae measured 2.5-3.1 mm in total length, and were well developed. Within a few hours of hatching, the larvae con- gregated just beneath the water surface and began feeding within a day. Initially they were fed on cultured planktonic protozoans, such as Paramecium; when 7-10 days old the larvae were 5-9 mm long, and large enough to accept newly hatched brine shrimp (Artemia) nauplii. They grew rapidly to 25 mm in 35 days. As individual growth rates varied the largest fry were removed to prevent can- nibalism of smaller fish. Adult fish July/August readily accepted à variety of live and commercially available fish foods. Discussion Since crimson-spotted — rainbowfish reared in an aquarium maintained below 20°C did not spawn, water temperature may be an important factor governing the spawning and therefore the distribu- tion of the species in Victoria, Beumer (1979) regarded increasing water temperatures, increasing day length, and, less important, rising water-levels and increasing turbidities as spawning stimuli for the Bast Queensland rain- bowfish, Melanotaenia (Nematocentris) splendida. In Victoria, rising water levels are not an essential prerequisite for crimson- spotted rainbowfish spawning, as evidenced by the fact they they will spawn in an aquarium with a constant water level, However, shallow flood- water may warm up rapidly, given ap- propriate conditions, and may stimulate spawning by crimson-spotted rain- bowfish, as is the case with several other Murray-Darling River system fishes (Lake 1971, 1978), Some aspects of the spawning of crimson-spotted rainbowfish have been reported previously (Blewett 1929 (as Melanotaenia — nigrans); Lake 1971, 1978). The species spawns in a fashion similar to that reported for the family Melanotaeniidae (Breder and Rosen 1966). Sterba (1963) and Beumer (1979) record the spawning of MeCullochs rainbowfish, M. maccullochi and the East Queensland rainbowfish, M. splen- dida respectively. We have observed the spawning of the chequered rainbowfish, M. maculata, the black-striped rain- bowfish, M. nigrans and the western rainbowfish, M. australia; their spawn- ing habits do not differ markedly from those we describe for M. fluviatilis. Acknowledgements The authors extend their thanks to Drs, J, P, Beumer and D, D, Evans (Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Victoria) for their constructive comments on the manuscript, 147 REFERENCES Allen, G. R. (1978). The rainbowfishes of northwestern Australia (Family Melano- taeniidae). Trop. Fish Hobbyist, 26 (June) 91- 102. Beumer, J. P. (1979). Reproductive cycles of two Australian freshwater fishes: the spangled perch, Therapon unicolor Gunther 1859 and the East Queensland rainbowfish, Nematocentris splen- dida Peters, 1866. J. Fish. Biol. 15, 111-134. Blewett, C. F. (1929). Habits of some Australian freshwater fishes, S. Aust. Nat. 10, 21-29. Breder, C. M. and Rosen, D. E. (1966). Modes of Reproduction in Fishes. (American Museum of Natural History Press, New York.) Lake, J.S. (1971). Freshwater Fishes and Rivers of Australia. (Nelson Press, Melbourne). Lake, J. S. (1978). Australian Freshwater Fishes. (Nelson Press, Melbourne). Munro, I. S. R. (1967). The Fishes of New Guinea. (Department of Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries, Port Moresby). Sterba, G. (1963). Freshwater Fishes of the World. (Vista Books, London). Radiocarbon Date For The Colongulac Skeleton, Victoria, Australia By EDMUND D. GILL* The Skeleton When defining the Colongulac Loess in 1951, I made a close search for fossils. A terminal phalanx, a rat’s tooth anda Coxiella shell were found. The phalanx was determined by Professor L. J. Ray as human. On excavating the site, a flex- ed Aboriginal skeleton (Nat. Mus. Vict. reg. no. X75979) was found, consisting of the long bones but with many of the small bones missing; the skull was ab- sent but three teeth were present (P1. 1, fig. 1). This was interpreted as a burial which later was temporarily bared so that the skull and a humerus were decayed or otherwise lost, and the small bones scattered (Gill 1953). The phalanx that was found first was a short distance from the rest of the skeleton. Other phalanges were found with the long bones. A complete list of the bones discovered is given in an appendix to the paper quoted above (p. 86). The site is shown in Gill 1951 (Fig. 2) and in 1953 (pp. 60-61 and Fig. 1). The burial was in the middle of the formation. The skeleton was preserved in the Col- ongulac Loess, which was derived from the floor of Lake Colongulac when it was dry. Professor F. E. Zeuner carried * 1/47 Wattle Valley Road, Canterbury, Victoria 3126. 148 out a grain size analysis in 1952, and reported a calcium carbonate content of up to 71%. This is because the brackish water lacustrine shell Coxiella was (and is) present in such vast numbers at Lake Colongulac. The non-calcareous sediments consist of 44% clay, 38% silt and 18% fine sand. The clay must have blown up as aggregates, probably from the fretting of the edges of polygons in cracked mud. If this is so, then the clayey loess was generated in times of seasonal drying. The high percentage of calcium carbonate provided the alkaline conditions that preserved the bones. The loess forms a lunette on the southeast side of the lake. The present prevailing winds are from the southwest, so at the time of formation of the lunette the prevailing wind was in a different quadrant. Radiocarbon Dating Dr. Athol Rafter of the Institute of Nuclear Sciences, New Zealand, kindly dated the skeleton by C14 (R4824) as follows: On the half life of 5568 yr — 3600 + 60 yr B.P, On the half life of 5730 yr — 3760 + 70 yr B.P. Percentage w.r.t. Bone Standard 63.4 - 0.5; 89? w.r.t. PDB -27.7%; counting time 4000 minutes. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 1 (Top). The Colongulac Skeleton in situ in the Colongulac Loess in the lunette on the east side of the lake. Fig. 2 (Centre). Lunette at Lake Colonguiac looking northeast from the site of the 20 100 yr sample. Fig. 3 (Lower). Ditto, looking southwest. July/August 149 Dr Rafter also dated a sample from the base of the Colongulac Loess in the same lunette, but further south the sample was collected in situ on January 30th, 1967, from approximately beach level (Pl. 1, figs. 2-3). The site is about half way between the sewerage tanks to the south and the promontory capped with trees on the S.E. shore a short distance north of a fenceline. The matrix had a very local slope of 30°, perhaps from a hole being dug in the ground; the dip was towards the lake. A layer up to 1 cm thick consisted of powdery charcoal and silt. The ground underneath was burned red. The date obtained on the charcoal was 20 100 + 500 yr B.P. (NZ 780A); it was published in Gill 1971 (p. 75). The period during which the Colongulac Loess was laid down was one of the ex- ceptional dryness which has been widely recognized (Bowler et al. 1976). The Harris’ Lines of the long bones were checked to see if they gave any clue to environmental stress (Gill 1968). New Interpretation of the Colongulac Skeleton The bones of this Aboriginal skeleton certainly suggest a flexed burial. Then how were the small bones scattered, and the skull lost although three teeth re- main? My hypothesis of baring (which could easily happen in the dry environ- ment), then re-covering, still appears to me the best explanation. Because there was no sign of inclusion of soil, I presumed that the burial took place dur- ing the building of the dune. If the radiocarbon date is correct (and | have no reason to doubt that it is of the cor- rect order of age) then this cannot be. The black soil on top of the formation varies from 0.3 to nearly 1m thick, and by analogy with other soils is older than the radiocarbon date. Moreover, the skeleton came from the middle of the formation. After the lunette was form- ed, lake level rose and a sloping cliff was formed. It must have been during the cutback of this cliff that the burial took place. Either the cliff was clear of soil at the time, or the soil was cleared away, because all the material surrounding the skeleton was yellow loess. It is surprising that the surface through which excava- tion was made to reach the skeleton ap- peared quite undisturbed. The fine system of cracks in the matrix did not appear to alter over this area. However, if the radiocarbon date is correct, the burial must be intrusive through the cliff face. At the time the excavation was made, drought conditions existed, and the ground at the skeleton site was bare. In Plate 1, figs. 2-3, the photographs were taken in 1967 when the sample for the 20 100 yr date was collected. There was plenty of vegetation, but it was at its annual minimum because the time was mid-summer. REFERENCES BOWLER, J.M., HOPE, G.S., JENNINGS, J.N., SINGH, G. and WALKER, D. 1976. Late Quaternary climates of Australia and New Guinea. Quaternary Research 6, 359-394. GILL, E.D. 1951, New evidence from Victoria relative to the antiquity of the Australian "d ipe! Australian Journal of Science 14, GILL, E.D.1953. Geological evidence in Western Victoria relative to the antiquity of the Australian aborigines. Memoirs National Museum of Victoria 18, 25-92, GILL, E.D. 1968. Examination of Harris’ lines in recent and fossil Australian aboriginal bones. Current Anthropology 9, 215. GILL, E.D. 1971]. Applications of radiocarbon dating in Victoria, Australia (Royal Society of Victoria Research Medal Lecture). Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 84, 71-85. Treasurer Wanted The Club urgently requires a treasurer to replace Mr D. E. McInnes who has decided to give up the position after many years valuable service. The pros- pective treasurer should preferably have some accounting experience and be a 150 member of the FNCV, although this is not essential. If anyone would like to be considered for this very important job, please contact Dr Brian Smith (work: 669-9888). Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 13 BY M. G. CORRICK* Pultenaea paleacea Willd. Plant. 2:506 (1799). This species occurs in scattered localities in eastern, central and southern Victoria and was apparently once quite plentiful in suburban areas of Melbourne such as Mt Waverley, Oakleigh and Brighton. It favours damp situations, sometimes along streams or in depressions among rocks, but is most commonly found on damp, sandy heathland. It is a variable species and several varieties have been named. Pultenaea paleacea Willd. var. palaecea is a low growing, open and somewhat procumbent shrub. The stems are terete, the young growth covered with pale, closely appressed hairs but becoming glabrous with age. The alternate, narrowly linear to ellip- tic or oblanceolate leaves are 7-20 mm long and 1-3 mm wide. The margins and the mucronate tip are recurved. The up- per leaf surface is glabrous and the under surface is covered with pale, closely appressed hairs. The stipules are 5-6 mm long, closely appressed to the stem and joined at the base; they are light brown and papery in texture with a darker mid-rib. The flowers are orange and deep purple-brown; they are axillary, but clustered in apparent heads at the tips of the branches. The orange standard is 11- 12 mm high and 7-8 mm broad and has deep purple-brown markings in the throat; the wings are slightly tinged with purple and the keel petals are very dark purple. The calyx is 7-8 mm long with rather coarse, pale, appressed hairs. The bracteoles are about 5 mm long, brown and papery and somewhat keeled with a line of hairs down the centre; they are attached below the middle of the calyx *7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, 3103. in Spec. July/August tube and reach almost to the tip of the lobes. The inflorescence is subtended by floral bracts which show a gradation from leaves with enlarged stipules to a trifid bract on the innermost flowers. The ovary is stipitate, with a tuft of hairs at the base and the remainder covered with dense, pale hairs which ex- tend about one third of the way along the style. The pod is flat, slaty-grey in colour and covered with pale, appressed hairs. Flowering time is usually mid-October to early November. SPECIMENS EX- AMINED included: E. Gippsland, Bonang Highway, A.C. Beauglehole 34962, 25.xi.1970 (MEL 535403); ENE of Mt Ellery, Edwin Merrah, xi.1887 (MEL 533558); E. Gippsland, Yambulla Ck., J. H. Willis, 17.x.1948 (MEL 535404). paleacea var. sericea Benth. in Fi. AUC 2:116(1864). This is the common variety in Victoria and is the one found around Melbourne. It differs from the var. palaecea in its longer, paler foliage and longer, white- silky scarious floral bracts; the calyx and bracteoles are similar to the var. paleacea. It is also usually a smaller plant with slender, flaccid branches trailing among surrounding vegetation. Flowering time is late October to early November. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Princes Highway W. of Bemm R., A. C. Beauglehole 34223, 1.x.1970 (MEL535411); N.E. of Yarram, A. C. Beauglehole 62524, 14.xii.1978 (MEL 513586); Langwarrin, nr. railway line, M. G. Corrick 6174, 12.xi.1978 (MEL 542133); in shady inundated places towards Brighton, F. Mueller, xi.1852 (MEL 533580) Syntype; Elaine, near 151 Burnt Bridge, N. H. Scarlett, 30.xii.1968 (MEL 535413); Mt Ray- mond road, N. A. Wakefield 3494, 1945 (MEL 1507306). P. paleacea var. williamsonii (Maiden) H. B. Williamson in Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. new ser. 32:220 (1920). This variety occurs around Strathbogie and Eildon. It is a less hairy plant than either of the preceding varieties with larger leaves up to 30 mm long and 9 mm wide. Its bracteoles are also larger and almost envelope the calyx; the floral bracts are similar to those of the var. paleacea. Flowering time is the first half of November. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Eildon area, B. Strange, 12.xi.1962 (MEL 536106); Strathbogie, A. W. Vroland, xi.1902 (MEL 536319) Isotype; Bucklands Ridge, J. H. Willis, 21.xi.1975 (MEL 515051). Pultenaea paleacea Var. paleacea Pultenaea linophylla Schrad. in Sert. Hannov.29(1795). Pultenaea linophylla in Victoria is restricted to the lowlands of East Gipp- sland. It also occurs in New South Wales. It is a sparsely branched, rather stiff shrub, generally not more than 30- 40 cm high and often trailing or almost prostrate. The stems are terete and pubescent on young growth. The alternate, linear-elliptic leaves are 2-4 mm wide and 4-14 mm long. The up- per surface is glabrous, dark green or occasionally tinged with brown down the centre. The margins are slightly recurved and the under side is sparsely covered with pale, rather coarse hairs. The leaf tip is obtuse and slightly recurv- ed. The stipules are triangular, about 1 mm long, very dark brown and slightly recurved. The rather small axillary flowers are orange and dark purple and are tightly m Var, sericea var. williamgonii Fig. 16a. Known distribution of Pultenaea paleacea. 152 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 4 es 1.5 4 1 Fig. 16. a-i, Pultenaea paleacea var. paleacea; a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles; c, bracteoles drawn a little larger; d, style and ovary; e, floral bract; f, leaves and stipules; g, stipules; all from MEL 516884; h, pod and seed; i, broad leaf; from MEL 535403. j-l, P. paleacea var. williamsonii; j, leaf and stipule from MEL 515051; k, calyx and bracteoles, bracteole drawn a litt le larger; I, style and ovary; from MEL 533537. m-o, P. paleacea var. sericea; m, leaves and stipules; n, stipule; o, floral bract; all from MEL 242133. July/August 153 [rm ^ 2 x Fig. 17, a-f, Pultenaea linophylla. a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style and ovary; d, floral bract; e, leaf and stipules, all drawn from MEL 1513602; f, pod from MEL 1513599. h-p, P. polifolia. h, habit; i, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; j, style and ovary; k, floral bract; |, leaf and stipules; m, stipules; all from MEL 560729; n, large leaf form from Hume River, MEL 1504025; o, pod from MEL 1504012; p, seed, from MEL 1504019. 154 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 mu Bltenaea linoph lla o Pultenaea ime Fig. 17a. Known distribution of Pultenaea linophylla and P. polifolia. clustered in apparent heads at the tips of branchlets. The standard is 6-7 mm high and 5-6 mm wide; both it and the wings are pale orange marked with purple lines. The keel is dark purple. The calyx is about 5 mm long with very slender, acute lobes; it is covered with pale, loose hairs which are thickest at the top of the tube. The lanceolate, very hairy bracteoles are attached about half-way up the calyx tube and reach to about half-way along the calyx lobes. The flowers are subtended by persistent, papery, ovate floral bracts which are slightly hairy, particularly down the cen- tre. The inner, longer bracts may split, giving them a bifid, or even trifid ap- pearance; in the latter case the central lobe is usually composed merely of the central line of hairs. The ovary is densely covered with pale, silky hairs which extend along one side of the style for about half its length. July/August The pod is flat, well exserted from the calyx and covered with pale hairs. The Victorian form of P. linophylla, a short-leaved, usually trailing or pro- strate plant, extends into southern New South Wales, particularly around Eden. The common New South Wales form differs in having much longer leaves, which are oblong-cuneate and up to 3 cm in length. N. A. Wakefield described the Victorian form as P. amoena Sieber ex N. A. Wakefield, but Joy Thompson (1961)* reduced it to synonymy under P. lonophylla, a decision which J. H. Willis (1972)* upholds. Flowering time in Vic- toria is late September to early October. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Lind National Park, A. C. Beauglehole 34154, 27.ix.1970 (MEL 1513601); N. slope of Mt Raymond, A. C. Beauglehole 31288, 26.x.1969 (MEL 1513599); Green Cape N.S.W., M. G. Corrick 5964 (MEL 1513602). 155 Pultenaea polifolia A. Cunn. in Field Geogr. Mem. N.S. W. 346 (1825). Pultenaea polifolia is a very uncom- mon species in Victoria, having been recorded in a few scattered localities in the north-east of the State. It also occurs on the Sydney sandstones. It may be up to 1 m high with terete stems which are pubescent on the young growth but become glabrous with age. The alternate, elliptic, or slightly obovate leaves are 2-7 mm wide and 8- 30 mm long with recurved margins. The leaf tip is obtuse, terminating in a con- spicuous but weak mucro. The upper leaf surface is glabrous with a distinct central groove; the under surface is pubescent with rather loose, spreading, pale or slightly rusty hairs. The papery, pale stipules are about 3 mm long. The orange and dark purple-brown flowers are axillary, but clustered in ap- parent heads at the tips of the branches and subtended by persistent floral bracts. The standard is about 10 mm high and 7 mm wide. The calyx is 7-8 mm long with very slender, tapering lobes which are about equal in length to the tube and often hooked at the tips. It is hirsute with rather long, pale spreading hairs which are denser at the base of the tube and on the lobes. The lanceolate, keeled bracteoles are attached to the lower half of the calyx tube and have a line of pale hairs down the centre. The brown floral bracts are trifid with a very slender, weak central lobe and are hairy on the back. The ovary and base of the style are covered with pale hairs. Good fruiting material has not been seen, but the pods are apparently flat and well exserted from the calyx. Flowering time is late October to mid November. A wide leafed form which occurs in the Ovens Valley and on Mt Granya has been known as P. polifolia var. mucronata (F. Muell.) H. B. William- son. However, in view of the extremely variable leaf size and degree of hairiness throughout the range of the species, and also on individual plants, the recogni- tion of this variety seems hardly justified. Examination of the material at present available in the National Her- barium, Melbourne, does not uphold Williamson's observations of consistent differences in the shape and position of the bracteoles, which he used as an addi- tional distinguishing feature of the variety. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Yalmy River, A. C. Beauglehole 43401, 23.x.1973 (MEL 516035); Hume River, C. French Jnr., xi.1886 (MEL 1504025); Bonang Highway, H. van Rees 68 and S. Forbes, 25.x.1979 (MEL 560729). *See Vict. Nat. 93(5):178 (1976) for references, New Books “A Field Guide to Fungi of South Eastern Australia” Ross Macdonald and John Westerman Price $12,95 plus postage 150 pages — 48 colored plates with text on opp. page Order from Sales Officer F,N.C. V, 156 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Rare and Endangered Victorian Plants 1. Acacia enterocarpa By J. STUWE* A recent paper (Hartley and Leigh, 1979) uses existing publications and her- barium specimens to suggest a list of native vascular plants ‘considered to be at risk and hence meriting special con- sideration for conservation’. The plants listed are those thought to be at risk on an Australia-wide basis, This preliminary list opens the way for more detailed work where all known stands of given species are subject to field inspec- tion to determine their conservation status at the present time. Such data, in- cluding suggested conservation measures, are being compiled in a stan- dardized format for each species and sent to the relevant management agen- cies in an attempt to ensure the species' survival. The present paper is the first of a series describing such work on Vic- torian plants which are thought to be rare or endangered. The aim of the series is to summarize the results of re- cent field inspections and earlier work, to ask whether any other populations of the species are known to readers and to ask whether readers can offer any help in monitoring the populations in the future. The species to be dealt with here is Acacia enterocarpa, Jumping-jack Wattle. Range and abundance In Victoria, the species is restricted to the Diapur/ Broughton area of the Wim- mera, mainly on the northern Lawloit Range. Most of the few known popula- tions are roadside with one stand on the rail enclosure near Diapur and about sixty plants on public land (a type of ‘water reserve’) near Broughton. No natural populations occur in any biological reserve although about one *Botany Department, La Trobe University, Bun- doora, Victoria, 3083, July/August hundred have been planted in a relative- ly small, Lands Dept, Flora Reserve (the species probably once grew naturally there), The seed was collected from an adjoining population and grown at Wail Nursery. The species occurs within minor grids C11, C12 and C21, A rough estimate of the total number of plants of this species in Victoria is about six hundred, It also occurs in South Australia on the Southern Eyre Peninsula, near Mun- dalla (S. W. of Bordertown) and near Kongal, west of Bordertown (Eichler 1965; A. J. Hicks, pers. comm,). It was classed as ''Vulnerable (4V)" on an Australia-wide basis by Hartley and Leigh (1979), Because of its limited Vic- torian range, precarious situation (road- sides and rail enclosure) and small population sizes, it has been classed "Endangered" within Victoria in the present work (this risk code is second only to **Extinct''). Exhaustive searches were not undertaken for old records labelled ‘‘Serviceton, South Australia border" (1887), ''Yanac'' (1934) and " Nhill" (1897). It is possible that these or other, presently undiscovered, populations will be located with further field work. We would like to know of any records of the species from Public Land not mentioned above, with à view to requesting further reservations, Habitat and species’ ecology The species ranges from mallee broombush on the highest parts of the northern Lawloit Range on gravelly duplex ironstone soils to mallee scrub and grassy woodlands of Eucalyptus leucoxylon, E. microcarpa and Casuarina luehmannii on more fertile, brown loamy soils in adjacent areas. Regeneration has been observed in ob- 157 viously disturbed sites but also has been seen in apparently undisturbed ones. Threats and recommended conservation measures Where possible, care should be taken to minimise destruction of A. entero- carpa plants when undertaking works or fire prevention methods associated with the roads or railway. Because most plants occur in areas not conducive to their long-term sur- vival, it is essential to adequately reserve certain areas in an attempt to conserve the species in perpetuity. Such measures suggested were: (a) Reservation and fencing of at least that part of the '*water reserve’’ near Broughton carrying this species, as a flora reserve. (b) Reservation (e.g. as a roadside flora reserve) and fencing of two relatively wide, triangular areas of road reserve between Kaniva and Broughton. (c) The continued maintenance and careful management of the Flora Reserve at Diapur into which the species has been planted. The biggest deficiency in the sug- gested reserve system is that the most common habitat for the species, mallee broombush on infertile ironstone soils on the Lawloit Range, is not included. Of the few known fragments remaining of this type, the rail reserve near Diapur is the best. Its conservation deserves special emphasis to try to ensure ade- quate conservation of the total remain- ing Acacia enterocarpa gene pool. We would especially like to hear from any reader who may know of the occurrence of this species on blocks of Public Land from the above habitat. Recommendations sent to: Shire of Kaniva, Shire of Lowan, Land Conservation Council, Depart- ment of Crown Lands and Survey, Ministry for Conservation. Acknowledgements I wish to thank Mr A. J. Hicks, Kaniva and Mr W. Middleton, F.C.V. Horsham for valuable discussion and assistance in locating populations of this species. The work is funded in part by a grant from the National Estate Pro- gramme of the Australian Department of Home Affairs. REFERENCES Eichler, H. (1965). Supplement to J. M. Black's Flora of South Australia. Government Printer: Adelaide. Hartley, W. and Leigh, J. H. (1979). Australian plants at risk. Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service. Occasional Paper No. 3. Natural History Medallion Trust Fund AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Australian Natural History Medallion Fund Amount on hand invested April 1980,....... sse n n $1272.50 Victorian National Parks Association. ....... seen $50.00 Association of South East Field Naturalists Societies ............ $10.00 Field Naturalists Society of Sth. Aust. .........0ses sev eevesees $25.00 Native Fauna Conservation Society, ....... seen $50.00 The Entomological Society of Australia (2nd Donation) ......... $25.00 Rockhampton Field Naturalists Club ......... seen $ 5.00 Warrnambool Field Naturalists Club ....ssisessersssesseseuse $10.00 Gould E T d o Guess ts Ye A TT $10.00 The Newcastle Flora & Fauna Protection Soc, (2nd Donation) ....$ 6.00 Total May 1980 $1463.50 158 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The genus Luzula in Victoria BY DAVID COOKE* Along with the great variety of rushes in the genus Juncus L., the family Jun- caceae also contains a number of species sometimes known as woodrushes in the closely allied genus Luzula DC. Both genera comprise herbaceous plants with basal leaves and terminal cymose in- florescences of minute, wind-pollinated flowers, each with a perianth of six tepals. The fruit is a capsule, in Juncus trilocular with numerous very small seeds, in Luzula unilocular with three relatively large seeds each with a whitish fleshy outgrowth, the caruncle. In the past, all Victorian specimens of Luzula have been regarded as belonging to the European species L. campestris (L.) DC, Although this species has been introduced into the southern hemisphere, it is not known to occur in Victoria; instead, we have at least 10 native species. Like L. campestris, these all belong to the subgenus Gymnodes. The following key may be used to dif- ferentiate the Luzula species known from Victoria. The letters following each species name refer to the major grids (Churchill and de Corona 1972) for which the species has so far been recorded. 1. Leaves flat, flaccid; caruncle more than one-fifth the length of seed. . . 2. Leaves channelled, erect; caruncle less than one-fifth the length of seed (alpine plants). ...... eee Fir 2. Inflorescence of several flower clusters on long bare stalks radiating from a central point, resembling a compound umbel; leaves hairy... . 3. Inflorescence of a single congested flower cluster or several clusters crowded together, never umbelloid (if ever with manifestly stalked flower clusters, then the leaves almost glabrous). ....... ee 5i *9/5] Marne Street, South Yarra, Victoria 3141. July/August 3. Tepals black or very dark brown, without a pale margin............. Wee AA L. meridionalis Nordenskiold Grids CDEJKMNR Tepals brown with pale margins. . . 4. 4. Leaf margins densely hairy; capsule dark at maturity; base of plant usual- DUHAN Ss s y Wang veh ER TO RTNOS Ar AA L. densiflora (Nordenskiold) E. Edgar Grids CHINPRSZ Leaf margins with a few scattered hairs; capsule usually pale; base of plant never bulbous............... ....L. flaccida (Buchenau) E. Edgar Grids BDEJKNPSTVWZ 5. Flower less than 2.3 mm long, anthers less than 0.5 mm long, in- florescence consisting of a single OVELGIICAUI EE TN Et r1 TOS OW E. L. ovata E. Edgar Grids DVW Flower more than 2.5 mm long, anthers more than 0.5 mm long, inflorescence consisting of one to few flower clusters: | aiteas es eser 6. 6. Plant tufted, leaves almost glabrous; inflorescence consisting of a sessile flower cluster with one or more similar clusters on short spreading stall e D E TE OER A 122 De be Pet L. novae-cambriae Gandoger Grid W Plant with long rhizomes, leaves hairy; inflorescence consisting of one to four sessile flower clusters closely packed LORCLITOL tie THU EE po ve TT CEN L. modesta Buchenau Grids RSV 7. Leattpsacute.... +... L. acutifolia Nordenskiold Grids VR Leaf tips obtuse, ending in a minute BUEN EAE a EVA TES 8. 8. Flower more than 2.8 mm long, an- ther about 1 mmlong............. ne gs L. australasica Steud. ssp. dura (E. Edgar) Jansen Grid V Flower less than 2.6 mm long, anther dbomtO;5"mmlong e Gee ered 9. 9. Plant tufted, leaves prominently DOM L. alpestris Nordenskiold Grid V Plant with long rhizomes, leaves glabrous except for a few hairs at the base vem. o L. atrata E. Edgar Grid V Specimens with characters in- termediate between some of the above taxa also occur in Victoria. In the alps L. modesta appears to intergrade with L. novae-cambriae, perhaps due to hybridization; apparent hybrids between L. densiflora and L. modesta are also recorded. REFERENCES Churchill, D. M., and de Corona, A. (1972) The Distribution of Victorian Plants. Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne. Edgar, E. (1975). Australasian Luzula. Zealand J. Bot. 13: 781-802. Jansen, M. E. (1978). Notes on Luzula (Juncaceae) in Malesia, Tasmania, and Australia, Blumea 24: 521-532. Nordenskiold, H. (1969). The genus Luzula in Australia. Bot, Not. 122: 69-89. New Notes on Trithuria in Victoria Trithuria submersa Hook.f. is a minute pioneer annual growing on moist open ground such as the mud surrounding tem- porary pools and stream verges. In this niche it is an advantage for a plant to be able to complete its life cycle rapidly while moisture conditions are favourable; a greatly simplified and condensed structure is an adaptation to this end. In this adaptive strategy, and especially in having dense heads of unisexual flowers, Trithuria parallels genera of the Centrolepidaceae, with which family it was formerly lumped. It is now regarded as the sole Victorian member of the Hydatellaceae (Hamann 1976). Development The linear leaves form a basal tuft, within which a number of flower heads are produced in September to December. The scapes are very short at anthesis but usually grow from 1 to 4 cm tall by the time the fruits are ripe in October to February. Occasionally the scapes do not elongate, and the fruits are borne near ground level; it may be that scape develop- ment is a function of moisture availability and is suppressed in dry conditions. Inflorescence The head is surrounded by two pairs of op- posite, acuminate, one-nerved bracts at right angles to each other, forming a false whorl of four. In some well-developed heads another one or two pairs of narrower bracts are found alternating with the first four. 160 The male florets, 2 to 6 per head, are each reduced to a single stamen. They are scattered among 10 to 20 female florets, each con- sisting of a solitary ovary formed from three carpels. There are three styles, although each is usually divided into two from the base. It is uncertain how Trithuria is pollinated; although the florets have no obvious means of attracting pollinators, their position close to the ground would make wind pollination very inefficient. The close grouping of male and female florets in the same inforescences suggests self-pollination. The fruits are single-seeded capsules which split open along the three sutures between the carpels to shed the seed, although the entire, partly opened fruit is often shed from the head with the seed inside. Distribution Trithuria submersa is common in western Victoria, with scattered populations as far east as Winton and Port Phillip Bay, and also occurs in Western Australia, South Australia, Tasmania and New South Wales. It is record- ed from major grids BC DEJKNP R. REFERENCES Hamann, U. (1976). Hydatellaceae — a new family of Monocotyledoneae. New Zealand J. Bot. 14: 194-196, Willis, J. H. (1962). A Handbook to Plants in Vic- toria. | (M.U.P.: Melbourne). D. Cooke 9/51 Marne St., South Yarra. 3141. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Inflorescence of Trithuria submersa, half of the florets removed. X10. Observations on the Leaf-Curling Spider, Phonognatha graeffei From about midsummer, until early winter each year, the trees and shrubs in my garden, are festooned with the orb-webs and leaves of the Leaf-curling Spider (Phonognatha graef- fei). One of the most intriguing features of the life history of this spider is the manner in which it selects, shapes, and places in its web, the leaf in which it spends so much of its life. Plate 1, illustrates a popular type of curled- leaf construction favoured by this spider; however, there are quite a few variations of this style. July/August During the day, the spider usually remains in its leaf retreat, with just the ends of some of its legs showing; patiently waiting for an insect to blunder into its beautifully con- structed web. When it is time for the female to lay her eggs, she selects a leaf, then usually bends it across the centre as shown in Plate 2. After depositing her egg-sac in the leaf, she seals it down, thus making a cosy weatherproof shelter for her offspring. On the 29.8.78, I found a folded leaf (Plate 2) containing the egg-sac of a P. graeffei; it 161 Plate 1: A common type of curled eucalypt leaf, used by Phonognatha graeffei. (Photo: author). was suspended from a strand of silk, and was swinging from a branch of a plum tree. Keeping the leaf under observation, I was pleased to observe on the 5.12.78, that spiderlings were emerging from their “home”. The final count of the spiderlings contained in the leaf, amounted to 166. On the 5.4.79, I found a female P. graeffei in a Pittosporum undulatum in the garden; she was putting the finishing touches to a folded Acacia longifolia leaf, which was also suspended from a branch by a strand of silk, see Plate 3. Heavy rain set in, and the next day she was seen clinging to the leaf; this pro- ved to be the last sighting of her. The leaf was kept under observation, and on the 11.12.79, spiderlings started to emerge, the final tally showed a total of 89. Plate 2: A transversely folded eucalypt leaf, used by a female Phonognatha graeffei for storing its egg- sac. (Photo: author). Although Leaf-curling Spiders do not pro- duce very large families; the number of them observed each year, indicates just how effec- tive their leaf shelters must be, in avoiding predators such as birds and wasps. From the amount of insects caught by these spiders, it is apparent that they must play a very important role in helping Nature preserve her fragile balance. REFERENCES Clyne, Densey (1977). A Guide to Australian Spiders. Nelson: Melbourne. Hardy, A. D. (1935). Notes on the Leaf-curling Spider in Colour. Vict. Nat. 52: 24-31. Mascord, R. (1970). Australian Spiders. Melbourne. Reed: A. E. Spillane, 99 Rutland Ave, Mt Eliza, 3930. Plate 3: A female Phonognatha graeffei, on a folded Acacia longifolia leaf containing its egg-sac (approx- imately 3x). (Photo: author). 162 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Movement Over the Snow Surface by the Bush Rat, Rattus fuscipes BY W. S. OSBORNE* Evidence of ranging, and dispersal over long distances by the Bush Rat, Rattus fuscipes, is well documented. Dispersal movements by adult R. fuscipes of up to 213 metres for females, and 760 metres for males, were recorded in Victoria by Warneke (1971). In south- eastern Queensland, Wood (1971), describes dispersal movements of bet- ween 180 metres and 370 metres for R. fuscipes. Males and females were equal- ly involved in this dispersion although males had significantly larger observed range lengths (90-106 m. in females and 183-198 m. in males). Similarly during a program of small mammal trapping carried out in a sub- alpine region of Kosciusko National Park, dispersal distances of up to 400 metres for both male and female R. fuscipes were recorded, with range distances of around 100 metres being ~ te: / Im files 33-49 n Ld N pat bE aif igh AA ; *7 Hamelin Crescent, Red Hill, A.C.T., 2603. July/August is frequently covered (Green and Osborne, unpublished data). During the period of deep snow cover all the small mammals in the sub-alpine and alpine regions of the Kosciusko Na- tional Park are subnivian (dwelling below the snow) and move about via a system of runways at ground level. The possibility, therefore, of long distance movement over the snow surface by R. fuscipes is perhaps unexpected. During the winters of 1978 and 1979, however, small mammal tracks were frequently encountered on the snow surface (Figure 1). These tracks were usually associated with rock piles and leaning trees where small openings occurred in the snow cover. Occasionally several sets of tracks led to and from these holes. In July 1979 when snow cover was generally greater than 1 metre in depth, 25 sets of small mammal tracks were en- [ l , ^5 id v 15 Fig. 1. Small mammal tracks leading off a snow covered road at Schlink's Pass, Kosciusko National Park, July 1979. 163 "IE taa Fig. 2. Small mammal tracks and fox tracks at Duck Creek, Kosciusko National Park, July 1978. countered during a twelve kilometre ski transect in the sub-alpine region. These tracks were found to range from 1 to 500 metres in length, with the mean track length being 62 metres. Of the 25 tracks examined, 7 of the tracks extended for a distance of greater than 100 metres. In some cases the tracks clearly showed the manus pattern characteristic of rodents. R. fuscipes and Mastacomys fuscus, both rodents, are present in the area. It is unlikely though, that any of the tracks were made by M. fuscus because: 1. Many of the tracks were present in areas not normally frequented by M. fuscus; 2. R. fuscipes occasionally ran over the snow surface after being released from traps, but M. fuscus in all cases moved quickly down spaces leading under the snow; and 3. Traps set on the snow surface outside of holes with small mammal tracks leading into them only caught R. fuscipes. There could be several possible reasons why R. fuscipes travels over the 164 snow surface. If the lengthy movements of R. fuscipes during the snow free period are also maintained during the period of snow cover, then it would be necessary for individuals to sometimes move over the snow in areas where sub- nivian runways have not been con- structed. Small mammal tracks observed on snow covered roads would probably be an example of this kind of move- ment. In addition, movement over the snow surface by R. fuscipes probably provides an effective means of dispersal. Intraspecific competition is possibly elevated during the period of snow cover, when resources may be scarce, and if so, movement onto the snow sur- face would be one means of avoiding conflict, although it exposes the in- dividual to predation (Figure 2). REFERENCES Warneke, R. M. (1971) Field Study of the Bush Rat (Rattus fuscipes) Wildl. Contr. Vict. No. 14, 1-115. Wood, D. H. (1971) The Ecology of Rattus fuscipes and Melomys cervinipes (Rodentia: Muridae) in a South-east Queensland Rainforest, Aust. J. Zool. 19: 173-89. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 A Check List of Victorian Gasteromycetes The Gasteromycetes form a heterogeneous group within the Basidiomycetes, comprising about 150 genera and about 700 species. They are cosmopolitan but are particularly plen- tiful in Australia where certain species often form mycorrhiza with eucalypt roots. The fruiting bodies have a variety of curious forms including puff balls, earth stars and bird's nest fungi. Most Gastromycetes are terrestial, a number subterranean and they are generally considered to be the ‘highest’ fungi. A brief explanation of the basic structure of the fruiting body is given here to assist col- lectors to identify their finds with the aid of the books listed as references. The one-celled basidium usually produces four spores, but sometimes more or less and they differ from most Basidiomycetes in that the spores are not forcibly discharged and sometimes not stalked. The basidia and spores mature within the fruiting body which remains closed until disintegrated by weathering or at least until the basidia have disintegrated. The basidia usually open into cavities within the fruiting body and the spores are released into these cavities as the tissues break down or dry out. The fruiting body wall or peridium con- sists of one or more layers covering a more or less fleshy material, the gleba, containing cavities lined with the spore-forming tissue or hymenium. This structure can only be distinguished in young fruiting bodies. The gleba is frequently crossed by sterile tissue, the columella and capillitium, which may facilitate spore dispersal after the decay of the gleba. The Gasteromycetes, fungi commonly known as ‘‘Puff-balls’’, are therefore characterized, at least in the early stages of development, by having the spores form within a receptacle or sac. The subsequent development of the various families and genera takes many diverse forms, some of them quite bizarre in appearance, For convenience of recognition in the field the Gasteromycetes may be divided into several groups with similar larger features but not necessarily closely related scientifically. The first and most widespread and com- mon of these groups is the one from which the name ''Puff-ball" originated. In this group the spores develop inside a stalkless July/August receptacle which is usually globose or some closely related shape. At maturity the recep- tacles are either on the surface of the ground, partially immersed in soil or they complete their development totally submerged in the soil, usually around the bases of trees. Earth Stars (Geastrum) may be included in this group. In the second group the globose or subglobose sac is present but is raised to vary- ing heights on stalks that may vary con- siderably in shape and size and, in at least one genus (Calostoma) may be gelatinous, These stalked Gasteromycetes are usually found in desert or sandy areas and, with the exception of Calostoma, are rarely found in the wetter or more heavily timbered localities. In the third group the spore-bearing part develops within a sac which is usually white and on the surface of the ground. At maturity the sac is ruptured and the fruiting body emerges, This may be a latticed ball (Clathrus), horn-shaped or divided up in many different ways. It may be white or brightly coloured, usually some shade of red, the whole often accompanied by an evil smell which attracts insects that assist in the distribution of the spores, These are the Phallales, commonly known as ‘‘Stink- horns’. The main and most easily recognizable members of the fourth group are the ‘‘Bird’s Nest Fungi". In this group the spores develop within small capsules (peridiola) and are con- tained until maturity within à small cup- shaped receptacle, usually in clusters on fallen twigs and branches. The peridiola or “eggs” are often covered at first by a lid or epiphragm that falls away at maturity, leav- ing the exposed peridiola to be dispersed by the impact of falling rain drops or other not so apparent physical means. There are some genera that will not fit satisfactorily within these four groups but some familiarity with Gasteromycetes in the field will soon enable the curious naturalist to recognize them as members of the class. For eighteen years since 1962 the senior authors have collected Gasteromycetes widely in Victoria with, unfortunately, least atten- tion to the North-western areas. During this period we have examined microscopically thousands of specimens in both the fresh and 165 the dried states and it has become apparent to us that a wide range of variation exists in all groups outside published generic and specific limits. This applies mainly to the Hymenogastrales, Sclerodermales and Lycoperdales. The most satisfactory, indeed the only, work available initially was the excellent Gasteromycetes of Australia and New Zealand by G. H. Cunningham and publish- ed privately in 1943. This has been used as the standard work of reference throughout and most collections have been referred to the nearest genus and species in that work. It was early realized that in the vast number of Gasteromycete collections available to us there were probably many new species and even genera, but that little benefit would arise from describing new taxa within the framework of what was rapidly becoming a partially outdated taxonomy. In 1973 there was published The Fungi, Vol. IV B in which articles by Alexander H. Smith and D. M. Dring set out more satisfac- tory frameworks in which three of the major families of the Gasteromycetes, the Hymenogastrales, Sclerodermales and Lycoperdales could be distributed. However, as this improved taxonomy is still in a state of flux, and little information is available to us at present on new combinations or species that may have been published — if indeed any have — we feel that the most useful ac- tion is still to refer all known Victorian species and genera to Cunningham's tax- onomy. This we have done. All species recorded by Cunningham for Victoria that G. H. CUNNINGHAM HYMENOGASTRALES Hymenogastraceae PUN ZOO RON Ef... ahha ss fonts an te aoa E Hymenogaster Nith etsn oi ssaa Octaviania Vitt. (in part) Octaviania Vitt. (in part) Richoniella Cost. & Duf. ........... Hydnangitim Wairere Hysterangium Vitt............ Ae Gymnoglossum Mass............+-++ Gautieria Vitt....... PENET Secosiin K2e. ssa se mA E 166 have not been seen by us are marked with an asterisk. For those who wish to compare Cunn- ingham's taxonomy with that in The Fungi, Vol. IV B an equivalent list has been provided in which the various families and genera in Cunningham are compared with those of the new taxonomy as closely as possible. The following is a list of works that are useful in Gasteromycete identification: Brodie, H. J. (1975) The Bird's Nest Fungi, University of Toronto Press. Coker, W. C. & J. N. Crouch (1928) The Gasteromycetes of the Eastern United States and Canada. J, Cramer, Lehre, 1969 reprint, Cribb, Joan W. (1955-58) The Gasteromycetes of Queensland, parts 1-5. Queensland University Press, Department of Botany, Vol. 3, Nos. 8, 13, 15, 17 & 25. Cunningham, G. H. (1943) The Gasteromycetes of Australia and New Zealand, John MelIndoe, Dunedin (privately printed). Reprinted 1979, Bibliotheca Mycologica, Band 67. Dodge, C. W. & S. M. Zeller (1936) Hydnangium and Related Genera, Annals Missouri Botanical Garden, 23: 599-638, Nov. 1936, Dring, D. M. (1973) Gasteromycetes in The Fungi, Vol. IV B, ed. Ainsworth, Sparrow and Sussman, Academic Press, New York. Kreisel, H. & D. M. Dring (1967) An Emendation of the Genus Morganella Zeller (Lycoperdaceae), Feddes Repertorium, Berlin, Vol 74, 1-2: 109- 122. Pegler, D. N. & T. W. K. Young (1979) The gasteroid Russulas, Trans. Brit. mycol. Soc. 72, 3: 353-388. Smith, A. H. (1973) Agaricales and related Secotioid Gasteromycetes in The Fungi, Vol. IV B, ed. Ainsworth, Sparrow & Sussman, Academic Press, New York. THE FUNGI VOL. IV B Hymenogastrales: Rhizopogonaceae Hymenogastrales: A Gasteroid genus of the Cortinariaceae =Octavianina Kze. Kymenogastrales: Position uncertain. =Leucogaster Hesse Hymenogastrales: Position uncertain. Hymenogastrales: A Gasteroid genus of the Entolomataceae Hymenogastrales: Position uncertain. Phallales: Hysterangiaceae Not listed. Gautieriales: Gautieriaceae, or Hymeno- gastrales: A Gasteroid genus of the Cortinariaceae Hymenogastrales: Secotiaceae Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 PHALLALES Phallaceae Mutinus Fr. Phallus L. ex Pers. Dictyophora Desv. Clathraceae Anthurus Kalch. & Mcowan Aseroe Labill. Clathrus Mich. ex Pers. SCLERODERMALES Calostomataceae Galostoma. Desv. xcd teur epa. Sclerodermataceae ScletodermabBers: 3.5 05 A S Ae v Pisolithus Alb. & Schw. ............ LYCOPERDALES Lycoperdaceae Mesaphellia:Berk- eres e etse Castoreum Cke. & Mass Mycenastrum Desv. Disciseda Czern. Bovista Dill. ex Pers. Lycoperdon Tourn. ex Pers. Calvatia Fr. Geastrim Persis cose ta vore e ores VAstraeus-MOEIgaIt, see da educere Tulostomataceae Tulostoma Pers. q.i. sposi EO a eee Tulostomatales: Calostomataceae Sclerodermatales: Sclerodermataceae Sclerodermatales: Sclerodermataceae Lycoperdales: Mesophelliaceae Lycoperdales: Mesophelliaceae In part —Morganella Zeller Lycoperdales: Geastraceae Sclerodermatales: Astraeaceae Tulostomatales: Tulostomataceae Tulostomatales: Tulostomataceae Rhellorinia Berk... «cy EV E Tulostomatales: Tulostomataceae Chlamydopus Speg. ............... Tulostomatales: Tulostomataceae NIDULARIALES Nidulariaceae Nidula White Nidularia Fr. Mycocaelia Palmer Crucibulum Tul. Cyathus Haller ex Pers. Sphaerobolaceae Sphaerobolus Tode ex Pers. BASIDIOMYCOTINA tasmanicus G. H. Cunn. GASTEROMYCETES viscidus Mass. & Rod. Hymenogastrales zeylanicus Petch Hymenogastraceae Octaviania alveolata Cke. & Mass. Rhizopogon clelandi G. H. Cunn. flava (Rod.) G. H. Cunn. luteolus Fr. glabra (Rod.) G. H. Cunn. rubescens Tul. hinsbyi (Rod.) G. H. Cunn. Hymenogaster albellus Mass. & Rod. megaspora (Rod.) G. H. Cunn. albus (Klotzsch) Bark. & Br. pallida Mass. & Rod. aureus Rod. redolens G. H. Cunn. fuligineus G. H. Cunn. seminuda Mass. & Rod. fusisporus Mass. & Rod. stricta G. H. Cunn. levisporus Mass. & Rod. tasmanica (Kalchbr. ex Mass.) Lloyd nanus Mass, & Rod. Richoniella cf. leptoniispora (Rich.) reticulatus G. H. Cunn. Cost. & Duf. July/August 167 sp. sp. Hydnangeum carneum Wall. glabrellum (Zeller & Dodge) G. H. Cunn. Hysterangium aggregatum Cribb affine Mass. & Rod. hautu G. H. Cunn. inflatum Rod. moslei (Berk. & Br.) Zeller & Dodge tunicatum G. H. Cunn. Gymnoglossum fulvum (Rod.) G. H. Cunn. stipitatum Mass. violaceum (Mass. & Rod.) G. H. Cunn. viscidum Cribb Gautieria albida (Mass. & Rod.) G. H. Cunn. clelandii G. H. Cunn. costata G. H. Cunn. macrospora G. H. Cunn. mucosa (Petri) Zeller & Dodge rodwayi (Mass.) Zeller & Dodge Secotium areolatum G. H. Cunn. coarctatum Berk. leucocephalum Mass. piriforme Clel. & G. H. Cunn. porphyreum G. H. Cunn. rodwayi Mass. *scabrosum Cke. & Mass. sessile Mass. & Rod. Phallales Phallaceae Mutinus *borneensis Ces. cartilagineus J. H. Willis Phallus rubicundus (Bosc.) Fr. Dictyophora *multicolor Berk. & Br. Clathraceae Anthurus archeri (Berk.) Fisch. javanicus (Penzig) G. H. Cunn. Aseroe rubra LaBill. ex. Fr. Clathrus *cibarius (Tul.) Fisch. gracilis (Berk.) Schlecht. *pusillus Berk. Sclerodermales Calostomataceae Calostoma fuscum (Berk.) Mass. rodwayi Lloyd sp. Sclerodermataceae Scleroderma australe Mass. bovista Fr. flavidum Ell. & Ev. forma macrosporum G. H. Cunn. cf. geaster Fr. radicans Lloyd 168 verrucosum (Vaill.) Pers. Pisolithus microcarpus (Cke. & Mass.) G. H. Cunn. tinctorius (Mich. ex. Pers.) Coker & Couch Lycoperdales Lycoperdaceae Mesophellía arenaria Berk. castanea Lloyd glauca (Cke. & Mass.) Reid novae-zelandiae G. H. Cunn. *pachythrix (Cke. & Mass.) Lloyd Castoreum cretaceum (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. radicatum Cke. & Mass. Mycenastrum corium (Guers.) Desv. Disciseda anomala (Cke. & Mass.) G. H. Cunn. *australis G. H. Cunn. cervina (Berk.) Hollos *hypogaea (Cke. & Mass.) G. H. Cunn. pedicellata (Morgan) Hollos *verrucosa G. H. Cunn. Bovista apedicellata G. H. Cunn. brunnea Berk. verrucosa G. H. Cunn., Lycoperdon asperum (Lev.) de Toni glabrescens Berk. gunnii Berk. hiemale Bull. nitidum Lloyd. perlatum Pers. polymorphum Vitt. pusillum Pers. pyriforme Schaeff. ex Pers. scabrum (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. spadiceum Pers. subincarnatum Peck Calvatia candida (Rost.) Hollos gigantea (Batsch. ex. Pers.) Lloyd lilacina (Berk.) P. Henn. Geastrum arenarium (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. australe Berk. campestre (Morg.) Kambly & Lee clelandii (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. *drummondii (Berk.) G. H. Cunn. fenestriatum (Pers.) Fisch. fimbriatum (Fr.) Fisch. floriforme (Vitt.) G. H. Cunn. hariotii (Lloyd) Fisch. hygrometricum Pers. limbatum (Fr.) G. H. Cunn. mammosum (Fr.) G. H. Cunn. minus (Pers.) Fisch. mirabile (Mont.) Fisch. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 pectinatum Pers. OU E s eds fei T: ima plicatum (Berk) G. H. Cunn. Lioyd yi us (Klotzsch) rufescens Pers. saccatum (Berk.) G. H. Cunn. simulans (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. smithii (Lloyd) G. H. Cunn. triplex (Jungh.) Fisch. velutinum (Morgan) Fisch. Astraeus hygrometricus (Pers.) Morgan Tulostomataceae Tulostoma albicans White ex G. H. Nidulariales Nidulariaceae Nidula candida (Peck) White emodensis (Berk.) Lloyd Nidularia fusispora Mass. pisiformis (Roth.) Tul. Mycocaelia denudata (Fr.) Palmer Crucibulum vulgare Tul. Cyathus colensoi Berk. x Cunn. hookeri Berk. album Mass. novae-zelandiae Tul. australianum Lloyd ex G. H. Cunn. olla Pers. brumale Pers. minutum White ex G. H. Cunn. obesum Cke. & Ell. ex G. H. Cunn. pubescens G. H. Cunn. stercoreus (Schw.) de Toni Sphaerobolaceae Sphaerobolus stellatus Tode ex Pers. reheisisdumkyyH. Conn, The list comprises 37 genera and 155 Species. striatum G. H. Cunn. G. Beaton, Eildon, Victoria. subfuscum White ex G. H. Cunn. G. A. Crichton, Croydon, Victoria. adhi. Battarraea stevenii (Libr.) Fr Gretna Weste, School of Botany, University of SX ` Melbo : Phellorinia inquinans Berk. ides *strobilinia Kalch. ex Kalch. & Cke. NEW BOOKS **Kosciusko Alpine Flora’’. by A. B. Costin, M. Gray, C. J. Totterdell, D. J. Wimbush Published by CSIRO and William Collins Pty. Ltd. Photographs color and black and white. Vegetation maps. 408 pages. Price $25.00 (discount to members) Postage 50km 90c Vic $1.15 NSW $2.00. “Australian Native Plants”? by John W. Wrigley and Murray Fagg Propagation, Cultivation & Use in Landscaping. 140 Color Plates 300 Black & White and Line drawings 448 pages. Price $30.00 (discount to members) Postage 50km $1.00 Vic $1.35 N.S.W. $2.50 “Lichens of South Australia" by Rex B. Filson and Roderick W. Rogers Color plates Black & White photographs, Line drawings 197 pages, Soft cover. Price $10.50 (discount to members) Postage 50km or Vic 70c. Interstate 80c. “Butterflies of South Australia" by Robert H. Fisher A.U.A., F. R.E.S. 16 Color Plates Black & White photographs 272 pages, Soft cover. Price $9.50 (discount to members) Postage Vic 70c, Interstate 80c. Above books are Handbooks of the Flora and Fauna of South Australia. Order from Sales Officer F.N.C.V. July/August 169 Botanical Safari to the Australian Arid Regions July 2nd — 27th, 1979 A Botanical Safari into the arid regions of Australia is surely an intriguing and in- teresting expedition but when it is led by Australia's foremost botanist, Dr. J. H. Willis, it becomes a unique and thrilling ex- perience — this was the general acclaim of the eleven men and eight women who took part in this month long camping trip. Four Toyota four-wheel-drive Land Cruisers, three pulling supply trailers and driven by four versatile and intrepid country men made access possible to trackless lands, most areas of which had received rain in the previous month. Although the rainfall in these regions is notoriously erratic, almost the entire route was within the under 10 ins. (260 mms) annual rainfall area. (See Fig 1). All mainland States except Western Australia were visited and more than 8000 km. traversed and twenty camps were made. Although in excess of 1200 plant species are recorded in this area, in the short time of the safari, more than 456 native species from 85 different families were collected or recorded. Some were new records for the locality and a few species had never previously been record- ed. Before reaching the first night's camp at Red Cliffs (Vic.) we noted how the orange broom-like Exocarpus strictus had spread around the Hattah Lakes area following the bush fires of three summers ago. North of Wentworth we were almost im- mediately into the arid zone with salt-bush flats and acacias, here we found the Bramble Wattle (Acacia victoriae) which is rare in Vic- toria and confined to the Warby Range near Thoona, also the Waterbush (Myoporum montanum) a close relative of the Boobialla. Much of our outward and homeward bound routes encircled the Lake Eyre Basin where the elevation is generally below 500 feet (126.6 metres). These areas are underlain by the Great Artesian Basin and we visited the mound springs on its western extremity on the return journey; as most of the terrain is semi-desert scrub, often transected by the parallel lines of tomato-red sandhills, bright coloured flowers were conspicuous by the track side. Near Gairdners Creek our second camp, fields of bright yellow Senecio gregorii were extensive. Further north in the Fowler's Gap — Lake Patterson area, the bright magenta-pink of the Parakeelya (Calandrinia) appeared, 4 species of Calandrinia were collected on the trip — C. balonensis common in the Centre, 170 C. eremaea the small variety, C. Ptychosperma from the mud flats and C. remota. Around this area the Eremophilas (Native fuchsias) began in profusion with their bright red, orange or blue flowers — a total of 15 different species were seen on the trip. — Surely these are some of the most typical and beautiful plants of the arid regions, belonging to the Myoporaceae, some had blue or violet tubular flowers more than an inch long. E. maculata with the spotted throat is known to be poisonous as stock-feed. Another noted stock poison is the Gidyea Acacia (A. georginae) (Fig. 2) which ap- peared north of Tibooburra, in the Sturt Na- tional Park area. This tree produces a fluoro- acetate akin to 1080, but is not poisonous in all localities; the area of the Georgina River, west of Boulia is one of the poisonous zones. The flowers of the gidyea smelt like boiled cabbage, and the leaves when wet, had a uriniferous odour, We recorded 29 species of acacia, the most unusual of which were the Waddy Trees (A. peuce) near Boulia which somewhat resembled a pine-tree with spiny, curling pods. The Land Cruisers had no difficulty in crossing Cooper’s Creek which was about 100 yards wide, and we visited the Nappa (sand- hill) Merri (water) Water Hole beside which stands the Coolibah (Eucalyptus microtheca) engraved with the words, ‘‘Dig 40 feet West — December 16th 1860'' which is becoming covered with the rounded healing growth of the bark. It is 119 years since Brahe inscribed the message, and left the area at 10 a.m. not realizing that the malnourished and ex- hausted King, Bourke and Wills would stag- ger to the spot some eight hours later and delieve they had been deserted, This disap- pointment finally sealed their doom. It was all very silent and lonely, apart from a flock of pelicans on the Water Hole when we arrived; the dark green tangled lignum (Muehlenbeckia cunninghamii a Polygonum) grew luxuriantly on the banks. Also there grew Marsilea drummondii, the Nardoo, the sporocarp or fruiting body of which was ground for flour by the aborigines. Near the Dig Tree was another Coolibah carved with an effigy of Bourke by some workers from Innamincka Station some 15 years after his visit. The Dig Tree is in Queensland, and we followed the Cooper some 17 miles to In- namincka in South Australia, just as Bourke Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 sry) ING. = S.& OCONADITTA FRO ONA DAM EAM over 30" ES 20-30" YO 720" C3 € 10° AV. ANN. RAINFALL BERIm Ba” ee 7 Cee GB seer n € =-cAMPS Fig. 1. Botany Safari, 2nd July, 1979. and Wills had done before they gave up hope and died near the river. The Strzelecki Creek joins the Cooper here and the river flats were covered with Corellas making their feeble protesting cries, we saw these birds again in millions at Birdsville, 200 miles to the north, and heard their cries until midnight as they jostled for positions on the River Red Gums (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) July/August along the Diamantina River. Bauhinia cunn- inghamii the camel tree with twin-leaves, a member of the Caesalpiniaceae grew near the Cooper. Near the Cooper we found the large blue flowers of Trichodesma zeylanicum. Later we found Halganea cyanea, another blue member of the Borage or Forget-me-not family, but the introduced Patterson's Curse 14] (Echium lycopsis) was not in flower. Another Borage in flower was Heliotropium tenuifolium. In addition to the Coolibahs in this area there were bloodwoods (Eucalyptus terminalis). In the Western MacDonnell Ranges these trees are covered with knobbly “apples” or galls caused by an insect. We were able to cut these open and eat the inter- nal **coconut"' layer which encapsulates the large, fat, edible larva looking so repulsive and grub-like that we were not inclined to eat it as the aboriginals do. Across Sturt's Stony Desert there was little vegetation amongst the gibber stones which remain after the lighter material has all blown away, except a neat red stemmed Euphorbia tannensis (also on the island of Tanna in the New Hebrides). Members of the Chenopodiaceae in this area were the blue salt bush now called Maireana (formerly Kochia) with rosy-red fruits — in all we found 4 species in addition to 7 species of the salt bush Atriplex; 2 species of Arthrocnemum (the Glassworts), 8 species of Bassia many with sharp spreading spines, and the Buck-bush or Roly Poly (Salsola kali) which sped along in the wind. Our first Ptilotus (pussy-tails) were seen here. These are a feature of arid Australia, and we later found at least 10 species of these Fig. 3. Casuarina decasneana, Photo Author. 172 Amaranths with green, pink and magenta in- florescences. On an enormous red sandhill on Cordillo Downs, we found a gnarled, spiny tree, the rare Codonocarpus ramulosus, one of the Gyrostemons or Bell-fruit trees. The Desert Poplar (Codonocarpus cotinifolius) was com- mon in the South Western MacDonnell area (Fig 3) and is a bright green tree with the top curving over heavy with fruit, which grows so quickly near Ayer's Rock. On the same sand- hill we saw yellow flowered broom-like bushes of Crotalaria dissitiflora as well as the yellow-green flowers of the rattle-pod C. cun- ninghamii. We collected four species of crotalaria. The Papilionaceae (Fabaceae) family pro- vided us with more colour throughout the en- tire trip — 5 species of red or violet-red swainsona peas; and on the Sturt Highway north of Alice springs with the brilliant red pea flowers of Brachysema chambersii creep- ing out from the base of the small spiny bush; later near William Creek with Clianthus speciosus the Sturt Desert Pea. We also en- joyed the patches of waving Psoralea which we saw in several areas. Between Birdsville and Boulia we found the Native Plum (Owenia acidula) one of the Meliaceae family to which belongs also the South African White Cedar (Melia azedarach) so common as street trees in West Queensland towns. West of Boulia we crossed the Georgina River which is also known as Rankin's River, Eyre Creek and Mullegan's Creek on its journey south. Here we found a mistletoe, Amyema miraculosa growing on another mistletoe which in turn was growing on an eremophila. The Tropic of Capricorn was crossed here and we noted clumps of Mitchell grass (Astrebla pectinata) and the pretty pink Frankenia muscosa and F. speciosa. Another Gramineae which intrigued us was the ginger oil grass (Cympopogon obtectus) and a strongly lemon-scented grass found mainly near the Centre. In the Western MacDonnell's the love grass (Eragrostis eriopoda) appeared to have its base set in a mass of small cotton-wool swabs; the porcupine grass or spinifex Triodia basedowii and T. pungens seemed ubiquitous. Near Boulia we found our first flowers of the yellow hibiscus (Abutilon leucopetalum) and the pink Gossypium australe, with hairy leaves and flowers, a close relative of the Sturt's Desert Rose (G. sturtianum) the floral emblem of the Northern Territory. In many areas the perfume of the abundant white and lilac native stocks, was discernible without alighting from the cars. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Our first camp in the Northern Territory was on Tobermory Station near the Queensland border, and although we were technically within the tropical zone, there was a frost overnight and the water in a dish left outside turned to ice. Eastwards along the so- called Plenty Highway the Gidyea acacia gave way to mulga (Acacia aneura) and the bluish round-leafed mallee (Eucalyptus gammophylla) appeared. Here we passed through an area of Acacia validinervia which looked like dwarfed golden wattle. Thirty Red-tailed Black Cockatoos flew along side us for a distance at 50 km per hour as we approached the Harts Range. Here a plant with a distinctive bright orange petal turned out to be a violet (Hybanthus enneaspermus). We camped that night near a bean-tree (Erythrina vespertilio) the leaflets of which are shaped like the wings of a bat. The sand sparkled in the rays of the setting sun, and we were soon crouched down collec- ting handfuls of tiny rubies and garnets. Here there were clumps of intensely purple Stemodia viscosa, and a deep blue-purple snapdragon-like flower with scented foliage, both members of Scrophulariaceae family. On the homeward journey near William Creek another member of this family, Peplidium muelleri, provided a sky-blue carpet of flowers for hundreds of yards. At our next camp near Mt. Freeling N.W. of Alice Springs, the beautiful crimson Grevillea wickhamii was in flower, and yellow figs covered an enormous Ficus platypoda tree. Here we met the caustic vine, Sarcostemma australe an Asclepiad, which we later found climbing up into a bloodwood tree in the George Gill Range. Brilliant white trailing inflorescences of Diplopeltis stuartii of the Sapindaceae family were found, also dried fruits of the native orange Capparis mitchellii, and the native passion fruit C. spinosa, Dr. Willis had previously found a bush of Euphorbia sarcostemmoides in this vicinity, and set out to rediscover it, but to his surprise we found many such plants there, and later more at Mt. Sonder and Ormiston Gorge. This succulent leafless spurge is closely akin to some African species, and somewhat resembles the caustic bush. We were in the land of the Corkwoods, those thick-barked hakeas which have a special significance for the Aborigines because their ritual Kadaitcha murders must be committed within sight of such a tree. We found at least 3 species, Hakea cyreana (formerly divaricarta), H. chordophylla and H. suberea. A day at Mt. Freeling supplied us with 134 species of flowering plants from 44 families. Next we erected our tents in the July/August Greenleaves Caravan Park at Alice Springs and spent the afternoon at the Arid Regions Herbarium, Next day we explored the gorges in the MacDonnells east of Alice. These mountains extend for more than 200 miles in a W.E. direction across the Centre and were originally estimated to be elevated 10-1500 feet above the surroundings, but have been worn down over the last 500 million years so that the tallest remaining are Mt. Zeil 5000 feet, Mt. Sonder 4500 feet and Mt. Conway 4100 feet, allin the Western sector. The most spectacular plant in the Eastern gorges was Pandorea doratoxylon of the Bignoniaceae family, whose creamy flowers were in profusion over the red rocky walls, At Corroboree Rock there was an attractive blue Scaevola ovalifera a fan flower, member of the Goodeniaceae family, also we found a striking white member of this family, Goodenia horniana, named after the Horn expedition of 1894. A white Samolis valerandii a member of the Primulaceae grew in profusion in Emily Gap along with a purple daisy bush Olearia stuartii, and blue Isotome stuartii. After a night of sub-zero temperatures at Alice Springs, two pied butcher birds in the mulgas above our tents turned towards the sunrise and lifted their beaks to sing a long and varied melody. We set off for the Western MacDonnells and probably our most exciting botanical find was at Simpson's Gap only 22.5 miles west of Alice Springs, where high up on the eastern steep, rocky talus of the gorge, the only known occurrence of Ricinocarpus gloria-medii, (the Glory-of-the- Centre) grew profusely. This magnificent member of the Euphororbia family (of which there are 15 species only in Australia, 10 of these in Western Australia) had escaped detection until 1966 when Flora McDonald of Melbourne discovered the bushes — but it was not until photographs and material were forwarded in 1972 by Mr H. Alan Morrison also of Melbourne, that Dr. Willis was able to describe and name the species. The flowers resemble orange blossom, and the plants are either exclusively male, or the inflorescence consists of a single, longer stalked female flower surrouned by 1-4 shorter stalked male flowers. Our next two day camp at Ormiston Gorge yielded 238 different species including 6 new occurrences for that locality; Petalostylis labicheoides a close relative of the cassias, showed its yellow petals with the scarlet markings in the centre, and there was a most annoying little yellow Merbelia viminalis whose spines caught in our clothing; Eucalyptus socialis the red mallee was noticeable here. At the next camp most of the party made 173 the strenuous climb to the summit of Mt. Sonder and were successful in obtaining specimens of Leucopogon sonderensis, the only member of the heath family (Epacridaceae) in the Centre. This grows only above 100m. and was previously mistakenly referred to as a styphelia, until its true identi- ty was established by Dr. Willis. From a camp near the Finke River east of Hermannsburg we visited Palm Valley to see again the palms Livistonia mariae which were discovered by Ernest Giles in 1872 and occur nowhere else but in these damp gorges. Ap- parently they and other Livistonias in West Australia, North Queensland and even Vic- toria (Cabbage Tree Palms) are a relic from tropical times when the Australian land mass was joined with the continents of Antarctica, Africa and South America to form ancient Gondwanaland. Another relic of these an- cient days are the Cycads (Macrozamia macdonnellii) whose nuts are eaten by aboriginals after soaking in water to remove the poison which affected the unsuspecting sailors on Captain Cook's first voyage to Australia. Next day we followed a track to Gosse's Bluff a geological feature probably formed by the explosion millions of years ago, of a large quartzite bubble, and not by a meteorite as is popularly imagined. Here we found the only Xanthorrhea represented in the Centre. X. thortonii a rather sad-looking small grass- tree; a small relative of the grass-tree grew in Ormiston Gorge (Lomandra patens). Some 50 miles west of the George Gill range we came on some quile astonishing fields of pink and white Thryptomene maisonneuvii and patches of yellow Micromyrtus flaviflora; another member of the family Myrtaceae the Baeckea polystemona was later found at King’s Canyon. In this remote western sandhill country the variety of flowers was enormous; we drove through plains of pink Helichrysum davenportii and scented wild stocks, In all we found seven species of Helichrysum and seven species of Helipterum, as well as some showy patches of Myriocephalus stuartii the “poached egg’’ daisy. | found a bush Swainsona Sp. which grew like a half-open umbrella planted point down in the sand, with lacy branches and purple pea flowers. We also met some aboriginals who had just captured three wild dromedaries which they were hoping to sell in Alice Springs for $200 each. Just east of King’s Canyon in the George Gill Range is Reedy Rock Pool where we camped for the next three nights. Here we saw the Skeleton Fork-Fern (Psilotum nudum) its only occurrence in the Northern 174 Territory. The same plant is found at Mitre Peak and Mt. Arapiles in Victoria. In this vicinity there are numerous caves in the red rocks, some decorated with aboriginal art. At Kathleen Springs a few miles eastwards, we found a small attractive pink member of the Convolulaceae family, rejoicing in the name of Bonamia rosea. A large orange ‘‘armour- plated’’ centipede about 8 ins. long also found and bit me — later in the Wallara Ranch Museum we saw a large jar full of the formidable creatures. Where the red sandy road verges towards the Sturt Highway was a botanical delight, and we particularly admired a large specimen of weeping Desert Oak (Casuarina decasneana) and a field of bright lilac Solanum Sp. Cassias, of which we found 12 species, were in full bloom. We visited the Henbury Meteorite Craters which are believed to have been formed some 4,700 years ago when one meteor on a high trajec- tory from the north west, struck the earth and disintegrated into at least another twelve fragments which formed the smaller craters. The bitumen sealing of the Sturt Highway ceased at the South Australian border and we were thankful to turn off in a south easterly direction towards William Creek where some of the most exciting fields of wild flowers were seen; these included the sky blue Peplidium muellerii, the bright blue storksbill (Erodium crinitum), crimson Clianthus speciosus, yellow Calocephalus platycephalus, pink Helichriysum cassinianum and magenta Prtilotis helipteroides. The road south of Oodnadatta became flatter with limestone ridges, limestone "puffs" and gidyea acacias and we made camp on a pebbly gravel area on which grew clumps of lignum. We noticed the spread of the bright green Turkish Wild Turnip in this area. Further south we entered sandhill coun- try again, and the track wound through fields of purple and dark red Swainsona stipularia. The road around Lake Eyre South was a “horror stretch’’ of ruts and dust, with the only vegetation being salt bush and samphire. Our next camp at Aroona Dam near Leigh Creek was the only truly wet one; rain con- tinued throughout the Flinders Ranges and the slithery yellow mud roads north of Wilpena Pound were difficult to negotiate. Our next camp was at the southern end of the Flinders Ranges in the shadow of Mt, Remarkable near Melrose where giant Eucalyptus camaldulensis lined the banks of the creek in true Hans Heysen fashion. Our last camp was on the Murray River flats at Mildura. At a private aboretum owned by Mr Cur- tis, "Wilga Park" at Piangil we had our last Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 review of many specimens of inland flora and the arid terrain. We also witnessed the female emu sitting on her next of eggs, contrary to the traditional theory. We returned to Melbourne after a strenuous but exhilarating 28 days of botaniz- ing in the arid lands; by popular acclaim the species name allotted to our leader Dr H. H. Willis was ‘‘exaltatus’’, while to most of the other male botanists **griseopogon'' seemed appropriate. At the end of the safari the species name ‘‘albicans’’ would have been definitely a misnomer for any of us. The author acknowledges with gratitude the help given with proof reading and photos by Miss M. Doery. E. K. Turner. Naturalists of Yesteryear BY R. SIMMONS Possibly the most obvious section of to- day's Australian wildlife is the Avifauna. This was also obviously true in the late 1880's as well, if gauged by the number of bird- related articles appearing in volumes IV and V, of “The Victorian Naturalist’’. * x * In the December 1887 issue (Volume IV, pages 121-123) an article by Mr A, Coles discusses the need for government protection of various bird species. He says '* I think all will agree that some of our birds need protec- tion, particularly edible birds, such as turkey, swan, duck, plover, pigeons, quail etc., otherwise they would be slaughtered all the year round for market.” He continues: **Our insectivorous birds should certainly be ac- corded some measure of protection, as they do a very great service to our fruit-growers and farmers, and the only question appears to me to be — what is the best method to adopt?" Mr Cole then states what he con- siders to be the main threats to our avifauna: “The greatest enemies to all birds are those who are reported to say ‘It is a fine day; let us go out and kill something’ and indiscriminate collectors of birds’ eggs. It is a well-known fact that boys in the country are in the habit of taking every egg they can possibly find, stringing them into skeins, and hanging them about their homes . . .”’ His very far-sighted answer to these problems is ‘‘to bring the matter before the children of the country State schools, showing them the injury they are doing to their parents, and eventually to themselves, by destroying the natural enemies of their insect pests.” * * * On the 12th March 1888 a Mr R. H. Nan- carrow presented a paper entitled “Note on July/August the Nidification of the Chestnut Rumped Acanthiza (Acanthiza uropygialis)." In it he describes his search for the Chestnut Rumped Thornbill (A. uropygialis), ‘‘about twenty years ago | used to do a good deal of nest- hunting in the Whipstick . . . In and around the scrub I met with several species of birds, respecting the nidification of which Gould's recently-published handbook furnished little or no information. To search for their nests was therefore, a very pleasurable task.” Mr Nancarrow continues “among those that principally engaged my attention were the cautious Hylacola (Hylacola cauta), Lambert's Malurus (Malurus Lamberti), the Red-capped Robin (Petroica goodenovii) and the Chestnut Rumped Acanthiza. I found the nests of all, except Acanthiza uropygialis.” The nests of A. uropygialis proved illusive "until the summer of 1881," when, '*'now I could see how I had hitherto been baffled, for the nest, instead of being placed among foliage, as one would expect an Acanthiza’s nest to be, was actually built in the cleft of a hollow tree. **In this case the nest was about 7 ft. from the ground, in a dead, hollow sapling which was cleft on one side.” The paper continues “since then 1 have found three other nests, One was built in a hollow stump ... the second was built in a hollow, dead branch . the third 1 found, as in the preceding instance, was in an upright dead branch.” k++ A note, entitled Hummingbird and Mantis, that appeared in ‘“The Victorian Naturalist”? (Vol. V page 88) was extracted from the Pro- ceedings of the Elliott Society and ''tells a strange tale of a humming bird". It tells of a Mr Alexander who **heard in hís garden what 175 he knew must be a cry of pain, and going to a vine, from which the cry seemed to proceed, he found a humming bird struggling violently but unable to extricate itself. He took it in his hands, and, to his astonishment, saw that it was in the clutches of an insect, . . . a man- tis." Mr Alexander states that ‘‘the bird was wounded under the wing, upon one side of the breast, which had evidently been lacerated with the powerful mandibles of its captor. The wound looked ugly enough to lead me to fear that it would prove fatal." After releasing the injured bird and tending to its wound it was ‘‘placed among the leaves of the vine" but ‘‘in the morning the little sufferer lay dead on the ground beneath." * + * This final extract is not related to the general theme of this ‘‘Naturalists of Yesteryear’’ column, but refers instead to the King Island Excursion Report detailed in the January/February issue. In a letter to the “Editor of the Victorian Naturalist’’ entitled “King Island" a Mr Walter K. Bissill says: "Sir — Reading in your journal the in- teresting account of the exploration of King Island, I have wondered whether it could not be utilised as a zoological reserve for the famous Tasmanian hyena and Ursine dasyure (Tasmanian devil). These animals, the most remarkable living carnivorous representatives of an ancient race, are found in no other place in the world except the fastnesses of our sister island and colony, Tasmania, and will in time go the way of all wild beast flesh, before the advancing tide of civilisation. "King Island is, no doubt, a bit severed from Tasmania, but entirely resembles it in fauna and flora. In it the animals would live on the wallabies, and as a poisonous plant prevents the stocking of the island with sheep and cattle, they could not do much harm. "Well, almost alone in the earth, we possess living representatives of this wonder- ful order, the vanguard of the mammal race, Nowhere are there such large carnivorous members as those in Tasmania. They are not only early in time, but in organisation — a link between the lizards and the mammals of Europe. “They carry what may be called portable nests, with food supplies laid on, being born almost as undeveloped as eggs, and remain- ing unconscious in the nest (pouch) for weeks. “Might not the larger of these — the hyena — be allowed a home in an island which is almost useless, except to naturalists.” It is a pity that the effort of the Victorian Naturalists’ Club and Mr Bissill’s suggestion could not have been acted upon and saved “the famous Tasmanian hyena’’ from extinc- tion. NOTE: Ursine dasyure is now Sarcophilus harrisii. Hylacola cauta is now Sericornis cautus. The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 2 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 32 in a previous issue) By JAMES A. BAINES *Symphytum. Gk name, symphyton, in Dioscorides for two plants, so called from their use in healing wounds (sym- phyo, make to grow together). *S. officinale, Common Comfrey, is plen- tiful on roadsides in several districts, but see Wiilis on the hybrid Blue Comfrey. Comírey comes through Old French from Lat con-, cum-, with; feruo, fervo, boil; hence conferuo, grow together, 176 heal up; transferred to the plants because of their use in treating wounds. *Tagetes. A Mexican genus of 50 species, named by L. after an Etruscan deity, Tages, said to have sprung from the earth as it was being ploughed and to have taught the Etruscans the art of divination. Varieties of T. patula are er- roneously called African and French Marigolds. Our sole naturalized Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 species, *T. minuta, is invidiously known as Stinking Roger! Family Com- positae. *Tanacetum. Medieval Lat tanazita (from Gk athanasia, immortality; a-, no, thanatos, death). T. vulgare is a superseded name for *Chrysanthemum vulgare, Tansy, the common name being an English corruption of Tanacetum. Named from its medicinal use, and its having been eaten at Easter in memory of the ‘bitter herbs’ of the Passover. Family Compositae. Taraxacum. Arabic tarasacon, a kind of succory (or chicory); Persian tarkhashqun, wild endive; Latinized as taraxacon in Avicenna (the Arab philosopher and physician Ibn Sena); rendered Taraxacum by Weber in establishing the genus in 1780. Victoria has *T. officinale, Dandelion, and a native species, T. aristum, Austral Dandelion. Dandelion is from French dent de lion, lion’s tooth, the reason for giving this name being discussed in an interesting paragraph by Gareth Brown- ing (‘The Naming of Wild Flowers’, pp. 123-4) — he favours, from a number of explanations, the resemblance of the jagged, backward-pointing lobes of the leaf to the fearsome, sharp-pointed and inward-curving canine teeth of the lion. The family of course is Compositae. Telopea. Gk telopos, seen from afar (tele, far, opsis, view, appearance)’ because these large proteaceous flowers are conspicuous from a distance. Vic- toria’s species, T. oreades, Gippsland Waratah, is not so spectacular a bloom as the N.S.W. Waratah; its specific epithet means ‘found in mountains’. Tetragonia. Gk tetra, four; gonia, angle, corner; alluding to the 4-angled fruit of some species. Victoria’s 2 species are *T. tetragonioides, New Zealand Spinach, native over a wide area of Australia especially near the sea, formerly known in this country as War- rigal Cabbage (warrigal being an aboriginal word meaning wild), and T. implexicoma, Bower Spinach. The July/August former was named Demidovia tetragonioides by Pallas in 1781, after Pavel Grigorievich Demidov (1738- 1821), traveller, patron of scientists, and founder of botanical garden in Moscow. Thought by Pallas to be ‘like Tetragonia’, it was placed in that genus, as T. expansa, by Murray two years later. The specific epithet of Bower Spinach means ‘with tangled hair’, probably from its scrambling habit of growth. The family is Aizoaceae (Ficoidaceae). Tetraria. Gk tetra, four; because some species have 4 style-branches. Our sole species, T. capillaris, Hair-sedge, is also known as Bristle Twig-rush (it was originally named Chaetospora capillaris by F. Mueller, which means fine-haired bristle-seed). It is in family Cyperaceae. Tetrarrhena. Gk tetra, four; arrhen, male; with reference to the male flowers. Victoria has 3 species, all native, known as different kinds of rice-grass, although one of them, 7. juncea, is also called Forest Wire-grass or Tangle Grass. (The root arrhen is also found in 2 other generic names of our flora, including *Arrhenatherum, False Oat- grass). Tetratheca. Gk tetra, four; theke, box; alluding to the 4-celled anthers. Our commonest species, T. ciliata, Pink Bells, was inadvertently omitted from ‘Flowers and Plants of Victoria’ (Cochrane, Fuhrer, Rotherham and Willis); it was called Pink-eye in Ewart, and the old English name of Black-eyed Susan has also, rather inappropriately, been applied to it. On a label in Maranoa Gardens (all-Australian flora) it is called Love of the Hills, Our 5 other species are known as different kinds of pink-bells. The genus is our sole representative of family Treman- draceae, the others being endemic to W.A. — the type genus Jremandra and Platytheca. Teucrium. Gk teukrion, name of the germander (10 species of which are native in Europe), probably given in 177 honour of Teucer, first king of Troy, who is said to have first used the plants in medicine. Our 3 species, all native, are known as Grey Germander, Forest Germander and Camel Bush. The word germander comes from a corruption of a Gk word meaning ground-oak. Family Labiatae. Thelymitra. Gk thelys, female, feminine; mitra, head-dress, turban, mitre; referring to the hood of the col- umn in several species. Victoria has 23 species, all known as kinds of sun- orchid, except T. antennifera, Rabbit- ears. Themeda. According to Forskal, who set up the genus in 1775, themed is the Arabic name of T. triandra, which is very close to our sole species, T. australis, Kangaroo Grass. This grass was placed in Anthistiria by R. Brown in 1810, and it was not until 1919 that Stapf transferred it to Themeda. J. M. Black places the accent on the first syllable, but most Victorians stress the second. Thesium. Gk theseion, name of the plant Theseus crowned Ariadne with. Gilbert-Carter says it was the name of a bulbous plant in Pliny. Our sole species, T. australe, Austral Toad-flax, is native, but there are 245 species in the world (family Santalaceae). Thismia. Of unknown origin. This genus of tropical saprophytes, of 25 species, is represented in our flora by one species, T. rodwayi, Fairy Lanterns, which is a rare and remarkable plant restricted to damp humus in shaded forest fern gullies, sometimes flowering underneath the lit- ter. There is a very interesting account of this species, as Sarcosiphon rodwayi, by Dorothy G. Coleman, in Victorian Nat. 52:163 (1936), telling of its discovery near the Derwent estuary and on Mt. Wellington by Tasmanian botanist L. Rodway, described by Baron von Mueller in 1890 as T. rodwayi, and its subsequent finding in Sherbrooke Forest. Named by William Griffith, who 178 had been superintendent of Calcutta Garden, and died at Malacca, Malaya, in 1845, Thismia may have been derived by him from a medieval Lat word thisma, a vein or gallery of a mine (from the hidden, ‘underground’ habitat); this word is listed in R. E. Latham’s ‘Revis- ed Medieval Latin Word-list’ (1965). Willis retains it in family Burman- niaceae, but mentions its being placed in a distinct family, Thismiaceae, by Hut- chinson. *Thlaspi. Gk thlaspi, a kind of cress, the ground seed of which was used like mustard (from thlao, to crush). Our in- troduced species is * T. arvense, Penny- cress, so-named from the flat round pods, as are certain other cruciferous plants (pennyroyal however has no reference to coins, being a corruption of a word meaning royal thyme). Thrixspermum. Gk thrix, hair; sper- ma, seed; descriptive of the hair-like seeds. Our species, 7. tridentatum, from 1838 to 1958 in Cleisostoma (— ‘closed mouth’), was transferred in 1967 by Dockrill to Plectorrhiza (— ‘twisted root’). The mouth of the inflated lip is narrowed by overgrowing callosities in Cleisostoma (see ‘Generic Names of Or- chids’, by R. E. Schultes and A. S. Pease). The common name, Tangle Or- chid, is from its habit of growth. Thryptomene. Gk thryptomene, diminished, made small (from thrypto, to break); alluding to the lowly stature of most of the species. Black, who gives this meaning, places the stress on the se- cond of 4 syllables, but as a common name most Victorians stress the first and pronounce the word in only 3 syllables, Grampians Thryptomene is also known as Bushy Heath-myrtle; our other species, Ribbed Thryptomene, is found in East Gippsland. The genus is myr- taceous. Thysanotus. Gk thysanotos, fringed (from thysanos, a fringe, tassel); alluding to the 3 inner perianth segments. Our most widespread species is T. tuberosus, Common Fringe-lily (a Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 better name than Fringed Violet, used in N.S.W.), and we have 4 other species, all known as kinds of fringe-lily. The genus is in family Liliaceae. Tillaea. Named by L. after Michelangelo Tilli (1655-1740), pro- fessor of botany at Pisa (Italy). Now synonymous with Crassula, all except one of our species of the latter having previously been in Tillaea. (Omitted from Part 1, so included here.) Tmesipteris. Gk tmesis, a cutting or dividing; pteris, fern; from the forking (only sometimes) of the rhachis, hence the name fork-ferns for our 3 species. The genus is in family Psilotaceae, the type genus, Psilotum, having its stems repeatedly forked, our species being P. nudum, Skeleton fork-fern. T. parva, Small Fork-fern, and T. ovata, Oval Fork-fern, were described by our late member of F.N.C.V., N. A. Wakefield, in 1944, Vict. Nat. 60: 143. *Tolpis. Name coined by French botanist Adanson when he established the genus in 1763. He gave no deriva- tion, but possibly based it on Gk tolype, a ball of wool; nevertheless he was prone to invent meaningless names. Our in- troduced species, *7. umbellata, is Yellow Hawkweed (family Com- positae). *Torilis. Another of Michel Adan- son’s coinages, this time probably based on the Linnaean genus Tordylium, which was from tordylion, the Gk name in Dioscorides of Tordylium apulum, Mediterranean Hartwort. Our species, *Torilis nodosa was transferred from Tordylium by Gaertner in 1788; its com- mon name is Knotted Parsley or Knot- ted Hedge-parsley. Both genera are still valid, in family Umbelliferae. (Black calls it Hedgehog Parsley.) Toxanthes. Gk toxon, a bow; anthos, flower; alluding to the bent corollas. (Toxophilite is an addict of archery.) We have 2 species, T. muelleri, Common Bow-flower, described as Antherocerastes (— horned anthers) by Sonder in honour of Baron von Mueller, July/August and T. perpusilla, Tiny Bow-flower, the specific epithet of which means very weak and slender. Fam. Compositae, Trachymene. Gk trachys, rough; mene, moon (according to Black) or meninx, membrane (Smith & Stearn); alluding to the appearance of the fruit. Victoria has 4 native species, and there is no common name other than the generic one, although T. anisocarpa is some- times called Wild Parsnip. Our 3 species of Platysace were formerly referred to Trachymene. These umbelliferous genera are close to each other. *Tragopogon. Gk name of goatsbeard, of this genus (tragos, goat; pogon, beard); alluding to the silky pap- pus. Our species is *T. porrifolius, Salsify or Oyster Plant, the specific epithet of which means leek-leaved. The swollen taproot is a useful vegetable known as white salsify (— saxifraga, break-stone). Another name for the plant is Purple Goatsbeard. Fam. Com- positae. Tragus. Gk tragos, a he-goat; alluding to the rigid hairs bordering the leaves and to the bristles on the spikelets. T. australianus is Small Bur-grass. Trema. Gk trema, a hole; the reason why Loureiro gave this name is obscure. T. aspera, Peach-leaf Poison-bush or Rough Hemp-nettle, is a very rare shrub in Victoria, found only once, at Mallacoota Inlet, but it extends north to Old. and the Kimberleys, W.A. The genus belongs to family Ulmaceae. Tribulus. Greco-Latin name of T. terrestris, Caltrops, from the resemblance of the spiny carpels to the tribulus or caltrop (calcar, spur; trappa, trap), a military iron ball with 4 sharp prongs used to impede cavalry. The above species is the only one in Vic., but S.A. has 5. It is also known as Goathead Burr, Bindii and Puncture Vine (N.S.W.). The genus is in family Zygophyllaceae, Lat tribulum, threshing sledge, from tribulo, press, oppress (cf. English tribulation). Trichinium. Gk trichinos, hairy (from 179 thrix, trichos, hair); alluding to the ap- pearance of the inflorescences. Robert Brown's genera Trichinium and Ptilotus (both 1810) were first united by Poiret under Ptilotus (1817) and then by Sprengel under Trichinium (1825). As the differences are minor, all our species, listed under Trichinium by Ewart, are now in Ptilotus. Trichomanes. Gk name of a fern men- tioned by Theophrastus (from trichos, genitive of thrix, hair; manes, a cup). Victorian ferns formerly in this genus are now in Asplenium, Macroglena, Mecodium, Hymenophyllum, Cheilanthes and Polyphlebium, of 3 dif- ferent families! Tricoryne. Gk treis, three; koryne, club; because the fruit is divided to base into 3 one-seeded nutlets. There are 7 species in this endemic Australian liliaceous genus, but Victoria has only one, T. elatior, Yellow Rush-lily or Yellow Autumn-lily, the specific epithet meaning higher or very tall. Tricostularia. Lat tres, three; costula, a little rib (costa, rib); referring to the 3- ribbed nut. Victoria has one of the 3 species of this endemic Australian cyperaceous genus, T. pauciflora, Needle Bog-rush. *Trifolium. Lat tres, tria, three; folium, leaf; because the leaves normal- ly have 3 leaflets (the rarity of the ‘4- leaved clover' making it a symbol of good luck, and of Ireland as the Shamrock). There are 300 species, but none native to Australia. Victoria has 20 naturalized species, known as different kinds of clover or trefoil, the latter being an English form of the generic name Shamrock is an anglicization of Irish seamrog, diminutive of seamar, trefoil; in Scotland clovers are called in Gaelic seamrag. Triglochin. Gk treis, three; glochin or glochis, barb of an arrow, a projecting point; alluding to the points of the 3 180 carpels. T. procera, Water Ribbons, is the only one of our 8 species not known as different kinds of arrowgrass; its specific epithet means tall, slender, long (Lat procer, an illustrious person), the long narrow leaves resembling ribbons in the water. The ch- should be sounded like k-, not as in church. The genus is in family Juncaginaceae. Trigonella. Diminutive of Greco-Lat trigonus, 3-cornered, triangular; because of the appearance of the corolla of T. foenum-graecum, Fenugreek, this common name being an anglicization of the specific epithet, which means ‘Greek hay’ — the plant is useful in veterinary treatments. Our introduced species is *T. ornithopodioides, Birdsfoot Fenugreek, and our native species, T. suavissima, Sweet Fenugreek or Menin- die Clover. It is a papilionaceous genus. Triodia. Gk treis, three; odous, tooth; because the flowering glume is divided into 3 obtuse or acute teeth or lobes. Victoria has T. irritans and T. scariosa, both known as Porcupine Grass and (in- correctly) Spinifex, the specific and ver- nacular names all referring to the sharp spiny leaves. The genus is in the Dan- thonieae tribe of family Gramineae. Tripogon. Gk treis, three; pogon, beard; the flowering glume is 3-nerved, the midnerve protruding as a short awn; the 2 rows of flowers are appressed and beardlike. Our species, T. Joliiformis, Rye Beetle-grass, was formerly in Diplachne; its specific epithet means with the form of Lolium, rye-grass. Triraphis. Gk treis, three; rhaphis, a needle; the flowering glumes are 3- awned. Our species, T. mollis, Needle Grass, is called Purple Heads in S.A. Trisetum. Lat tres, tria, three; seta, bristle; the flowering glume bears a dor- sal awn and in some species there is also a short awn on each of the two terminal teeth. Our species, T. spicatum and *T. pumilum, known as kinds of bristle- Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 grass, have been transferred to Lophochloa (— 'crested grass"). Tristania. Named by R. Brown after French botanist, the Marquis Jules M.C. de Tristan (1776-1861), who wrote a flora of the department of Loiret (in central France) and works on general plant anatomy. Victoria's sole species, T. laurina, found only in jungle pockets of East Gippsland, is known by the aboriginal name of Kanooka, and some- times as Water Gum, because of its preference for streamside habitats, such as in Glenaladale National Park near the Den of Nargun, where there are many gnarled veterans. The northern species, T. conferta, Queensland Brush Box, is familiar to Victorians as a favourite or- namental tree in streets, parks and schoolgrounds. (Omitted from Part 1, so included here.) The genus is myr- taceous. (The Maori word Kanuka, similar to Kanooka, is the common name of Leptospermum ericoides, cf. Manuka, L. scoparium. Maori words nevertheless are accented usually, as in both these cases, on the first syllable.) Trithuria. Gk treis, three; thyrion, a little door (from thyra, thura, door); (English door and German Tur are forms of the same word); alluding to the valves of the fruit. Our species, T. submersa, is still known in the ver- nacular by its former generic name, Juncella; it is in family Cen- trolepidaceae. *Triticum. The classical Lat name for wheat (perhaps from tritus, much trod- den, threshing of grain; Eng. trite is a form of the same word— well-worn). *T. aestivum, Common or Bread Wheat, the specific epithet of which means flowering in summer, has also been known as T. sativum and T. vulgare. The Eng. word wheat comes from the whiteness of the flour, as does German Weizen; French ble from Low Lat blatum, of unknown origin; but Spanish trigo, wheat, comes from Lat triticum. July/August *Tritonia. The author, John Gawler (who changed his name to Bellenden Ker two years later) named the genus in 1802, saying he derived the name from Triton, in the signification of a weather- cock, alluding to the variable directions of the stamens. Apparently there were weather-cocks in the form of this minor sea deity, who is depicted, in the train of the sea-god Poseidon (Neptune), as up- per half man and lower half fish, Our species, *7. lineata, is Pencilled Corn- flag or Lined Tritonia, and is in family Iridaceae. Trochocarpa. Gk trochos, wheel; kar- pos, fruit; the fruit being a berry con- taining 10 pyrenes. Our species, T. clarkei, Lilac Berry, was seen at its best by Native Plants Preservation Society and Botany Group F.N.C.V. on an ex- cursion to the Upper Thomson River, at 3000 feet, March 1975. It is endemic in Victoria between Lake Mountain, Mt. Buller and Mt. Wellington, but there are other species in Tas., W.A., etc. Family Epacridaceae. Trymalium. Gk trymalia, an aperture (tryma, hole); alluding to the 3 slits at the top of the fruit when it opens. Vic- toria has 2 species, T. d'altonii, Narrow- leaf Trymalium (named by Mueller after Stu Eloy DAXlton)s and E ramosissimum, Broad-leaf Trymalium. The genus is in family Rhamnaceae. Turritis. Lat turritus, furnished with towers (turris, tower); name given by L. in 1753, but our sole species is native. T. glabra, Tower Mustard or Smooth Rock-cress, is rare, being found only at Cobungra and Mitchell River sources. It is a cruciferous genus. Tylophora. Gk tylos, a knot, callus, a knob on a club; phoros, bearing. T. barbata, Bearded Tylophora, is found in East Gippsland, also in N.S.W. The genus is in family Asclepiadaceae. (To be Continued) 181 F.N.C.V. Annual Report 1979/80 This centenary year has been a historic one for the Club with a large number of members involved in the extra activities. The calendar year 1980 is being treated as the centenary year so there are still a number of events still to come. The principal event of the year, the Centenary Meeting was held at the State Film Centre on Monday May Sth in the presence of our Patron, the Governor of Victoria. Dr. J. H. Willis gave the Centenary Address and the evening was generally received as a fitting one to mark the achieving of 100 years of activity. Other centenary events so far held include a very successful picnic at Whittlesea the day before the meeting and major speakers at general meetings included Dr. B. R. Wilson, Director of the National Museum and Pro- fessor Hills from Melbourne University. Special thanks are due to the Centenary Committee and to the various special sub- committees planning the various events, Ma- jor events still to come this year include the Centenary Naturalist due out next month, the Nature Show in October and the Excursion to Wilson's Promontory in November and many others. Council has operated throughout the year without a Vice-President. Costs have again been Council's chief worry. A further grant towards the publication of the Naturalist was received from the State Government. General meetings have continued to attract good at- tendances with varied programmes. The special interest groups have again functioned well with well attended meetings and excur- sions, Active support for various conservation issues was again evident during the year with submissions sent to the Premier and various state and federal authorities. 1 represented the Club on a deputation to the Minister for Conservation for support for the work of Mr Cliff Beuglohole of Portland, The bookstall continued to prosper during the year, providing a valuable service to members and a good source of revenue for the Club. This is due to the efforts and en- thusiasm of Mr Dan McInnes. 182 Excursions remain a major activity of the Club with regular day excursions providing a wide range of experiences for members. Besides these our hard working Excursion Secretary, Miss Marie Allender organised longer excursions to Broken Hill (Aug.- Sept.), Flinders Island (Jan.) and Benalla for the F.N.C.A.V. meeting in March and the Strathbogie Ranges with the Hawthorn Juniors at Easter. A new type of excursion was instituted this year by our energetic Secretary, Miss Wendy Clark, the special study trip. These have proved most successful for the slightly more energetic, serious- minded members. The Victorian Naturalist continues its high standard under the editorship of Mr Rob Wallis. A liftout calendar of events for the Centenary Year was published in the January/February issue, thanks to the energy of Miss Madge Lester. At the beginning of the Club year the Subject Index was publish- ed. This was well received by a wide spectrum of users and rates as a major achievement for the Club. The library service to members continued to improve largely due to the energies of the Assistant Librarian, Miss Madge Lester. The Australian Natural History Medallion was presented to Miss Helen Aston of the National Herbarium by Professor Stubbs, President of the Royal Society of Victoria. Three people were appointed honorary members during the year — Professor J, Turner, Mr R. Lambrock and Mr N. Lothian. A new Subscription Secretary, Miss Helen Malcolm was appointed during the year. Finally I would like to thank Council and all members for their assistance during the year. In particular I would like to thank the retiring Treasurer, Mr Dan McInnes for his untiring work for the Club. His advice on Club matters in general as well as his sound financial guidance has been of incalculable value to the Club. Thank you Brian J. Smith President Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 (Continued from page 142) tend on Sunday only.can meet at the entrance to the Lumsden 669-9884 (BH); 376-8316 (AH). Bring all Park at 10,30 a.m. sharp. Details and application camping gear, food and water, hand lens, etc. ) ; y Sunday, 18 October. Effects of phytophthera forms are available at meetings or from Linday (cinnamon fungus), Brisbane Ranges. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any group meetings, no extra charge. At the National Herbarium. The Domain, South Yarra, at 8.00 p.m. First Tuesday — Mammal Survey Group Tuesday, 2 September. Mammals of remnant forest patches in south west Victoria. Speaker: Andrew Bennett. Tuesday, 7 October. Mammals of Wilsons Promontory. First Wednesday — Geology Group Wednesday, 3 September. Palaeontology. Speaker: M. Garrett. Third Wednesday — Microscopy Group Wednesday, 20 August. Botanical section cutting, staining and mounting. Wednesday, 17 September. Polarised light and the interference microscope. Wednesday, 15 October. Photography through the microscope. Second Thursday — Botany Group Thursday, 11 September. Border botany; exploring the more remote parts of Victoria. Speaker: Mr L. Costermans. Thursday, 9 October. No meeting — preparing for Centenary Nature Show. At the Conference Room, The Museum, Melbourne, at 8.00 p.m. Good parking — enter from Latrobe St. First Monday — Marine Biology and Entomology Group Monday, | September. Galls and gall insects. Speaker: Mr U. Bates. Monday, 6 October. Insect fruit pests. Speaker: Mr D. Harbeck. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. Botany Group — last Saturday Saturday, 30 August. Lysterfield area for wattles. Saturday, 27 September. Property of A. Parkin, Bruce's Creek, Whittlesea. Saturday, 25 October. Langwarrin and Cribb Point. Day Group — third Thursday. Thursday, 21 August. Cheltenham Park (Park Street). Meet in barbecue area, 11.30 a.m. Cars will meet the 10.43 a.m. Frankston train from Flinders St at Cheltenham station. Leader: A. Fairhall. Phone 578- 2009. Thursday 18 September. Wattle Park (Riversdale Rd). Meet at kiosk car park at 11.30 a.m. Wattle Park tram from Batman Avenue, city (10.24 or 10.36 a.m.) to stop 65. Leader: D. Bell. Phone 89-2850. Thursday, 16 October. Blackburn Lake and Sanctuary. Meet at Lake Rd entrance at 11.30 a.m. Cars will meet the 10.45 a.m. train from Flinders St at Blackburn station. Leader: D. Bell. Phone 89-2850. Mammal Survey Group Saturday, 13—Sunday, 14 September. Strathbogie Ranges camp. Geology Group Sunday, 14 September. Fossil fish in Gippsland. Leader: Pam Gawith. Sunday, 12 October. Cape Liptrap. «A Guide to the Genera of Beetles of South Australia’ Part 1 Archostemata and Adephaga E. G. Matthews Sth. Aust. Museum Publication. Key to the Genera 108 Plates Price $3.30 plus postage July/August 168 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable SIR HENRY WINNEKE, KCMG, KCVO, OBE, KStJ, QC. Key Office-Bearers 1979-1980 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Treasurer: Subscription Secretary: F.N.C.V. C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Editor: Mr. R. WALLIS, C/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544. Librarian: Mr. P. KELLY, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Assistant Librarian: Miss M. J. LESTER, 4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra, 3141 (26 1967) Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Archives Officer: Mr. B. CALLANAN, 29 Reynards Street, Coburg, 3058 (36 0587) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. MICHAEL McBAIN, 336 Inkerman Street, St Kilda, 3182 (534 3481) Day Group: C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Mammal Survey: Mr. RAY GIBSON, 26 McCulloch Street, Nunawading, 3131 (874 4408) Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (596 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. 1. F. MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 1194) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1980 Metropolitan.............. Joint Metropolitan ..... x Country Members and Retired Persons. Joint Country and Joint Retired TT v Tr b Ree nthe hr she mil vacate EESSNARA a A Junior..... : 121x212 eR alee ships deett pfs is ai Subscription to Victorian Naturalist................ bs ge PMR eh Eee ee Overseas bse Él to Victorian Naturalist...... hates ; pif rr Individual Journals . Josirihvitilv: VRAR PR o^ kao o4 45433 CURA 3e] roi Td oA VR RE VAR ERS TERRAS 2012125 All subscriptions should be made d to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to | to the Subscription Secretary. — G3) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE LUB OF VICTORIA I Society of Victoria STS C Vol. 97, No. 5 September/Octobel 1980 $175 FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, the Domain, South Yarra. Monday, 13 October 8.00 p.m. Wilsons Promontory evening hosted by the Study Groups. Monday, 10 November 8.00 p.m. Speaker will be the winner of the 1980 Natural History Medallion. Monday, 8 December 8.00 p.m. Programme hosted by the Hawthorn Junior FNC. New Members — September/October General Meetings. Ordinary Robin Bliss, 6/1030 Heatherton Rd., Noble Park. Richard Fullagar, 328 Danks St., Middle Park. John Pitcher, 2 Paisley St., Box Hill North. Neville Winstone, 9/18 Leopold St., South Yarra, Joint James and Christine Craik, 15 Higgs Ave., Mill Park. Animesh and Sumita Ray, 6/36 Albion Rd., South Yarra. Mr and Mrs T. F. W. Robbins, 1059 Doncaster Rd., Doncaster East. David Strom and Rhonda Kearley, 1279 Nepean Hwy., Mt Eliza. Country Lorraine Cotter, 40 Fyans St., Colac. David Eagleson, *‘Gillingall’’, Buchan. Patrick Ward, 22 Latrobe St., Newport. J. Wauchope, P.O. Box 5, Blinman, S.A. Gary White, P.O. Box N308, Grosvenor St., Sydney. FNCV EXCURSIONS Friday, 10 — Sunday, 12 October. Centenary Nature Show in the Lower Melbourne Town Hall. Saturday, 1 — Saturday, 8 November. Wilsons Promontory. Details in July/August Naturalist. Contact the Excursion Secretary if further informa- tion is required. Sunday, 7 December. Anglesea area. The coach will leave Batman Avenue at 9.30 a.m. Fare $6.50. Bring two meals. Preliminary notices: Saturday, 17 — Sunday, 25 January, 1981. Mt Kosciusko. The coach will leave Flinders St from the Gas and Fuel Corporation building at 8.15 a.m. for Orbost where the party will spend the first night. From Orbost we will travel to the Skyrider Motel in Wilsons Valley where we will stay for the next 6 nights. Saturday 24th January we travel to Corryong for the last night and return to Melbourne on Sunday 25th January. Accommodation is book- ed on a D.B.B. basis. The excursion, including coach fare, will be $250.00. A deposit of $20.00 should be paid on booking and the balance by the December General Meeting. Check if there are any vacancies before as these have so far been heavy. Picnic lunches will be required. June 1981. An Arnhemland-Kimberleys Safari run for naturalists by Kingston's Tours in cooperation with the Western Victoria Field Naturalists Clubs Association will leave Stawell on Saturday 6th June for a 23 day tour. Tents and food supplied. Further details may be obtained from the Excursion Secretary or Kingston's Tours, 23 Wimmera St., Stawell, with whom bookings should be made. Tariff $465, deposit $50 per person. A second safari will be made on September 19th for 15 days visiting the Lamington National Park and Warrumbungles, at a cost of $310. GROUP MEETINGS All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group meeting, no extra charge. There will be no Group meeting for the Marine Biology and Entomology, Mammal Survey and Geology Groups in November because of the Centenary Camp. At the National Harbarium, the Domain, South Yarra, at 8.00 p.m. First Tuesday — Mammal Survey Group. Tuesday, 2 December. Discussion and prepara- tion for the Christmas camp. Mr M. Fleming will speak on the fauna survey in Arnhemland. First Wednesday — Geology Group. Wednesday, 3 December. Members' night. Third Wednesday — Microscopy Group. Wednesday, 15 October. Photography through the microscope. Wednesday, 19 November. Movie photography through the microscope. No meeting in December. (Continued on page 226) The Victorian Naturalist Volume 97, Number 5 September/October 1980 Centenary Year 1880-1980 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: Robert L. Wallis Assistant editor: F. Dane Panetta Editorial committee: H. Cohn, R. Kent, B. Smith Ritual Combat in the Australian Copperhead, Austrelaps superbus (Serpentes, Elapidae) by Richard Shine and Sandy Allen......... 188 New Records of Scincid Lizards from Victoria by A. J. Coventry Add P UR ODERESG Tete NMC: HERO acts aches cia md ards a grim 190 Wilsons Promontory: An Introduction to Its Geology by Gary L. Waltin tte T ERR en eerie tas aera hog eb eni Miei «aire 194 Geographic Variation in The Common Wombat, Vombatus ursinus (Shaw, 1800) by.G. E. Young... eerte 200 A Technique for Live Trapping the Yellow-bellied Glider Petaurus australis; with Notes on The Biology of The Species by S. A. Craig Andi A iBelehap v RTL irl VERS one E GA 152 T 205 The Swamp Antechinus (Antechinus minimus maritimus) — Notes on a Captive Specimen by Robert Wallis and Gillian Baxter ...... 211 Erroneous or Doubtful Victorian Vascular Plant Grid Records by Ax (ab SYST CI Hd RO DES TETROREIUURACU CO QC OCDE OON GIU DUELO 213 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 14 by M.G. Corrick. 277 Broken Hill: F.N.C.V. 25/8/79 to 6/9/79 by E. and J. Lubcke, I. Petersen, P. Reeves and J. and P. Wall ...........seeeeeeeee 222 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora by J. A. IET usn Cock lc de loys. Coa Ain ELDER RAE EE SCORE 225 FNCV Annual General Meeting 1980... -ss seacesessasesenses 226 Cover illustration: Presumed male combat in the copperhead, Austrelaps superbus Ritual Combat in the Australian Copperhead, Austrelaps superbus (Serpentes, Elapidae) BY RICHARD SHINE“) AND SALLY ALLEN®) The copperhead (Austrelaps superbus) is a large (up to 1.5m) venomous terrestrial snake of south- eastern Australia. In this paper, we pro- vide the first record and photographs of presumed male combat in this species. The observations were made 6 km south of the town of Mortlake, Victoria (142? 50'E 38? 05'S). The exact date was not recorded, but the observations were made in September or October 1978. Several observers watched the snakes; we thank Mr J. R. Allen for the photographs and description. The snakes were first seen at about 1200 hrs, in a cleared pasture among tussock grass. The nearest permanent water was a man-made dam about 200m away. The snakes were entwined along the posterior parts of their bodies when initially sighted (Fig. 1). Both copperheads were large, about 1.5m in total length. They would lie quietly for a minute or two, and then move rapidly, writhing about and striking at each other. At these times, their heads would be raised up to 20cm off the ground. Although the snakes snapped at each other, no prolonged ‘‘chewing’’ bites were seen. Neither snake reacted to the approach of an observer within 3m. The posterior parts of the snakes remained (1) Zoology Building A08, University of Sydney, N.S.W. 2006 Australia (2) New South Wales State Fisheries, 211 Kent Street, Sydney, N.S.W. 2000 Australia 188 entwined during the entire period of observation ( > 30 minutes). The snakes finally separated and moved away when they were pelted with stones by a group of people. No other copperheads were sighted in the vicinity of the two entwined snakes. Although the snakes were not collected and sexed, we are confident that they were adult males in ritual combat. We base this interpretation on the body sizes of the snakes, as well as their behavior. Male copperheads grow to much larger body sizes than do females (Shine, 1978 a, b). The similarity in body sizes of the two "combatants"" indicates that they were both of the same sex, and their large size suggests that both were males. Further, the postures adopted by the two snakes (Fig. 1) were similar to those seen in ritual combat between adult males of other elapid and colubrid species (e.g. Bogert and Roth 1966). The behavior of mating snakes is very different; both partners are passive during copulation, and their bodies are not entwined (e.g. Bogert and Roth 1966). One unusual feature of A. superbus combat is the tendency for only the posterior parts of the bodies to be entwined; the heads of the snakes may be quite distant from each other (Fig. 1). This phenomenon has been reported previously in only one species, the Madagascan boa Sanzinia madagascariensis (Carpenter et al., 1978). Entwining of only the posterior part of the body has been interpreted as an adaptation to arboreal combat in Sanzinia (Carpenter et a/., 1978), but the same hypothesis certainly cannot explain this behavior in Austrelaps. The copperhead is completely terrestrial. Little information is available on reproduction in Victorian copperheads. Shine (1977 a, b) has described reproductive cycles in northern A. superbus, but Rawlinson (1974) suggested that this **highlands" form is a different species from the ‘‘lowlands”’ Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 n r eus ad Lap A Fig. 1. Presumed male combat in the copperhead, Austrelaps superbus. Victorian copperhead. The timing of the present record of male combat (September - October, the Australian spring) is consistent with the autumn and spring mating season of the *highlands'' copperhead (Shine, 1977a). Male combat in snakes occurs most often during the mating season (Bogert and Roth 1966). Ritual combat between males has now been documented in Australian snakes of the boid genera Liasis (Ross, 1978) and Morelia (Covacevich, 1975), and the elapid genera Austrelaps (present study), Cryptophis (N. Charles, pers. comm.), Demansia (Shine, unpublished September/October data), Hemiaspis (A. Easton, pers. comm.), Notechis (Shine 1977a), Oxyuranus (Hosmer, 1953, Worrell, 1963), Pseudechis (Fleay, 1937, 1951; Baker, 1968; Shine, 1977a, Shine et al., unpublished data) and Pseudonaja (Fleay, 1937). Combat is more common, or at least more often noticed, in some species than in others. Combat bouts have been recorded more often in the common black snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus) than in other Australian elapids. For example, Fleay (1951) described black snake combat while noting that he had never seen male combat in either tiger snakes (Notechis 189 scutatus) or copperheads, two species with which he had great experience. Similarly, Shine (1977a) noted three cases of combat in New England black snakes, but none in tiger snakes or copperheads in the same area. Subsequent records of male combat in both Notechis and Austrelaps (Shine, 1977a; present paper) show that combat does occur in these species but is less common or less noticeable than in Pseudechis porphyriacus. Cases such as these suggest that male combat behavior may be much more widespread among the Australian snake fauna than is currently realized. REFERENCES Baker, A.B. 1968. Snakes in combat, Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. New South Wales 1966-67; 29-31. Bogert, C.M. and V.D. Roth. 1966. Ritualistic combat of male gopher snakes, Pituophis melanoleucus affinis (Reptilia, Colubridae). Ann. Mus. Novit. 2245; 1-27, Carpenter, C.C., J.B. Murphy and L.A, Mitchell. 1978. Combat bouts with spur use in the Madagascan boa (Sanzinia madagascariensis). Herpetologica 34: 207-212. Covacevich, J. 1975, Snakes in combat. Victorian Nat. 92: 252-253. Fleay, D, 1937. Black snakes in combat. Proc. Roy. Zool. Soc. New South Wales 1937: 40-42, Fleay, D. 1951. Savage battles between snakes. Walkabout 17: 10-13, Hosmer, W. 1953. An account of supposed mating of the taipan, Oxyuranus scutellatus. North Queensland Nat. 22: 1-3. Rawlinson, P.A. 1974. Biogeography and ecology of the reptiles of Tasmania and the Bass Strait area, pp. 291-338. /n W.D. Williams (ed.) Biogeography and Ecology in Tasmania. W. Junk, The Hague. Ross, R. 1978. The python breeding manual. Institute for Herpetological Research. 51pp. Shine, R. 1977a. Reproduction in Australian elapid snakes, I. Testicular cycles and mating seasons. Aust. J. Zool. 25: 647-653, Shine, R. 1977b. Reproduction in Australian elapid snakes. II. Female reproductive cycles. Aust. J. Zool. 25: 655-666. Shine, R, 1978a. Growth rates and sexual maturation in six species of Australian elapid snakes. Herpetologica 34: 73-79. Shine, R. 1978b, Sexual size dimorphism and male combat in snakes. Oecologia 33: 269-278, Worrell, E. 1963. Reptiles of Australia. Angus and Robertson, Sydney, 207pp. New Records of Scincid Lizards from Victoria By A. J. COVENTRY! AND P. ROBERTSON? Rawlinson (1971) listed the species of reptiles then known to occur in Victoria. Coventry (1976) described a new species of skink, Hemiergis millewae, from the far north west of the state. This article records the presence of two more species of skink in Victoria. 1. Sphenomorphus kosciuskoi Kinghorn, 1932. Alpine Water Skink. (Fig. 1). Description: A medium-sized lizard with a max- imum snout-vent length of 80 mm (Cog- ger, 1979). Ground colour of back dark brown, with a prominent black vertebral stripe from the nape extending on to the tail. A pale dorsolateral stripe, edged above and below by black, from above ‘Officer in Charge, Herpetology, National Museum of Victoria. ‘Zoology Department, University of Melbourne 190 and behind the ear to the groin. Flanks lighter, speckled with black; belly light with dark flecks. Sympatric species with which it is most likely to be confused are Sphenomorphus tympanum and Leiolopisma entrecasteauxii. It can be distinguished from the former by the presence of the dark vertebral stripe and from the latter by its scaly lower eyelid. S. tympanum lacks the vertebral stripe and L. entrecasteauxii has a transparent window in the lower eyelid. Distribution: Cogger (1979), shows that the Alpine Water Skink occurs in a number of isolated populations, extending from the “Mt. Kosciusko region of the Australian Alps to northern tablelands of New South Wales", The first Victorian specimens were collected from several localities on the Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 1 Sphenomorphus kosciuskoi, Davies Plain Creek. Davies Plains in north-eastern Victoria, during field research being undertaken by the National Museum of Victoria for the Land Conservation Council of Vic- toria (L.C.C.) in January 1975. These localities were Charlie Creek, 36° 46' S: 148° 05' E., (N.M.V. No. D42060), Davies Plain Creek, 36° 38' S: 148° 07’ E., (N.M.V. No. D42073), and King Plain 36? 40' S: 148? 06' E., (N.M.V. No. D42203). In November 1976 an ad- ditional specimen was collected from The Playgrounds in the Cobberas, 36? 497) Se 148* 07" JB. (NND V- NG. D48557). All these localities are within a predictable extension of the southern range of this species. However, it is sur- prising that, despite fairly extensive searching, S. kosciuskoi has not yet been found at other likely Victorian localities, such as Mt. Bogong or Mt. Hotham. Habitat: (Fig. 2). S. kosciuskoi is restricted to alpine areas; all the Victorian localities are above 1400 metres within the cold temperate Bassian region, as defined by Rawlinson (1971). It is very specialized in its habitat requirements, being restricted to the sphagnum mossbed- heath association found along drainage lines and similar wet areas. Of utmost importance for the conser- vation of S. kosciuskoi is the preserva- tion of its delicate and specialized alpine habitat. The L.C.C. in its final recom- September/October Fig. 2 Habitat of Sphenomorphus kosciuskoi at Davies Plain Creek. mendations for the alpine area (1979) in- cluded all the known Victorian localities for this species within the proposed Cobberas-Tingaringy National Park. While this would appear to give S. kosciuskoi some form of protection, the L.C.C. also recommended that grazing be permitted within this proposed park (p.13). The same recommendations on page 72 stated: ‘‘The drainage lines that once contained moss beds are often used by cattle in search of water and palatable herbaceous vegetation. This results in trampling of these easily damaged wet areas which impedes their recovery or even causes renewed deterioration." It would appear, therefore, that if grazing is permitted within the proposed Cobberas- Tingaringy National Park, the preferred habitat of S. kosciuskoi will be at risk, and the continued survival of this species in Victoria will be in doubt. 2. Egernia multiscutata Mitchell & Behrndt, 1949. (Fig. 3). Description: A medium sized skink with a max- imum snout-vent length of 94 mm (Storr 1968). Dorsal ground colour light brown to fawn. A dark paravertebral stripe, on each side of the body, each stripe enclos- ing a series of longitudinal lighter spots, commencing at the nape and extending to the base of the tail. Flanks lighter brown to grey, usually with light flecks. 191 Belly immaculate, cream to light grey, often tinged with salmon in adults. Juveniles generally much darker, with more distinct patterning. This species is a member of the Egernia whitii group of skinks (Storr 1968). Two other members of this group also occur in Victoria, E. whitii and Egernia inornata, both of which could be confused with E. multiscutata. E. whitii has the interparietal scale much narrower than the frontal and the sub- digital lamellae have one sharp keel (unicarinate), whereas in E. multiscutata the interparietal is almost as wide as the frontal and the subdigital lamallae have two sharp keels (bicarinate). E. inornata lacks the paravertebral lines, the dorsal surface usually being speckled with black. Fig. 3. Egernia multiscutata 11 km N.W. of Chinaman Flat. Bg Egerma whitu ZA E. inornata 2 £ .multiscutata Fig. 4 Map showing Victorian distribution of the Egernia whitii group of skinks. 192 Distribution: Cogger (1979) shows the distribution of E. multiscutata as ‘‘Kangaroo Island and Eyre and Yorke Peninsulas of South Australia to the coastal regions of southern Western Australia, including many offshore islands." Storr (1968) listed the distribution, under E. multiscutata bos, as ‘‘subhumid semiarid sandplains and coastal dunes of south-western and southern Australia . . . South Australia: west coast of Eyre Peninsula, St. Francis Island, Thistle Island, Yorke Peninsula and Kangaroo Island”. During field research being conducted in north western Victoria in March 1980, the first Victorian specimens of E. multiscutata were collected by the authors from two large sand dunes in the Big Desert. These dunes were ap- proximately 11 km. N.W, of Chinaman Well, 35° 51’ S:141° 33’ E. (N.M.V. Nos. D54086, D54107). In April 1980, a further specimen was collected 3 km. E. of Moonlight Tank in the Big Desert, 35° 46’ S:141° 25’ E. (N.M.V. No. D54425). These sites represent a con- siderable eastern extension of the recorded range of this species. The Vic- torian distributions of the E. whitii group are essentially non-overlapping (Fig. 4) Habitat: (Fig. 5). In Victoria E. multiscutata occurs on large sand dunes in desert heathland, dominated by Banksia or- nata, Leptospermum myrsinoides and Callitris verrucosa, with very little ground cover. This species appears to live in small discrete colonies on the largest dunes, where individuals ex- cavate extensive burrow systems (war- rens) on the northerly slopes close to the summits. It was first located in Victoria by the presence of these warrens, which appear similar to those of E. inornata observed further north in the Sunset Country. Each E. multiscutata warren may have several entrances, cover an Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 M dv utei Fig. 5 Habitat of Egernia multiscutata 11 km N.W. of Chinaman Flat, area of two square metres, and be up to 60 centimetres deep. The lizards are communal, several often sharing a war- ren, with each animal possibly utilizing more than one warren, The size of the colonies, as estimated by the number of warrens, appeared to vary. The first two, situated only a few hundred metres apart, were well established, with numerous warrens, while very few were located at the third colony. Although a number of similar dunes in the area between Chinaman Flat and Moonlight Tank were examin- ed, no further evidence of this species was found. However, aerial photographs show that there are numerous large dunes with similar vegetation throughout the Big Desert. Some of these may support colonies of E. multiscutata. The three known colonies are within a large area of ''uncommitted land’’ available, among other things, for ‘‘ex- tensive military training purposes’’ (L.C.C. 1977). The use of large tracked vehicles could place these populations at risk. To the east of this area is Wyper- field National Park, and to the west a large wilderness area (L.C.C. 1977). Beauglehole (1979) states that a corridor for movement between these two reserves should be considered when fur- ther reserves are planned within the un- committed land. He also states that ‘‘the Chinaman Flat area provides a com- September/October bination of ecosystems worthy of preser- vation’’. We concur, and suggest that any future reserves planned for the Big Desert should include the Chinaman Flat-Moonlight Tank area, encompass ing the known Æ. multiscutata colonies, Acknowledgements: Thanks are due to the following people who assisted us in various ways: J. M. Dixon; P. Lawson; A. A. Martin; P. Mather; K. C. Norris and P. A, Rawlinson. REFERENCES: Beauglehole, A. G,, 1979, The Distribution and Conservation of Native. Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee, Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association: Portland Cogger, H. G., 1979, Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia, revised ed, A. H. & A, W., Reed Pty Ltd., Sydney Coventry, A. J., 1976, A new species of Hemiergis (Scincidae: Lygosominae) from Victorina, Mem, natn, Mus, Vict. 37; 23-26 Land Conservation Council, Victoria, 1977. Pinal Recommendations Mallee Study Area, Victorian Govt, Printer, Melbourne. Land Conservation Council, Victoria, 1979. Final Recommendations Alpine Area, Victorian Govt, Printer, Melbourne. Rawlinson, P. A. 1971. In “Amphibians and Rep tiles of Victoria", Victorian Year Book No, 85:1 36, Victorian Govt, Printer, Melbourne, Storr, G. M., 1968, Revision of the Egernia whitei species-group (Lacertilia, Scincidae). J, R, Soe West, Aust, 51(2): 51-62. 193 Wilsons Promontory: An Introduction To Its Geology BY GARY L. WALLIS Five years after the discovery and naming of Wilsons Promontory by George Bass, the French explorers Peron and Buadin, in 1803, described the Promontory thus: . . the coast is very high and is composed of two or three tiers of mountain ranges lying one behind the other. The aspect of the country is agreeable only at a distance. That which terminates at the borders of the sea is composed only of enormous masses of mud and sterile rocks, piled one upon the other.” No landing was made by the French explorers or they may have recognised the land as light coloured granite commonly covered with tall vegetation (much of which has since been destroyed by fires, as seen by the skeletal remnants along the mountain ranges.) Wilsons Promontory, forming the southern-most part of the Australian mainland, is well known to naturalists for its diverse scenery and contrasting ecosystems. These contrasts are controlled by geological factors. Broadly, the Promontory consists of a central granite mountain chain which rises over 750 m above sea level and plunges into deep fern gullies whose shapes are largely determined by structures within the granites. The rugged coastline of the Promontory is broken by the development of broad sandy beaches which only occur where protective granite spurs protrude into the sea. Sand dunes behind the beaches have delayed stream entry to the sea and extensive river flats and swamps occur. Over a dozen granite islands occurring off-shore are the result of coastal submergence. Geological investigations have been surprisingly rare considering the popularity of the area for scientific research in other disciplines. This may * Earth Science Dept., Monash University, Clayton, 3168 194 be partly due to the earlier belief that granite masses were largely homogeneous, rather than composite, and therefore of little interest. It was only recently that some of the intrusive features and two of the major granite types were recognised (Worboys, 1973). Only two major geological studies have been undertaken on this National Park, “The Geology of the Wilsons Promontory Batholith’? (Wallis, 1980) and ‘‘The Coastal Geomorphology of Wilsons Promontory’ (Tuddenham, 1970). The geology consists of early Devonian (dated on K/Ar at 392 million years) granitic bedrock (the Wilsons Promontory Batholith) with flanking of Quaternary sediments. Wilsons Promontory Batholith The granites of Wilsons Promontory are the northern end of a granite belt which is almost 500 km long and about 50 km wide. The belt extends into north- eastern Tasmania as well as along its east coast. North of Wilsons Promontory the main granite mass terminates against Ordovician sediments at Red Bluff, near Yanakie, however granite dykes which may be related intrude Ordovician sediments further north. Near the centre of the present township of Foster a thick north-south trending granite dyke was the site of a goldrush in 1870. Mining of quartz veins associated with this dyke yielded several thousand ounces of gold. The granitic mass can be described generally as grey, coarse-grained, biotite granite. Within this mass over ten major varieties of granite, with distinctive textures and mineralogical differences, can be mapped on the Promontory and its surrounding islands. The different granites are sheet structures of 10 m to over 100 m thick, They commonly have shallow easterly dips and outcrop largely as parallel zones. Although varying in Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 relative amounts between these different granites, four essential minerals are always present. 1. Biotite or black mica occurs as thin flakes. 2. Quartz is often coarse (over 1 cm) and rounded in section. This unusual shape of quartz (bipyramidal B habit) is due to its high temperature crystallization in the cooling granite. White feldspar is of two main types, ie: 3. Plagioclase (Andesine-Oligoclase) and 4. Orthoclase which often forms giant rectangular shaped crystals about 5cm long. Important accessory minerals occurring in the granites are pink Garnet, blue-grey Cordierite, and black Tourmaline. The cordierite has often been altered to a green mica. Tourmaline is a mineral which occurs in a number of forms within the granites, particularly the light coloured granites. All through the Promontory thin black tourmaline veins, usually with several sub-parallel to each other, can be seen cutting the granite (e.g. north end of Norman Beach). Tourmaline also occurs as nodules, as crystals in cavities, and as replacement of earlier feldspars in granites and aplites. In rare dykes of pegmatite it has been found as crystals up to half a metre in length. Associated with tourmaline in the north-eastern portion of Wilsons Promontory tin mineralization occurs in the form of cassiterite, an oxide of tin, which is its main ore. Between 1920 and 1936 about 200 kg of cassiterite was mined from hillside gravels on the Mt. Hunter-Singapore saddle area. More recently, in 1967, extensions of these tin deposits were prospected for in Corner Inlet, where a drill hole near Bennison Island penetrated over 100 m of marine sands and clays without encountering the expected granite gravels. A different company applied for a drill licence to test for tin in the inlet early this year. September/ October The minerals in the granite are the result of crystals growing in a liquid rock as it began to cool deep within the earth (several kilometres below the surface and at about 800° Celsius). As it slowly moved up towards the surface it cooled completely and became solid rock. Many clearly observable features at Wilsons Promontory show how later granites have forced their way through earlier rocks as a crystal mush, to form this huge granite complex. Such features are particularly well exposed at the southern end of Norman Beach and on Norman Pt., but are wide spread along the west coast. Xenoliths or ‘‘foreign stones'' are the common dark rounded patches within the grey granite. The xenoliths are an integral part of this batholith and highlight its flow, as do the large white orthoclase crystals. Recent research has shown that some of these xenoliths may originate with the granite liquid at a zone of melting deep within the earth’s crust. The Wilsons Promontory granites result from the partial melting of sedimentary rocks. Locally, xenoliths have been concentrated into a rock looking somewhat like plum-pudding. Within the coarse granites finer grained microgranites and aplites occur as gradational layers and thick dykes. These finer grained rocks are more common to the east. At South-East Pt., below the Lighthouse, is a flat-lying dyke of fine-grained grey granite from which the Lighthouse was built in 1859. HE Fig. 1 Xenolith granite has intruded and surrounded a block of pale granite, thus proving the pale granite's earlier age (Oberon Bay). 195 Fig. 2 “Plum pudding" rock A concentration of xenoliths near a contact with pale granite (Oberon Bay). During, and subsequent to, their cooling the Wilsons Promontory granites were subjected to regional stress which resulted in fracturing and rock movement. Faults produced by these movements are mostly vertical. The present shape of the Promontory is a consequence of these lines of faulting as well as the smaller scale cooling joints in the granites. Erosion along fault lines controls many valleys such as Lilly Pilly Gully and the upper reaches of Tidal River. Norman Island is almost divided in two by erosion of a 200 m wide zone of east-west faulting. The promontory granites have been exposed as a result of the removal of thousands of metres of overburden. Today the eroded granite is often seen as large rounded boulders called tors. Their origin is due to the regular joint pattern. The joints tend to be at right angles to each other producing large approximately square blocks of granite. Water seeping along these joints decomposes the granite to clays and gravel. Tors are the rounded core stones left after weathering of these joint blocks. Tors dot the hillsides, particularly along the Boulder Range and many majestic examples can be seen near the saddle on the Waterloo Bay track. Wind erosion has further sculptured the tors. Marine erosion has carved sea caves into the jointed granite. Such caves occur on both the east and west sides of the Promontory and its offshore islands. 196 On Great Glennie Island a 25 m deep cave occurs even behind the beach in the sheltered cove. On the same island, a large gully on the north-eastern side results from collapse of the weathered roof of a sea cave. Cleft Island (‘Skull Rock") has a spectacular example of cave development. The top cave is over 20 m above sea level with a 60 m high roof. Its origin most likely relates to higher sea levels of the past. Fig. 3 A whorl of xenoliths, garnet and feldspars formed by flow in the intruding granite magma. Fig. 4 Weathered granite wall of a collapsed sea cave (Great Glennie Island) Quaternary Sediments Overlying the granites are four main phases of sand dune formation, peat deposits, and recent beach sands. All have been controlled by major sea level changes during the Pleistocene Ice Age. Wilsons Promontory forms an important dividing line between two main sand types in southern Australia. The west-east contrast is between yellow Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 e / DOUGH BOY T SINGAPORE IS A / RED BLUF F pm È ae, CORNER AE INLET See o ——— BENNISON Cm (EE IS | Sa wc ol Œ = SE xi SINGAPORE lig ZONE al = ~ E SEALERS COVE E | NORMAN —TIDAL w IS E: NORMAN PT e WATERLOO Sol Y GLENNIE SEALERS GROUP ZONE e N Qo CENTRAL X ZONE WEST COAST o INTRUSIVE ZONE S ISLAND GLENNIE ZONE ZONE BASS STRAIT [9] 5 10 Km [IU lQU Lt cs es | WILSONS PROMONTORY BATHOLITH September/October 197 lime-rich (over 30% carbonate) sands to the west and white silica-rich (less than 5% carbonate) sands to the east as illustrated by the beaches of Oberon and Waterloo Bays. Studies have shown that during an earlier interglacial (100,000 years ago) when Wilsons Promontory was an island, the white silica sands drifted across what is now Corner Inlet and the Yanakie Isthmus and down the west coast. These sands are usually inland of the present yellow beach and dune sands, such as occur at Norman Bay. Squeaky Beach is a notable exception as here the foredune backing the beach is white silica sand of well-rounded and even sized grains. The beach originates from erosion of the dune, but at the water's edge an inter-fingering of recent yellow sands coming from offshore can be seen. If the dry silica sands are walked on, they will ‘‘squeak’’, as the grains rub together. Calcarenites, wind blown dune sands that are cemented by lime dissolved from shell fragments, form vertical cliffs at Darby Bay. Remains of wood taken from a fossil soil horizon in the calcarenites have been dated at greater than 40,000 vears. Off-shore at Darby Bay these rocks extend to Shellback Island, and down to depths of at least 20m below sea level, where a submerged cliffline records a marine stillstand. This evidence of lower sea levels coincides with data elsewhere in the Bass Strait region which suggests sea levels dropped between 85 m and 100 m during the last glacial maximum, At that time Wilsons Promontory was a part of the landbridge with Tasmania. The earlier silica sand movement from the east was halted against the east side of the promontory and lime-rich sand began accumulating against the west side. Prevailing westerly winds moved the lime-rich sand inland and formed a number of parabolic dunes, some of which reached thicknesses of 100 m. Calcarenite remnants of these dunes 198 occur elsewhere along the west coast and on the Glennie and Anser Island Groups. The calcarenites are presently quarried in the National Park for local use as fertiliser lime. In the Darby River area peats have accumulated in fresh water swamps between calcarenite dunes. Some peat layers are up to 1m thick. A radio- carbon date of 5,880 years was obtained for the bottom of one layer. Recent sand deposition has built the present beaches and coastal dunes since sea levels rose to about their present height 7000 years ago. Buried shell beds and Aboriginal midden deposits are common in sand dunes all around the Promontory. The oldest of these are dated at 6,550 years and can be seen along the west coast between Yanakie and Darby River. Alluvial and swamp deposits consisting mainly of detritus derived from the weathering of the granite extends to the coast from the foot of the granite mountains and hills. Large low- lying areas of poorly drained country occur, for example, to the north of the Vereker Range where the land drains to Corner Inlet. Coastal dunes bank-up swamp deposits behind most beaches and cause rivers to flow parallel to the coast for some distance before entering the sea. The swamp and river behind Sealer's Cove is a fine example of this. An extensive swamp has formed behind the Five Mile Beach. Similar features occur at Three Mile Beach, Darby Fig. 5 Gradational contact between coarse and fine grained granites (Sealers Cove). Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Beach, Norman Bay, Oberon Bay and Waterloo Bay. Bass Strait was created in its present form when the land link with Tasmania was severed as a result of sea level rises due to the decline of the last worldwide glaciation. The coastline of Wilsons Promontory shows the results of coastal submergence with many off-shore islands, active erosion of granite and calcarenite cliffs, and sand accumulation in the more sheltered bays. REFERENCES BEASLEY, A.W, (1972) “Sands from the Squeaky Beach Area, Wilsons Promontory, Vietoria, Australia." Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria, No. 33, COUPER, J.K. (1968) ‘Australian Placer N.L., Corner Inlet Alluvial Tin Prospect, Final Report." Unpublished, R, Hare and Associates Pty, Ltd, JENKIN, Jot, (1968) “The Geomorphology and Upper Cainozoie Geology of South Bast Gipp sland, Victoria’: Geol Survey of Victoria, Memoir 27 JENNINGS, J.N. (1959) “The submarine topography of Bass Strait’, Victoria: 71 LENNON, J. (1974) “Wilsons Promontory in Vie toria, its commercial utilization in the 19th cen Proc, Royal Soc tury.“ The Victorian. Historical Magazine, 45 (4). TUDDENHAM, W.G. (1970) “The Coastal Geomorphology of Wilsons Promontory, Vic toria: implications concerning Quaternary sedimentation around the shores of Bass Strait.’ Unpublished M.Sc, thesis, Sydney Uni WALLIS, G.L, (1976) “The Strueture and Petrography of Wilsons Promontory National Park." Unpublished | M.Sc Prelim thesis, Monash University, WALLIS, G.L. (1979) “Map and Walking Guide, Wilsons Promontory National Park," Second Edition WALLIS, G.I (1980) “The Geology of the Wilsons Promontory Batholith, Victoria: a study of the composition, emplacement, and structure of an S-type granitoid. M.Se, thesis, Earth Science Dept, Monash University (in prep) WORBOYS, O. (1973) “Some geological observa tions on the granite at five localities on Wilsons Promontory’, Unpublished, National Park Ser vice Library, Australian Natural History Medallionist for 1980: Michael J. Tyler Michael Tyler lives with his wife and three children at Belair in the Adelaide hills. He is a Senior Lecturer in the September/October Department of Zoology, The University of Adelaide. He has conducted research on the taxonomy and biology of frogs for 20 years, working principally on the fauna of northern Australia and New Guinea, but also Burma, France, the West Indies and North and South America. He is the author of 110 scien- tific papers, popular articles, monographs and books, and has edited three books on natural history and en- dangered Australasian wildlife. He is the Editor of the Royal Society of South Australia, a founder member and former President of the Australian Society of Herpetologists, and Chair- man of a Junior Field Naturalists Club. For the past four years he has led ex- peditions to the northwest of Western Australia resulting in the discovery of numerous new species of animals. 199 Geographic Variation in the Common Wombat, Vombatus ursinus (Shaw, 1800) G.E. YOUNG Introduction The common or forest wombat, Vombatus ursinus (Shaw, 1800), is a large fossorial marsupial found in the south-east of mainland Australia, on Flinders Island in Bass Strait and in Tasmania (Mcllroy, 1973). Some of the smaller islands in Bass Strait were previously inhabited by wombats, but European settlement in the late 18th and early 19th centuries may have con- tributed to their extinction. Many naturalists have in the past classified the Bass Strait and Tasmanian forms of wombat as separate species (Spencer and Kershaw, 1910; Troughton, 1967). However, recent examination of some morphological characteristics indicates that there is a simple gradation of struc- tural differences between the mainland and insular forms of wombats. These morphological characteristics can be correlated with the log of the areas of the mainland and islands inhabited by wombats. Materials and Methods Only adult wombat data have been used during this study, and because I found no significant difference between male and female body lengths or body weights I have combined the data. Mellroy (pers. comm.) and Crowcroft (1967), similarly, reported no sexual dimorphism in either the common wom- bat or the hairy-nosed wombat, Lasiorhinus latifrons (Owen, 1845). Body measurements Weights and lengths of mainland (N.S.W.) wombats were obtained from live specimens trapped at Bondo, near Tumut, N.S.W. Tasmanian data were obtained from the South Australian Museum, S.A. and the Australian * Division of Wildlife Research, CSIRO, P.O. Box 84, Lyneham, A.C.T. 2602 200 National Wildlife Collection held at the Division of Wildlife Research, CSIRO in Canberra, A.C.T. Flinders Island wombat body lengths were obtained from the National Museum of Victoria, Victoria. Body weights were measured to the nearest gram. Body lengths were measured to the nearest millimeter with a flexible steel tape measure. Lengths were measured from the tip of the rhinarium along the curvature of the dorsal surface to the base of the tail. Skull measurements Cranial measurements of mainland (N,S.W.) wombats are from skulls found near Canberra. Tasmanian wom- bat skull data were obtained from Spencer and Kershaw (1910) and from the Australian National Wildlife Collec- tion held at the Division of Wildlife Research, CSIRO. Flinders Island skull data were obtained from the National Museum of Victoria. Deal Island and King Island skull data were from Spencer and Kershaw (1910) and the National Museum of Victoria. The maximum skull lengths were measured to the nearest millimeter from the basioccipital to the palate, posterior to the incisors, using a vernier caliper. Maximum widths were measured to the nearest millimeter with a vernier caliper across the widest section of the zygomatic arches. Results Body measurements of wombats from different geographic locations are sum- marised in Table 1. I could find no data for body weights of the Flinders Island form or any body measurements for the now extinct wombats from Deal Island and King Island. The mean body lengths of mainland (N.S.W.), Tasmania and Flinders Island Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Table 1. Table 1. Body measurements (Vombatus ursinus) from different geographic locations. Location n Mainland (N.S.W.) 20 Tasmania 11 Funde Aslana í forms show a significant correlation (4 = 0.89; P < 0.01) with the log of the area of the island on which they inhabit (Fig.1). Mean skull measurements of Vombatus ursinus from four geographic locations are presented in Table 2. The Body weight (mean — S.E.) Body length (mean * S.E.) (kg) (c.m.) 26.22 + 0.45 98.5 +0.84 20.60 + 0.76 84.78 + 1.34 ar 69.54 + 4.32 mean skull length and mean skull width are significantly correlated with the log of island area (length, r = 0.97; P< 0.05; width, r= 0.97; P < 0.05) (Fig. 2). There is also a significant linear rela- tionship between skull lengths and skull widths of wombats from each locality (r=0.95; P < 0.001) (Fig.3). O0 i MAINLAND 2^ (V. ursinus) ad Rd «4 90 ES pr^ t TASMANIA KE 9 (V ursinus) $^ £ ^ 9 e 9 80 x $ ^ & pos S P^ 70 bFLINDERS ISLAND x (V, ursinus) 60 E 3 4 5 6 7 Log of island area (sq km) Fig. 1. Relationship between mean body length ( ' S.E.) and log of the mainland and island areas. September/October 201 Table 2. Skull measurements ( Vombatus ursinus) from different geographic locations. Location Maximum length Maximum width Ratio n (Mean Ż S.E.) | (Mean S.E.) (w/l) (c.m.) _(c.m.) Mainland (N.S.W.) 10 vey EET T3: TESTO 0.86 Tasmania 15 14:55 270818 12. 25/021 0.84 Flinders Island 29 13.07 + 0.08 11.17 + 0.09 0.85 Deal & King Islands i 4 12.46 + 0.41 10.44 + 0.15 0.84 Discussion were isolated on some of these islands The islands of Bass Strait have been separated from the mainland for about 10,000 years (Jennings, 1971). However, during this relatively short geological period the common wombats which have developed marked differences in morphology. The gradation of differences in size (Fig. 3) between the populations of mainland and insular wombats suggest 'é[- Deal, King Is |_| Flinders Is Tasmania Mainland PALO 15 ,-""Mean skull length lo r=0:9710 : P« 0:05 JA cen 4 Ẹ "m [5 E 47 «uel g va^ "P. 9 43 wre P. E ue ,-"" Mean skull width ® e je r= 0:9728 i P<0:05 E 3 x [2] Log of island area (sq km) Fig. 2. Relationship between mean skull measurements and log of the mainland and island areas. 202 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Skull width (cm) Mainland (N.S.W) s n=10 an een A o d Fe, ta Tasmania n 15 AA Flinders Island. n«29 Deal and King Islands n«4 Skull length (cm) Fig. 3. Relationship between skull widths and skull lengths of Vombatus ursinus from different geographic locations, BI Mainland (N.S. W.), AT asmania, @Flinders Island, O Deal and King Islands. * mean, that they are simply subspecies of Vombatus ursinus (Shaw, 1800). It is well documented that mammalian species of large body size evolve toward a smaller body size when isolated on small islands (Foster, 1964). Heaney (1978) gives a brief review of the casual factors affecting variation in mam- malian species isolated on islands. He has presented four factors which may cause these variations: food limitation, predation, interspecific competition, and selection for physiological efficien- cy. These factors are thought to be related to island area and to be of vary- ing importance on different sized islands (Fig. 4). Food limitation is probably the casual factor which has affected the body size of the insular wombat forms, Foster (1964, p. 235) has reported that in mam- malian species the result of a limited September/October food supply would cause malnutrition and stunting of the young animals. He continues by stating *'. .. the injtial rapid genotypic decrease in size would be followed by a more gradual selection and adaptation of the phenotype to the optimal and smaller size". Interspecific competition may also be a contributing factor, however, it is not known if the small macropods in- habiting the smaller islands feed on the grass (Poa spp.) which constitute a ma- jor part of the wombat's diet (McIlroy, pers. comm. ). Predation on the smaller islands would be limited to the time of Euro- pean settlement as there are no natural predators of the common wombat on these islands. In Tasmania there has been only limited natural predation on wombats in the past by the now pro- bably extinct thylacine, Thylacinus 203 Increasing Importance — Island Area —* Fig. 4. Trends in importanee of major factors thought to affect body size of mammals on islands. (From: Heaney, 1978). cynocephalus. However, on the mainland the dingo, Canis familiaris, is reported to be a predator of the wombat (Catling, pers. comm.). Adaptation for physiological efficien- cy in wombats is probably less impor- tant than the preceding factors and is unlikely to be influenced by island size. Acknowledgements I would like to thank J.M. Dixon and L. Huxley of the National Museum of Victoria, P.F. Aitken of the South Australian Museum for data on the various forms of wombat. I would also like to thank G.D. Brown and J.C. Mcllroy of the Division of Wildlife Research, CSIRO, for helpful criticism of the manuscript. The figures were drawn by F. Knight and the manuscript was typed by Mrs W. Guy. REFERENCES Crowcroft, P. 1967. Studies on the hairy-nosed wombat, Lasiorhinus latifrons (Owen, 1845). I. Measurement and Taxonomy. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 15, 383-398. Foster, J.B. 1964. Evolution islands. Nature. 202, 234-235. Heaney, L.R. 1978. Island area and body size of in- sular mammals: evidence from the tri-colored squirrel (Callosciurus prevosti) of southeast Asia. Evolution 32, 29-44. Jennings, J.N. 1971. Sea level changes and land links. In ‘Aboriginal Man and Environment in Australia’. D.J. Mulvaney and J. Golson (eds). Aust. Nat. Univ. Press: Canberra, pp. 1-13. Mcllroy, J.C. 1973. Aspects of the ecology of the common wombat, Vombatus ursinus (Shaw, 1800). Ph.D. Thesis, Australian National Univer- sity (unpublished), Spencer, B. and Kershaw, J.A. 1910. The existing species of the genus Phascolomys. Mem. Nat. Mus. Melb. 3, 37-64. Troughton, E. 1967. ‘Furred Animals of Australia’, 9th Edition. Angus and Robertson: Sydney. of mammals on AUSTRALIAN NATURAL HISTORY MEDALLION FUND Amount on hand invested May 1980 Mrs Erica Wedge Miss Marjory Butchart 204 VITARE VES VIVE a rnv $1463.50 SERRE SA een rh 6 10.00 cri Te PA s aes Fb 20.00 Total July 1980 $1493.50 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 A technique for live trapping the Yellow-bellied Glider Petaurus australis; with notes on the biology of the species By S.A. CRAIG*, and C. A. BELCHER* Introduction The Yellow-bellied glider Petaurus australis (Shaw) (Fig.l) has aroused much interest over the years because of its characteristic vocalizations and feeding habits, but studies of its life history have been few, probably because the technique used to capture specimens (Fleay 1933) has been unsuitable for such studies, We have now developed a trapping technique which allows P. australis to be captured and released unharmed and with minimum stress. Our method may be further refined, but appears suitable for a detailed study of this particular glider. In this paper we describe our trapping technique, the results of our trapping program, and our observations on the feeding habits and habitat preferences of the species. The pouch morphology of the females captured is also briefly described. Methods Four types of traps (Fig. 2) were tested: (A) A trap designed by the Wildlife Research Section of the Fisheries and Wildlife Division. The trap is made of self supporting wire mesh and measures 550 mm x 260 mm x 260 mm. This trap was originally designed to be placed in a horizon- tal position and has a drop bar which falls down as the door closes and prevents the escape of the trap- ped animal. * Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, 123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, Victoria 3084, September/October To capture P. australis with this trap we removed the drop bar fitted a spring to the door and a wire catch to the base of the door frame. This catch was over-ridden as the spring-tensioned door closed but prevented the door from opening against the spring once the trap had been set off. With these modifica- tions the trap can be set in a vertical position with the door facing up or down. (B) A trap constructed from 2 small- mammal wire cage traps 725 mm x 205 mm x 165 mm. The rear panels were removed before joining the traps back to back, The door at cach end is spring loaded and both doors close together when the trap is set off. (C) A trap constructed from 2 large Elliot type B traps 900 mm x 150 mm x 115 mm. The rear panels were removed before joining the traps back to back, The standard spring loaded door remains at each end. (D) A trap constructed from 2 wire hoops, 510 mm in diameter and fit- ted with 12 mm nylon mesh netting. Both hoops are fixed to a base board: one is static the other is an extension of the spring section of a rat trap. The trigger mechanism of the rat trap releases the free hoop which closes over the animal, Traps were set on feed trees, recognis- ed by characteristic V-shaped channels cut into the bark, Wakefield (1970) sug- gested that P. australis cut these chan- nels in order to collect sap. Such feed trees provide evidence of the local oc- currence of P. australis. Experimental trapping was carried out at Wingan In- 205 Fig. 1 The yellow-bellied glider Petaurus australis (Shaw) let, 149?3]'E 37?44'S; Cambarville, 145°56’E 37°31’S; and Murrindindi, 145?34'E 37?23'S. Trap sites were chosen because of the abundance of gliders as judged by the frequency of their calls and feed trees. At Wingan In- let, where all types of trap were tested, the traps were either nailed in position or secured by rubber straps to feed trees (E. gummifera) at varying heights (5-10 m) above ground. The traps were baited with candied honey wrapped in gauze cloth, and parts of the tree leading to the trap were smeared with honey. 206 At Cambarville and Murrindindi, Type A was the only trap used. Traps were nailed to feed trees (E. obliqua, E. cypellocarpa, E. viminalis) and on adja- cent unused trees 5 m above ground (Fig. 3). Candied honey and a mixture of peanut butter, rolled oats and honey were used as bait. Animals captured were weighed and sexed. Females were examined for breeding condition and presence of pouch young. Information used to construct the distribution map (Fig. 4) was gathered Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 from records held in the files of the Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Victoria (FWD); the National Museum of Vic- toria; the Mammal Survey Group of Victoria and a review of the literature (see Deerson D. et al. 1975, Emison et al. 1975, Nicol, S.L. 1978, Norris et al. 1979). Fig. 2. Four types of traps tested. Left to Right — Type A, B, C, D. Results P. australis was trapped in trap types A, B and D. Type A was the easiest to set and remove, had fewest design problems and caused less stress to cap- tured animals. Type B was difficult to set and allow- ed the only animal caught to escape because the trap was set with insufficient tension on the spring. Type D was awkward to handle and caused excessive stress in the animal which made it dif- ficult to remove and handle. Discussion The results indicate that the technique described can be successfully employed for the live trapping of P. australis. Although we trapped at Cambarville for only a 3 month period the declining suc- cess rate (Table 1) suggests a seasonal variation in the allure of the bait or an increase in trap shyness. The trapping results correlate with our observations that animals were active on feed trees during the four months August — September/October November 1979, but not during December 1979 and January 1980 although they were active in the sur- rounding forest. Harrison (1961) found that honey placed regularly on trees attracted P. breviceps more effectively during the 5 months May-September, when few eucalypts were in flower and insects were less readily available. FWD obser- vations indicate that P. australis uses feed trees most often during winter months. The dietary importance of exudates from cuts in feed trees is not known, but Wakefield (1970) suggested that the exudates were less important than nectar and insects. Wakefield (1970) recorded P. australis utilizing the following Victorian eucalypt species as feed trees: Eucalpytus viminalis, E. bridgesiana, E. globulus, = bicostata (Wakefield 1970), E. rubida = dalrymplena (Wakefield 1970), E. gum- mifera, E. cypellocarpa, E. obliqua and E. nitens, P. australis feeds on the sap and probably the nectar of all these and also E. fastigata, E. globoidea, E. muellerana, E. regnans, E. sieberi, E. elata, E. delegatensis, E. baxteri, E. ovataand E. aromapholoia. Gould (1863) described P. australis as feeding on nectar and insects whereas Fleay (1933) and Brazenor (1934) recorded the species feeding on the blossoms of E. viminalis and the gum exudates of eucalypts in the Mt Wills area of Victoria. In 1977 MacFarlane (Forests Commission, Victoria pers. comm.) recorded P. australis sheltering in E. cypellocarpa tall open-forest in gullies of the Boola Boola State Forest and moving to the drier ridges to feed in flowering E. sideroxylon. In August 1979 K. Norris and L. Ahern (FWD pers. comm.) observed P. australis feeding in flowering E. sideroxylon along Hospital Creek, east Gippsland. 207 Fig. 3. Trap type A nailed toa Eucalyptus cypellocarpa feed tree near Cambarville. Distribution Gould (1863) gave the distribution of the species as between Port Phillip Bay, Victoria, and Moreton Bay, Queensland; Troughton (1941) extended the recorded distribution to Gin Gin near Bundaberg, Queensland; Wakefield (1970) gave the range as from Bundaberg to the forests north-west of Portland, Victoria; and in 1979 Winter (National Parks and Wildlife Service, Queensland, pers. comm.) recorded the species at Mt. Spurgeon in the Herber- ton Range, Queensland. The present distribution therefore ex- tends from Nelson, Victoria, through southern and eastern Victoria and 208 eastern New South Wales to Mt. Spurgeon, Queensland. Habitat In Victoria P. australis inhabits many structural types of eucalypt forests from 1200 m to sea level; for example, sub- alpine woodland (Mt Tingaringy, Wulgulmerang plateau, Nunniong plateau), tall open-forest (Errinundra plateau, water catchments N.E. of Melbourne, Otway Ranges), foothills open-forest (Colquhoun State Forest, between Bruthen and Buchan, Cobbo- boonee Forest, between Heywood and Nelson) to coastal open-forest (Lake Tyers, Wingan Inlet, Mallacoota Inlet). Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Fig. 4. Distribution of Petaurus australis in Victoria 1970-1980. Within these diverse forest types the taining the young, and consists of two presence of the animals is closely cor- lateral pouches extending far on to the related with the presence of mature trees flanks of the animal; the opening is near presumably because they provide toits anterior extremity in the undilated nesting hollows. condition.” One of the two females caught at Pouch morphology Cambarville and the female caught at The pouch morphology of P. Murrindindi each had a single pouch australis is similar to that of P. young. The pouch young were not breviceps, which Jones (1924) describes removed from pouches but it is assumed as follows: that they were attached to a nipple. No ‘The nipples are four in number. The other nipples could be found in the pouch is distinctly bilocular when con- pouches. Table 1 Results from trapping program for P. australis Site and No. of No. of ; Trap rate Weight (g) and Non-target trapping trap nights P. australis (9o) Sex of P. species caught period (1979) caught australis caught Wigan Inlet 4 Aug. 4 3 ji 600(F) T. vulpecula 652(M) P. breviceps » Cambarville 16-24 Oct. 21 4 19 640(M) T. caninus 533(M) 600(M) 550(F ) 12-22 Nov. ^b l 2 520(F) T. caninus 11-13 Dec. 33 0 0 Murindindi 25 Nov. Z ji 50 510(F#) Total 115 9 8 EEE ee aan * Glider caught in trap, but escaped before trap could be reached. Unfurred pouch young present. September/ October 209 The pouch morphology of all three was similar in that each had a pouch consisting of two compartments separated internally by a well-developed furred septum. The compartments and the septum were not visible until the lateral lips of the median pouch opening were stretched apart (Fig. 5). Fig. 5. The pouch of Petaurus australis. The com- partments and the septum are not visible until the lateral lips of the median pouch opening are stretch- ed apart. Arrow indicates septum. The female without pouch young, caught at Cambarville, had two nipples, located on and each side of the furred septum, not on the dorsal surface of the pouch as expected. The female caught at Wingan Inlet had no pouch young and her pouch morphology was different to that of the other three females. Two separate external openings were found lateral to the mid-line when the belly fur was parted. This female was highly stressed and examination was difficult as the muscular lips of the openings were tightly constricted. Consequently, we were unable to determine whether each opening led to a common pouch or to two entirely separate compartments. However, we think that each opening probably led to a separate compartment and the furred septum separating these compartments was visible as belly fur. We suspect that as the young develops and the pouch expands, the septum is drawn down to become an internal part of the pouch, leaving a single external 210 opening controlled by muscular lateral lips. The Wingan Inlet female may have been nulliparous. Acknowledgements We would like to thank the staff of the Wildlife Survey Unit and the Forest Ecology Unit of the Fisheries and Wildlife Division who provided field assistance, records and observations. In particular Keith Cherry for providing valuable field assistance and criticism of an early draft of the paper. Thanks also to J. K. Dempster, R. M. Warneke, J. H. Seebeck, K. C. Norris, P. M. Menkhorst and Dr D. D. Evans for valuable suggestions on drafts of this paper; Alisia McShane drew the distribution map; Julie Mehegan and Lyn Sharpe typed the manuscript; and Jim Cooper took some of the photographs. We would also like to thank staff of the National Parks of Victoria who made the initial trapping at Wingan Inlet National Park possible. REFERENCES Brazenor, C. W. (1934). Field notes on the Yellow- bellied Glider. Aust. Zool. 8: 54-55. Deerson, D., Dunn, R. Spittall, D. and Williams, P. (1975). Mammals of the Upper Lerderderg Valley. Victorian. Nat. 92: 28-43. Emison, W. B., Porter, J. W. Norris, K. C. and Apps, G. J. (1975). Ecological Distribution of the vertebrate animals of the volcanic plains — Ot- way Range area of Victoria. Fish. Wild. Pap: Victoria No. 6. Fleay, D. (1933). A beautiful Phalanger. Victorian, Nat. 50: 35-40. Gould, J. (1863). Mammals of Aust Vol. 1. Lon- don, the author. Harrison, E. (1961). Tuans and gliders. Victorian. Nat. 78: 224-231. Jones, F. W. (1924). The Mammals of Sth Australia. Govt. Printer Sth. Aust. Nicol, S. L. (1978), A mammal study of the Kinglake area, Victoria. Aust. Wildl. Res. 5: 123-34, Norris, K. C., Gilmore A. M. and Menkhorst, P. M. (1979). Vertebrate fauna of south Gippsland, Victoria. Mem. Nat. Mus. Vict. 40: 105-199, Troughton, E. (1941). Furred animals of Australia. Angus and Robertson, Sydney. Wakefield, N. A. (1970). Notes on the Glider- possum, Petaurus australis (Phalangeridae, Mar- supialia). Victorian. Nat. 87: 221-236. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The Swamp Antechinus (Antechinus minimus maritimus) — Notes on a Captive Specimen The Swamp Antechinus (Antechinus minimus) is a small, insectivorous, dasyurid marsupial which, on the Australian mainland, is considered rare and restricted in distribution to SE South Australia, SW and coastal Victoria with an eastern limit at Wilsons Promontory (Wainer and Gibson, 1976). The Tasmanian subspecies, A. m. minimus is common on the Bass Strait Islands and Tasmania (Green, 1972). In August, 1978, a female A. m. maritimus was trapped in coastal tussock grass and sedge habitat at the mouth of the Powlett River. The animal carried six pouch young each about 5 mm long which would probably have been born during the previous week. The mother and young were subsequently kept indoors in a large (1.5 x 0.5 x 0.3 m) aquarium containing sawdust, grass and nesting material. A varied diet was provided, including fresh meat, mice, skinks, grasshoppers, mealworms, bread and a regular mixture of Harper’s Puppy Chow mixed with raw egg, milk and Pentavite drops. This paper reports on observations made during the development of the young as well as thermophysiological data recorded from experiments on the mother. Behaviour and development Many species of Antechinus are monoestrous and show a post-mating mortality among males (Lee, Bradley and Braithwaite, 1977). The antechinus in this study was trapped on 15/viii/78 and the young (crown-rump length 5 mm) were estimated to have been less than one week old. Such an estimate is based on crown- rump measurements of 4.9 and 4.5 mm reported for new-born A. stuartii (Marlow, 1961) and A. swainsonii (Williams and Williams, 1980) respectively. Given a gestation period of about 30 days as in most other Antechinus species (Woolley, 1966) mating would have occurred in early July. Wainer (1976) found A. m maritimus on Greater Glennie Is. mated in late May, June and early July; A. m. minimus in Tasmania, however, mates in September (Green, 1972). Robert Wallis and Gillian Baxter, Department of Environmental Studies, Rusden State College, Clayton, Vic. 3168 September/October In A. swainsonii mating also occurs later in the Tasmanian subspecies than in the mainland form; in the monoestrous species of Antechinus both latitude and altitude. of habitat appear to be important determinants of timing of mating. The female had eight nipples but only carried six young. Eight is the characteristic nipple number in A, m. maritimus but the Tasmanian subspecies has only six (Wakefield and Warneke, 1963). A similar situation exists in the mainland and Tasmanian subspecies of A. swainsonii (Wakefield and Warneke, 1963). The young grew rapidly during their period of nipple attachment and when four weeks ald body lengths were about 35 mm. They were dropped in the nest four and a half weeks after capture (18/ix/78) by which time they were lightly furred. For the next few weeks the mother preferred to take food into the nest and eat it there — whether the young ate any of it could not be determined. The young first vocalised on 20/ix/78 uttering high-pitched squeaks. The mother's response to this sound generally was to return to the nest. The only vocalisation of the mother was a rare, low hissing sound produced when she appeared agitated. When six weeks old the young made excursions from the nest, either independently or on the mother's back. Although the adult's greatest periods of activity were early evening and three hours around dawn, the young were active at random times over the 24 hours. The mother made new nests in early and mid-October — apparently in response to increased size of young. The nests were commenced with a hollow and the surrounds ‘‘added on’’, they had a single opening and were kept very clean. The young were first observed feeding off solid food at 8 weeks although they suckled for another month. When 10 weeks old the young were given a dead mouse. They were unable to tear the fur from the carcass and had to rely on the parent to do so. (Generally the parent ate sometime after the young had started feeding). Instead, the young antechinus tended to eat the head, tail and limbs, with the two largest excluding the 211 others until they had apparently had sufficient. On 31/x/78 one of the larger pouch young died and by a further 17 days all young had died. Cause of death remains unknown, but prior to death the eyes closed up and motor locomotory activities were uncoordinated. Two of the bodies were eaten by the surviving animals. The development of young A. minimus shows similarities to that in A. swainsonii: they are probably born about the same size, fur is developed in both species after four weeks and age of weaning is the same (14 weeks). However, the age when young are dropped in the nest is earlier in A. minimus (42 d. versus 56 d.), as is the time when solids are taken (63 d. versus 84 d.) (Williams and Williams, 1980). Measurements taken of the adult are within the range for female A. m. minimus (Green, 1972), with the exception of the mainland specimen having larger body length and skull dimensions than those recorded in Green’s study. Thermophysiology Some time after the death of the young, oxygen consumption rate (OCR) of the adult was measured at several ambient temperatures (Ta’s). The methods are similar to those reported in Wallis (1976) except gases were analysed with a Beckman E2 oxygen analyser. The resting OCR (1.13 cm? 02/g hr) in the thermal neutral zone is slightly greater than that predicted for a 43 g marsupial (0.92 cm? 02/g hr.; Dawson and Hulbert, 1970), but truly basal levels were probably not achieved in the limited experiments with A. minimus. At lower Ta’s, endotherms increase heat production to maintain homeothermy. The slope of the OCR v Ta curve is a measure of the animal's thermal conductance; for the A. minimus the value of 0.20 cm? 02/g hr. °C is in accord with that predicted (0.23) for a similar sized marsupial by Kinnear and Shield (1975). The animal used in these experiments was able to remain normothermic (body temp. 35.4 °C) to Ta's as low as 3 °C presumably by dint of a good insulation, high activity and shivering. It is also possible that small marsupials can increase heat production in the cold by non-shivering thermogenesis (Wallis, 1979). No low OCR in response to cold was observed. This does not discount the occurrence of torpor in this 212 species — in A. stuartii, torpor as an adaptation to cold is observed only during winter in response to starvation (Wallis, 1976). Torpor has not, however, been observed in the larger A. swainsonii (Ingham, 1977), although both A. swainsonii and A. stuartii show a lability in body temperatures (as low as 31 °C) all year round which doubtless confers some energy saving. Although it is dangerous to generalise from the results for one animal, the limited data presented here indicate the similarities in thermophysiology between the three southern Victorian species of Antechinus, particularly in terms of body temperatures, metabolic rates and ability to tolerate cold. Acknowledgements Thanks are due to Grant Singleton for his expertise in trapping. The work was carried out under permit from the Fisheries and Wildlife Division. REFERENCES Dawson, T.J. and Hulbert, A.J. (1970), Standard metabolism, body temperature, and surface areas of Australian marsupials, Am. J. Physiol. 218: 1233-1238. Green, R.H. (1972). The murids and small dasyurids in Tasmania. Parts 5, 6 and 7. Rec. Queen Vict. Mus., Launceston, Tas. 46: 1-34. Ingham, P. (1977). The physiology of Antechinus swainsonii. Biol. 308 research project, Rusden State College. Kinnear, A. and Shield, J.W. (1975). Metabolism and temperature regulation in marsupials. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 52A: 235-245. Lee, A.K., Bradley, A.J. and Braithwaite, R.W. (1977). Corticosteroid levels and male mortality in Antechinus stuartii. In The Biology of Marsupials, eds. Stonehouse, B. and Gilmore, D., University Park Press, Baltimore, Marlow, B.J. (1961). Reproductive behaviour of the marsupial mouse, Antechinus flavipes (Waterhouse) (Marsupialia), and the development of the pouch young. Aust, J. Zool. 9: 203-218. Wainer, J.W. (1976). Studies on an island population of Antechinus minimus (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). Aust. Zool. 19: 1-7. Wainer, J.W. and Gibson, R.J. (1976). Habitat of the Swamp Antechinus in Victoria. Distribution and habitat requirements of the maínland Swamp Antechinus Antechinus minimus maritimus (Finlayson) (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). Victorian Nat. 93: 253-255. Wakefield, N.A. and Warneke, R.M. (1963). Some revision in Antechinus (Marsupialia) - 1, Victorian Nat. 80: 194-219. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Wallis, R.L. (1976). Torpor in the dasyurid marsupial Antechinus stuartii. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 53A: 319-322. Wallis, R.L. (1979). Responses to low temperature in small marsupial mammals. J. therm. Biol. 4: 105-111. Williams, R. and Williams, A. (1980). The life history of Antechinus swainsonii. Australian Carnivorous Marsupial Symposium, Sydney. Royal Zoological Society of N.S.W. Woolley, P. (1966). Reproduction in Antechinus spp. and other dasyurid marsupials. Symp. Zool. Soc. Lond. 15: 281-294. Erroneous or Doubtful Victorian Vascular Plant Grid Records Bv A. C. BEAUGLEHOLE f Introduction Since the publication of *A Handbook to Plants in Victoria! by J. H. Willis (1970 & 1972) and ‘The Distribution of Victorian Plants’ by Churchill & de Cor- ona (1972), the present author, with the help of others, has been compiling a list of species with Major Grid records which are considered to be erroneous or very doubtful. These records were brought about in a number of ways e.g. misidentification, confusion with other species and earlier unspecific records assigned to two grids, such as BC (Big (Desert), DJ (Grampians), DE (Lower Glenelg), KP (Otways) etc. The Land Conservation Council of Victoria (1970) conveniently divided Victoria into 13 Study Areas and has already published Reports, Proposed and Final Recommendations with a wealth of valuable botanical informa- tion in several of these for the general public. However the L.C.C. readily recognized that not all botanical data could be presented and agreed with the present author that he write up and publish his own account. For this, we must be very grateful to the Ministry for Conservation and the L.C.C. Thanks to substantial financial sup- port from the Utah Foundation, finan- cial assistance and encouragement from the Western Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association and kindred organizations, assistance from the Ministry for Conservation and La Trobe University Botany Department — in particular Dr. R. F. Parsons, two Study September/October Area Reports have been published (Mallee 1979 & Corangamite 1980). In the Mallee Report the author dealt with over 80 Major Grid records which had been previously published but were now regarded in the Report as erroneous or doubtful records and for Cor- angamite Report about 30 Major Grids were also considered as such. Because Grids ABF were completely and G was mostly within the Mallee Study Area and Grid K was completely within the Corangamite Study Area, it was rather simple to isolate such erroneous or doubtful records. However, as the ma- jority of remaining Study Areas contain certain Grids which fall into more than one Study Area, the task will be much greater. In an endeavour to obtain clarifica- tion of all possible erroneous or doubt- ful records, it is extremely important that the present author receives the fullest co-operation of all concerned. To minimize inconvenience, the author has specially designed Recording Sheets to ensure uniformity amongst the many helpers. Details of records, especially if substantiated by herbarium specimens, should follow thus: Name of species; Collection number (collector's initials before such); Study Area (abbreviated to two letters e.g. MA — Mallee, CO- Corangamite); Sector (if known; see Mallee & Corangamite Reports); Major & Minor Grids; Sub-Block (if known); Land Status (see abbreviations in Mallee-1979 and Corangamite-1980 213 Study Area Reports); Location (impor- tant to give direction and distance km from prominent town or landmark); Collector; Date of collection; Person responsible for determination; If check- ed by an authority please include name; Herbaria where collections are housed. Recording Sheets must be filled in ade- quately and clearly otherwise record may be rejected. + 3 Beverley Street, Portland, Victoria. 3305. Acknowledgement I wish to thank all those persons who have helped with up-dating of our Vic- torian flora (persons too numerous to mention individually). Erroneous or doubtful "Victorian vascular plant grid records The following list is based on the alphabetical arrangement of Churchill & de Corona (1972). NOTE: Erroneous records already listed by Beauglehole (1978, 1979 & 1980) are repeated to form a single comprehensive list. In all, 311 individual grid records are affected. The author would welcome additional information. * Species introduced into Victoria Acacia farinosa B A. hakeoides D A. lanigera D A. suaveolens E Acaena anserinifolia A A. ovina E Acrotriche depressa J A. serrulata B *Aira caryophyllea AB Alisma plantagoaquatica E Alyxia buxifolia B Amphibolis antarctica W XZ Amyema quandang D Angianthus strictus E Apium prostratum C Arthrocnemum arbuscula BC Asterolasia asteriscophora D Astrotricha ledifolia CDJM Avicennia marina D 214 Azolla pinnata C Banksia spinulosa E Blechnum cartilagineum K Boronia anemonifolia D B. filifolia B Borya nitida C Brachychiton populneum A Brachycome angustifolia EJN B.cardiocarpa B B. multifida E B. radicans D B. scapigera D B. trachycarpa E Caesia vittata A Caladenia tessellata B Callitris rhomboidea B Calocephalus brownii B Calystegia marginata D Carex pumila AB Cassinia arcuata D Caustis flexuosa EK Centrolepis aristata B C. cephaloformis J C. glabra B Ceratophyllum demersum Z Cheiranthera cyanea K Chenopodium carinatum DHJN C. pseudomicrophyllum E Choretrum spicatum D Chorizandra enodis B *Cirsium arvense BCG Comesperma ericinum CD Corybas diemenicus V Cratystylis conocephala B Cressa cretica E Cryptandra amara ABCD Cyathodes juniperina N Cyperus gunnii A Dampiera rosmarinifolia D *Datura innoxia R Daviesia genistifolia B Deyeuxia brachyathera D Dichelachne micrantha AB Dillwynia glaberrima BM Dodonaea angustissima E D. bursariifolia D Drosera auriculata BF Epacris microphylla K Epilobium gunnianum C Eriostemon difformis ACDHJ Eucalyptus albens T E. botryoides T E. calycogona S E. consideniana E E. dives KX E. glaucescens VZ Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 E. goniocalyx EK E. macrorhyncha EP E. maculata Z E. mannifera D E. melliodora E E. obliqua F E. polyanthemos D E. sideroxylon K E. viminalis F Galium propinquum DE Gentianella diemensis EK Gompholobium ecostatum B Goodenia lanata CH Grevillea dimorpha S G. rosmarinifolia E Gypsophila australis K Hakea lissosperma Z H. microcarpa E H. muellerana E H. rugosa E H. sericea E Helichrysum adenophorum B H. bracteatum E H. obcordatum K Helipterum australe K H. demissum K Heterozostera tasmanica EWXZ Hibbertia aspera E H. calycina CD H. procumbens D Hydrocotyle hirta F H. medicaginoides D H. tripartita EJ Hypolepis australis K Hypoxis glabella AB Ixodia achilleoides B Juncus australis CEHKLMQUX J. filicaulis ADE J. pallidus AFG J. pauciflorus HM J. vaginatus M Laxmannia gracilis DIXZ Lepidosperma elatius DEJK Lepilaena preissii C Leptocarpus brownii B Leptomeria aphylla AB Leptorhynchos waitzia K Leptospermum juniperinum F Leucopogon australis E Lobelia rhombifolia K Maireana excavata A Melaleuca gibbosa K Mentha satureioides DEK Mitrasacme paradoxa B Monotoca elliptica E Muehlenbeckia cunninghamii K September/October Myosotis suaveolens DK Myosurus minimus K Najas tenuifolia C Nicotiana suaveolens D Notelaea venosa K Nymphoides crenata EKNW N. geminata S Olearia axillaris B O. picridifolia B Opercularia varia A Oplismenus aemulus W Phebalium squameum E P. stenophyllum B Plagiobothys elachanthus E Plantago muelleri S Platylobium obusangulum A Poa poiformis D Polygonum subsessile E Pomaderris prunifolia D Prasophyllum brevilabre D P. hartii K P. rogersii E Prostanthera decussata N P. melissifolia Z P. walteri R *Psilurus incurvus D Psoralea parva D Pterostylis cycnocephala A P. decurva E P. furcata K P. obtusa D P. robusta B Ptilotus obovatus D Pultenaea acerosa DJ P. cunninghamii E P. daltonii K P. foliolosa S P. hibbertioides DJ P. juniperina R P. largiflorens D P. pedunculata B P. platyphylla DJ P. prolifera H P. prostrata EN P. retusa DIMPV P. stricta HRWZ P. subumbellata R P. tenuifolia JN Ranunculus papulentus E R. plebeius D R. robertsonii B Rhagodia hastata BCK Rorippa laciniata A *Rubus cissburiensis WZ *R. ulmifolius E *R. vestitus T 215 Schoenus carsei T S. subaphyllus D Scirpus congruus DJ S. inundatus A S. stellatus B Seleranthus diander A *Senecio vulgaris A Solanum americanum K S, nitidibaccatum J S. pungetium U S. simile WZ *Soliva pterosperma B Sparganium antipodum R S. erectum J Spyridium spathulatum B Stackhousia viminea BE Stylidium calcaratum BE Stypandra glauca E Styphelia adscendens E Tasmannia lanceolata D Tetragonia tetragonioides K Tetrarrhena juncea E Tetratheca bauerifolia EMT Teucrium corymbosum B Theleophyton billardieri K Thismia rodwayi Z. Thysanotus juncifolius C T. tuberosus AB Triglochin striata UV Trithuria submersa BK Uneinia riparia Z Xanthorrhoea australis B Zygophyllum billardieri A REFERENCES 1. Beauglehole, A, C,, 1978a. Alterations and addi- tions to the vascular flora of Victoria — Part 1, Victorian Nat, 95: 67-74, Beauglehole, A. C., 1979, The Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee. Western Victorian Field Naturalist's Clubs Association: Portland, 99 pp. . Beauglehole, A. C., 1980, The Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the Cor- angamite — Otway Area, Victoria. Western Vic- torian Field Naturalist's Clubs Association: Portland 108 pp. . Churchill, D. M. & de Corona, A., 1972, The Distribution of Victorian Plants. Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, . Victoria: Land Conservation Council 1970. The Land Conservation Act, 6. Willis, J. H., 1970 A Handbook to Plants in Victoria, Vol. 1, 2nd. Ed. Melbourne Univ. Press, Melbourne. N w P u^ 7. Willis, J, H., 1972. A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 2. Melbourne Univ. Press, Melbourne. Flanged Button Australites and Lenses Found Recently In the January-February 1978 issue of the Victorian Naturalist 1 reported finding a flanged dumb-bell australite at Simpson in August 1978, Searching the same general area of a disused sandpit adjacent to the junction of Boulevard Road with the Simpson- Princetown Road on Tuesday, 20 November, and Friday, 23 November 1979, | found two perfectly preserved flanged button australites. One of the australites is of comparatively large dimensions and weighs 8.83 grams and measures 2.5cm in diameter. The smaller australite which is also almost perfectly preserved, weighs 2.66 grams and has a diameter of 1.8cm. The larger australite, when found, was partly buried in hard grey sand but shows vir- tually no sign of wear from wind or other eroding elements at all. The larger australite has distinctive flow lines, and although almost perfect, has a hairline fracture through its centre, clearly the result of its im- pact with the earth. The smaller australite was lying in some eroded clay and sand, and probably had been 216 washed out during the preceding night by heavy rain. The larger of the two australites has à heavy flange and there is an indication that the flange was being melted over prior to its arrival on Earth. In addition to the two well preserved australites, the author also found a further shiny, but broken button australite in the same vicinity. Amongst a variety of other australite fragments, buttons, cores and other shapes found during the recent Christmas vacation, I found two australite lenses of rather larger than the usual size, Both were located in eroded gravelly ground in the general area of Loch Ard Gorge on the same day. One is perfectly preserved lens, the other slightly broken but otherwise intact. The former weighs 0.54 grams and is 1.Scms in diameter and is almost perfectly round, whilst the broken lens weighs 0.42 grams, has a diameter of 1.3ems, but is inclined to be oval in shape. H. V. Feehan Doncaster, Vic. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Bush-peas of Victoria — Genus Pultenaea — 14 BY M. G. CORRICK* Pultenaea weindorferi F. M. Reader in Vict. Nat. 22:51 (1905) Pultenaea weindorferi is endemic in Victoria and, although restricted to a few scattered localities in the central and southern parts of the State, it may be locally plentiful, and in one or two places it is the dominant under-storey shrub. It is usually found in poorly drained areas, often along low-lying roadsides or the margins of swamps. P. weindorferi is a slender, erect, usually glabrous shrub about 1.5-2 m high. The alternate leaves are 8-12 mm long and 1 mm wide and may be either linear with incurved margins or terete and grooved on the upper surface. The leaf tip is obtuse and slightly recurved. The dark brown, papery stipules have a prominent mid-rib and are united to about half their length. The tips are recurved, but on older growth they may be torn or broken. The axillary flowers are bright yellow and clustered in apparent heads at the tips of the branches. The standard is 8 - 9 mm high and 6 - 7 mm wide with a few dark purple lines in the throat. The wings and keel are yellow. The calyx is 5-6 mm long with a pedicel 2 - 4 mm long. The lobes are acuminate, longer than the tube and are edged with short, fine cilia and have a few, scattered, fine hairs on the inner surface. There is also a ring of short hairs at the base of the pedicel. The slender, lanceolate or linear bracteoles have incurved margins and are attached to the base of the calyx tube. They are about 4-5 mm long and reach almost to the tips of the lobes. The floral leaves with enlarged stipules show a gradation to a floral bract with only a small vestigial leaf under the youngest, or innermost flowers of the inflorescence, * 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, Victoria, September/October The ovary is glabrous with a long, slender style. The pod is also glabrous, plump and exserted from the calyx, The style is not retained on the pod for long. Flowering time is from early October in the Dandenongs to early November in Wombat Forest. A distinctive form of P. weindorferi with soft, long hairs on calyx and leaves occurs in the Kinglake National Park. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Wandin, M. C. Corrick 6487, 20.1.1980 (MEL 1517728); Wombat Forest, Barry Kemp 4, xi. 1976 (MEL 558275); Upper reaches of Bunyip R., T. B. Muir 1285, 2.x.1960 (MEL 558277); Kinglake Na- tional Park, P. S. O'Connor, 18.x.1975 (MEL 558272); Swamp at Wandin, G. Weindorfer, ix. 1903 (MEL, 35428) Type. Pultenaea capitellata Sieber ex DC. in Prodr. 2:112 (1825). This is an uncommon species in Vic- toria, having been recorded only on the Bogong High Plains and in a small area of East Gippsland round Bidwell and Bendoc. It also occurs in the Central and Southern Tablelands of New South Wales and in the Australian Capital Ter- ritory, but it is apparently not plentiful anywhere. It inhabits wet areas on the margins of swamps or near streams. P. capitellata is a low, slender shrub, usually less than 50 cm high, of straggl- ing habit and tending to be hidden in taller, denser undergrowth. The stems are pubescent and the alternate, obovate leaves are 3-12 mm long and 2-5 mm wide with slightly recurved margins, The upper leaf surface is glabrous, with pro- minent veining; the under surface is covered with closely appressed, pale hairs. The obtuse leaf tip has a slender, fragile mucro which may not be retained on older leaves, The dark, in- conspicuous stipules are about | mm long. 217 "A lip» € AR Ai 1 "S i ANY AE EL ke UN, d FOIT — XN E ——23 WSs et cM imm XY imm a os Fig, 18, a-k, Pultenaea weindorferi: a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style and ovary, all from MEL 558271; d, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; e, style and ovary, both from hairy form from Kinglake National Park, MEL 558272; f, floral bract; g, leaf and stipules; h, upper side of leaf; i, stipule, all from MEL 558271; j, pod; k, seed, from MEL 1517728. l-u, Pultenaea capitellata: |, habit; m, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger, from MEL 534233; n, bracteole from MEL 561420 to show variation; o, style and ovary; p-q, floral bracts showing the variation of the central lobe; r, leaf and stipule; s, stipule, all from MEL 534233; t, pod, from MEL 524234; u, seed, from MEL 561420, 218 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 mm Fig. 19, a-i, Pultenaea vrolandii: a, habit; b, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; c, style and ovary; d, floral bract; e, leaves and stipules (large leafed form from Pine Mtn); f, stipule, all from MEL 526368; g, typical leaf from the Strathbogie Ranges (MEL 35419); h, pod; i, seed from MEL 1518781, j-q, Pultenaea altissima: j, habit; k, calyx and bracteoles, one bracteole drawn a little larger; 1, style and ovary; m, leaves and stipules; n, stipule; o, reduced stipule from within the inflorescence, all from MEL 563188; p, pod; q, seed, from MEL 563189. September/October 219 The flowers are orange and dark pur- ple, each about 10-12 mm long and clustered in heads at the tips of the bran- ches. The standard is about 11 mm high and 8 mm wide, with fine, dark lines radiating from the throat almost to the edge; there are dark lines also on the wings and the keel is dark purple. The calyx is hirsute, 8-9 mm long, with lobes tapering into long, slender points. The hairs are longer and denser towards the tips of the lobes and at the base of the tube. The slender, brown bracteoles have incurved, ciliate margins and scattered pale hairs down the centre. They are attached about half-way up the calyx tube and reach almost to the top of the lobes. The flower heads are surrounded by numerous, brown, closely imbricate bracts with ciliate margins and a patch of pale hairs in the centre. The tips of the bracts split into three distinctively shaped lobes. The ovary is densely covered with long white hairs which extend about one third of the way along the very slender style. The pod is flat and covered with pale hairs; the style is fragile and not retained on the pod for long. Flowering time varies according to altitude from late November to late January. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Gunmark Range Rd., A. C. Beauglehole 34630, 19.xi.1970 (MEL 534232); near Bendoc, A. C. Beauglehole 34768, 22.xi.1970 (MEL 534233); near Bendoc, Charles French, 1.1889 (MEL 534234); New Holland, Sieber 413 (MEL 534040) Syntype; Bogong High Plains, J. H. Willis, 19.1.1947 (MEL 535053). Pultenaea vrolandii Maiden in Vict. Nat. 22:98 (1905). Pultenaea vrolandii is another species of restricted distribution, being confined to the granite hills of the north-east of the State, with an isolated occurrence near Braidwood in New South Wales. P. vrolandii is a hairy, usually 220 spreading shrub 0.5-2 m high. The stems are terete and covered with a woolly vestiture of mixed short and long hairs. The alternate ovate or elliptic leaves vary in size from 3-14 mm long and 1-3 mm wide, tapering into an acute, pungent tip. The upper surface is glabrous and the lower surface is villous with pale hairs which are thicker and longer at the edges of the leaf. The leaf margins are incurved and in narrow leaved specimens the upper surface is almost concealed. The slender, dark, resinous stipules are about 2 mm long with a distinct mid- rib; they are joined for about half their length. The richly coloured orange and dark purple axillary flowers are pedicellate and clustered towards the tips of the branches. The standard is 11-12 mm high and 11-12 mm broad. The calyx is 5-6 mm long with a pedicel of 5-6 mm. The upper calyx lobes are broad and obtuse and the three lower lobes are acuminate. The base of the calyx tube and the lobes are covered with rather loose, soft hairs. The large, distinctive bracteoles are 4- 5 mm long and 4-5 mm broad, resinous, distinctively veined, boat shaped and almost enveloping the calyx. There are no bracts but the stipules at the base of the pedicel are somewhat enlarged. The ovary is densely covered with white, woolly hairs which extend more than half-way up the long slender style. The pod is plump and hairy and more than half concealed by the calyx. Flowering time is late October to mid- November. There is considerable variation in habit and leaf size between the main populations of this species. The typical form from the Strathbogie Ranges has small leaves and appears to be the least common form. On Pine Mountain and neighbouring hills the leaves are very large, but the plant is often low and spreading. Around Beechworth occurs a very robust form about 2 m high with Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 large leaves and graceful drooping branches. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Pine Mtn., 30.x.1977, M. G. Corrick 599] (MEL 526368); Near Mt. Pilot, 24.x.1979, May Galbraith (MEL 1517492); Strathbogie Ranges, x.1902, A. W. Vroland 175 (Herb. H. B. Williamson n. 974, MEL 1518775, Type.; Pine Mtn., 16.i.1964, J. H. Willis (MEL 1518781). Pultenaea altissima F. Muell. ex Benth. in Flor. Aust. 2:123 (1864). This species is also rare in Victoria, being confined to a few localities round the upper reaches of the Genoa River. It has also been found in several localities on the Central and Southern Tablelands of New South Wales. Pultenaea altissima is a tall, riparian, entirely glabrous shrub of about 2-3 m high. It is usually erect and may appear like a small tree; the stems are angled and the ultimate branches are somewhat drooping, particularly when heavy with flower. The alternate obovate or oblanceolate leaves have obtuse tips and the upper leaf surface is usually paler, particularly when dry. The dark brown stipules are 1.5-2 mm long with slender, acuminate tips. EN @Piltenaee altissima | rit e ur O F eopstallolo. 4D P yrolandit | M O Boeinderfers | auw D J oN A. in, k La ND K | SY The pale orange axillary flowers are pedicellate and are usually clustered at the extreme tips of the branches, often appearing almost umbellate. The stan- dard is 8-9 mm high and 9-10 mm broad with slight brown markings in the throat. The calyx is 4-5 mm long with a pedicel of 1-2 mm. The calyx lobes are broad, about the same length as the tube and are edged with fine cilia. The bracteoles are broadly ovate, about 1 mm long and attached at the base of the calyx tube. Most flowers in the inflorescence are subtended by a normal leaf with stipules which are somewhat reduced; occa- sionally only small, united stipules are present which are then regarded as forming a floral bract. The ovary and the plump pod are both glabrous. Flowering time is late September to mid-October. SPECIMENS EXAMINED included: Upper Genoa River, 30.xi.1970, A. C. Beauglehole and K. C. Rogers ACB 35084 (MEL 563189); Twofold Bay & Genoa R., F. Mueller (MEL 35079, Type.); Upper Genoa R., 17.x.1948, J. H. Willis (MEL 563188). JUMAL HERWANIUM OF VICTORIA Fig. 18a. Known distribution of Pultenaea altissima, P. capitellata, P. vrolandii and P. weindorferi. September/October 221 Broken Hill: F.N.C.V. 25/8/79 to 6/9/79 A few impressions that will remain with us of Broken Hill are firstly the green vegetation and trees on approaching the city after the dry arid countryside during the drive from Wentworth, second the tin houses that are a reminder of the early days in Broken Hill, thirdly the well designed modern buildings with obvious thought to climatic conditions in their skilful con- struction, also historic buildings well cared for, and last but not least the helpful friendly people. The Land Regeneration programme which accounted for the ‘green feeling’ on arrival was started way back in 1936-37 by the naturalist Albert Morris when he fenced off a few acres, where natural growth, (free from the destructive eating by rabbits, goats, and sheep) could recuperate, Within the fence the tussocky grass, saltbush, bluebush and native shrubs grew thick and high. Later the area was extended and protected with a rabbit-proof fence. Hardy trees were planted to hold the sand, and today a strip of land half a mile wide extends three- quarters of the way around Broken Hill, protecting it from drifting sand. The area is complete- ly irrigated from the runoff of the sewerage works treatment plant. The supply of water was always a problem until the early 1950's when the 24 inch pipeline from Menindee to Stephens Creek reservoir was constructed. From here water is piped to Broken Hill through pumping stations, and even with this supply the water dwindles in the summer, to the houses on the out- skirts of the city. The Menindee lakes area is a significant sample of one of the major landscapes categories of the arid and semi-arid regions of New South Wales and is dominated by the Darling River, the complex system of overflow lakes around Menindee are filled during high floods and until recently, drained back into the falling river. The water conservation scheme designed in 1949 to impound, 2,000,000 acre feet of water from the Darling was constructed by New South Wales Conservation and Irrigation Commission and completed in 1960, Here the excess water from floods is stored and then used to maintain the Darling and the Ana Branch of the Darling at à reasonable level. This area is ideal for feeding, nesting and the breeding habitats of the various water birds. In conjunction with Menindee is the Kinchega National Park which has four main ecological environments, The Overflow Lakes, The River Environment, The Red Sandhills, Sandplains and The Lunette Landscape. Most of Kinchega is a red sand country, which supports a grassland type of vegetation, with predominately Bluebush, and a scattering of Prickly Wattle, Hopbush and Cassia (drought resisters). Wildflowers were to be seen here and there but good rains are needed to see them in profusion. Kangaroos and emus were not seen until movement was detected, they resembled grey lumps of rock when resting, whilst along the scenic river drive the River Gums (E. camaldulensis) and the Coolibahs (E. microtheca) provide a habitat for many species of birds, Parrots, Honeyeaters, Choughs and Grey Thrush, also the Brush Tailed Possum, The road between Broken Hill and Mootwingee has a number of natural water holes, which the early pioneers utilized by digging wells and sinking small earth ground tanks using horses, bullocks and camels. These became stopping places on the way to the White Cliffs Opal Fields, and the remains of old buildings can still be seen, also part of the railway viaduct which was washed away in a flood. Mootwingee lies north east of Broken Hill and is a small example of semi-arid rangeland where within spectacular rocky outcrops are found steep-sided gorges con- taining rockholes filled with water. This area because of its reliability has been the source of water for man and wildlife for thousands of years. Here was the home of the Aboriginal people and their engravings and paintings can be seen in the caves and on the rocks. We were also aware of the abrupt contrast between rugged ranges, vegetated tracts and bare rocky outcrops, where plants and animals have learned to adapt to this harsh environment. Red River Gums follow the main drainage tracts, along with Cassias, Hopbushes, Acacias, Solanum and Wahlenbergia. On the steep sheltered hillsides grow Cypress Pine, Native Lime, Eristemon and Prostanthera. The rocky plateau and ridges are host to the hardy Acacia, Eremophila, Silver Cassia and Maireana, and the bare rock area which at first appears to have no growth has in fact a covering of lichen. The Snake Trail gave us all a fair example of this very beautiful rugg- ed Park. 222 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The three hour conducted surface mine tour of the North Mine was very comprehensive and instructive and covered the processes from the rock ore from the mine to the separated minerals such as silver, lead and zinc, which in powder form is sent to Port Pirie for smelting. The rock ore in its crystalline form is very beautiful especially when embedded with rhodonite. The highlights were to see the numerous patches of Sturts Desert Pea and the White Necked Heron in its breeding plumage. 6 Latrobe Valley Field Naturalists. Eric and June Lubcke, Iris Petersen, Pearl Reeves and Jim and Peg Wall, Supplementary notes Enroute to Broken Hill we were guests of Sunraysia Naturalist Club for an evening, meeting in Mildura, and an excursion across the Murray River in a north-eastern area of bush on 26th August, Help in identification of plants came from our leaders, and a ‘New Checklist of the Plants of North-West Victoria and South-West New South Wales with Distribution and Iden- tification Aids’’: compiled by T. S. Henshall. Approximately 70 species were identified, and listed below are some of the plants in flower. Geijeva parviflora — Wilga Tree with weeping habit, and branches dense with panicles of small white flowers and some fruits. We were to find this plant further north, but here is its most southerly latitude. Olearia rudis — Azure Daisy-bush, a handsome shrub like an Easter Daisy and with sticky leaves. Eremophila glabra — Common Emu-bush with green, yellow to dull red flowers. Eremophila oppositifolia — Twin-leaf Emu-bush, white flowers and each with an enlarged calyx. This conspicuous shrub was found between Wentworth and Broken Hill. Eucalyptus socialis — Grey Mallee. Minuria cunninghamii — White Daisy-bush. Helipterum pygmaeum — a minute Sunray, scented, forming ground cover carpets of white inflorescences. Podolepis capillaris — conspicuous with its small white inflorescences on wiry stems. Cassia nemophila — two varieties. Ptilotus exaltatus — Lamb-tails with grey-pink inflorescences. Swainsonia microphylla — racemes of small purple pea flowers. Templetonia egena — à leafless shrub with yellowish-brown pea flowers, Westringia rigida — stiff Westringia, with white flowers. Craspedia pleiocephala — Soft Billy-buttons. Helichrysum apiculatum — Common Everlasting. Helichrysum bracteatum — Golden Everlasting. Along the Murray River banks and flood plain we noted: Eucalyptus camaldulensis — River Redgum. Eucalyptus largiflorens — Black Box. Acacia salicina — Willow Acacia. Acacia stenophylla — Eumong Acacia. Acacia victoriae — Bramble Acacia. Stopping places on the Silver Highway between Wentworth and Broken Hill had priority for the brilliant display of clianthus speciosus — Sturt Pea. Again this plant was seen at its best beside the road to Menindee. It was interesting to find a variant colour of the flower. Other plants observed were: Marsdenia australia — Austral Doubah, a slender climber, flowering, and bearing con- spicuous pear-shaped fruits. Acacia ligulata — Small Cooba. Acacia burkittii — Crochet-needle Bush. Lomandra effusa — Scented Mat-rush, with its prominent clusters of pistillate flowers. Codonocarpus cotinifolius — Native Poplar with its bell-like fruits, Pittosporum phillyreoides — Weeping Pittosporum showing fruits of yellow capsules and red seeds. September/October 223 Echium plantagineum — Salvation Jane in some places lined both sides of the road with beautiful blue flowers. On the white sandy shores of dry Lake Popilta: Lavateria plebeia — Austral Hollyhock. Ajunga australis — Austral Bugle showing individual plants with either white, pink, blue or purple flowers. Nicotiana suaveolens — Native Tobacco. Wahlenbergia gracilis — Native Blue-bell. On excursions in and around Broken Hill we were grateful for the help of the President, Mr R. H. Mew, and Mr and Mrs J. E. Baker and other members of the Barrier Field Naturalist Club. References used were Albert Morris’s **Plant Life of the West Darling’? — a book com- piled and published by the Barrier F.N.C., and Plant Check Lists for Mootwingee Reserve and National Historic Site and the road to Menindee Lakes. The Superintendent of the Kinchega National Park Menindee supplied us with information sheets on the fauna, flora and history. Some plants noted at UMBERUMBERKA; Lysiana exocarpi — Harlequin Mistletoe with glistening red berries, and its host plant was Acacia tetragonophylla — Dead Finish. Amyema preissii — Wire-leaf Mistletoe with transparent pinkish white berries, and its host plants were Acacia victoriae, and A. tetragonophylla. Trichodesma zeylanicum — a member of the Borage family, with large-sized forget-me-not blue flowers on approximately two-foot high stems. THACKARINGA HILLS Sida virgata — a shrub with many yellow flowers, common on some sandy hillsides. TRIPLE CHANCE MINE area. Eremophila alternifolia — a shrub with pink flowers spotted with red. Pterostylis mitchellii — Greenhood Orchids in bud, and their rosettes of leaves. Parmeliopsis semiviridis var. major — a wandering Lichen existing without any attachment to the ground. It rolls up when moisture is not available and is carried about by the wind. When rain falls it uncurls and commences life anew. Ephemeral Plants were exciting to find. Observation while standing in one place revealed Helipterum species, Alyssum linifolium, Brachycome lineariloba, Ixiolaena leptolepis, Isoetopsis graminifolia and others, growing a maximum of about two inches high, and all in flower. MOOTWINGEE. on the roadside: Flindersia maculosa — Leopard Wood, a tall conspicuous tree with spotted bark. Ptilotus polystachyus — Long-tails, many with the typical green inflorescences, and some with red inflorescences. In the reserve: Scaevola spinescens — a perfumed Fan Flower. Acacia aneura — the silver form of Mulga laden with pods. Eremophila duttonii — showing its large persistent calyx. Eremophila sturtii — aromatic Turpentine Bush with its lilac coloured flowers. Dodonea attenuata and D. lobulata each bearing pink to red winged fruits. Isotoma petraea — white flowers. Eriostemon linearis — an uncommon Waxflower. Mary K. DOERY. Melbourne Field Naturalists. 224 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The Origin of Generic Names of the Victorian Flora Part 3 — Latin, Greek and Miscellaneous (Continued from page 181 in a previous issue) By JAMES A, BAINES Typha, Gk typhe, name of a plant used for stuffing beds, such as Cat's-tail, T. angustifolia is called Bulrush in Vic- toria but Narrow-leaved Reedmace in England, where T. Jatifolia is usually called Bulrush, but Reedmace by those who call Scirpus lacustris the Common Bulrush. The biblical bulrushes, where the infant Moses was hidden, were almost certainly Cyperus papyrus, Papyrus (the source of paper). W. W. Skeat thinks the word means stem-rush, from Danish bul, stem (cognate with bole), while recognizing that it could have come from bull because of large size of flowering head. The genus gives its name to family Typhaceae, Our species are now in 3 taxa. *Ulex. The classical Lat name for Gorse or Furze. *U. europaeus, a prick- ly pest in many areas, is known nearly always in Victoria as Gorse, the other English names, Furze and Whin, being rarely heard here. Fam. Papilionaceae. *Ulmus. The Lat. name for the elm. The Dutch Elm suckers and persists, but the Common or English Elm is an orna- mental tree not strictly naturalized, Uncinia. Lat. uncinatus, barbed (from uncus, a hook). Victoria has 3 species, all native, and known as dif- ferent kinds of hook-sedge. Family Cyperaceae. *Urospermum. Gk oura, tail; sperma, seed; alluding to the long-beaked achene. ^U. picroides is native to Mediterranean Europe, and is naturaliz- ed in Vic. only at Mt. Arapiles, but is more widespread in S.A. The specific epithet indicates its resemblance to Picris (Ox-tongue); both genera are composites. September/October Urtica. The classical Lat, name of the nettle. Victoria has 1 introduced species, *U. urens, Small or Dwarf Nettle, Lesser Stinging Nettle, and 1 native species, U, incisa, Scrub Nettle, The penus gives its name to family Ur- ticaceae, which includes the Queensland Stinging Trees or Gympie-gympie, Dendrocnide (syn, Laportea). Utricularia. Lat. utriculus, a small leathern bottle (diminutive of uterus, à bag, hence belly, womb); alluding to the minute bladders. Victoria has 4 species, U. dichotoma, Fairies’ Aprons or Pur- ple Bladderwort, and 3 other species known as different kinds of bladder wort, The genus is in family Len- tibulariaceae. *Vaccaria, Lat. vacca, cow; because the plant was considered good fodder for cattle. Our species, *V. pyramidata, is known as Cow Soapwort (from its former generic name, Saponaria, 10 which it is very close) or Cow Basil (as given in Polunin’s ‘Flowers of Europe’). The genus is in Caryophyllaceae, *Valerianella. Diminutive of Valeriana, Valerian, which the plant resembles; they are both in family Valerianaceae. Valeriana was the classical Lat, name. Our species, *V. eriocarpa, although known as Italian Corn-salad, is native to Western às well as Mediterranean. Europe, The Lat, name probably came from valere, to be healthy, in allusion to the medicinal use of valerian for nervousness and hysteria. Our other species, "V. locusta, Lamb's Lettuce, is also known as Corn Salad. (To be continued) 225 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Annual General Meeting Monday 12 May 1980 The Minutes of the previous Annual General Meeting were read and confirm- ed. The President, Dr B. Smith, read the annual report for the year 1979/80. He made mention of the many activities already held and planned for the Centenary year, in particular the Centenary meeting, which was opened by the Club's Patron, His Excellency, Sir Henry Winneke, and at which the main address was given by Dr. J. H. Willis. Other important events during the year were the presentation of the Natural History Medallion to Miss Helen Aston, and of Certificates of Honorary Membership following 40 years of continuous membership, to Professor J. S. Turner, Mr Lamrock and Mr N. Lothian. The President also mentioned the many Group and Club activities, including an additional excur- sion instituted for the more active members, the continued high standard of the Naturalist, and the hard work and dedication of the Council and Ex- ecutive. The Treasurer, Mr D. McoInnes, presented his report, with mention of in- creased membership subscriptions, the cost of printing the Naturalist, sales of back issues and books, and expenditure in relation to the Natural History Medallion. Elections were then held for members of Council and for the various Offices for the following year. Among those elected were Dr. Brian Smith for a fur- ther term as President, Mr J. Martindale as Vice-President and Miss W. Clark as Secretary. The position of Treasurer re- mains vacant. Botany Group The Botany Group were hosts for the evening and presented the main topic, 226 “Ferns”. Miss Lester gave an introduc- tory talk on fern reproduction by alter- nation of generations. This was follow- ed by a large number of slides shown by Mr A. Morrison of both common and rare ferns and some close relatives of ferns. Correspondence was tabled by the Secretary, and forthcoming excursions and activities were announced by group representatives. There were several varied exhibits. Mr Morrison showed a prickly rasp fern (Doodia aspera) and Mr D. MclInnes both a rotifer colony, under the microscope, and eggs of a moth. Miss Carstairs reported the sighting of a white koala near Walkerville, and Mr I. Bates spoke of his observations of cater- pillars being parasitized by wasps. Microscopy Group The evening’s programme was prepared and hosted by the Microscopy Group. Several members had very in- teresting exhibits and each gave a detail- ed description of them. Mr D. McInnes had very thin sections of rocks under different lights to show the crystals and the colours. The head of a mosquito, shown by Mr I. Bates caused con- siderable interest. Other exhibits of Mr Bates were pollen grains, a Paropsis beetle and wasps. Mr H. Bishop's ex- hibit was spines of sea urchins, which vary in structure being sometimes hollow and sometimes solid, and which are darker in colour the deeper in the water they are found. Freshwater organisms were shown by Mr D. Went- worth. Some of these are anchored to water weeds by fine threads, and all possess a mastex to grind food. Two ear- ly microscopes dated approximately 1770 and 1870 were demonstrated by the Group's President, Mr J, Dawes, who spoke about the early history of microscopes. Film was shown by Mr P. Gennery of aphids taken under the microscope. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 (Continued from page 186) Second Thursday — Botany Group. Thursday, 13 November. Speaker: Dr P. A. Braody. Subject: Life in the ice and natural history of Antarctica. At the Conference Room, the Museum, Melbourne, at 8.00 p.m. Good parking — enter from Latrobe St. First Monday — Marine Biology and Entomology Group. Monday, 1 December. ABC meeting. Supper. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. Botany Group — last Saturday. Saturday, 25 October. Langwarrin and Cribb Point. Saturday, 29 November. Gembrook and Beenak. Day Group — third Thursday. Thursday, 20 November. Cherry Lake and beach walk, Seaholme. Meet at Altona station (south side) 11.30 a.m. Williamstown train leaves Flinders St at 10.46 a.m. (platform 6 or 7). Change at Newport. Bring binoculars. Leader: M. McKenzie (68 3119). No December meeting. LR——————————————————————————————— NEW BOOK PUBLISHED IN SEPTEMBER * Australian Mammals’’ A Field Guide for New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia & Tasmania. by Jack Hyett & Noel Shaw 270 pages Hard Cover 130 Illustrations 190 species of Native and Introduced Mammals Price $16.95 (Discount to Members) Postage 50km $1.00 Vic. $1.40 Interstate $2.40 Order from Sales Officer F.N.C.V. A review of this book will be published as soon as possible. Modern Victorian vascular plant checklists now available Beauglehole, A.C., 1980. ‘Victorian Vascular Plant Checklists — 13 Study Area and 24 Grid Distribution'. Available from Portland Field Naturalists Club, PO Box 470, Portland, Victoria 3305, for $6 a copy including postage. This publication of 210 pages comprises two up-to-date Checklists: (A) The distribution according to the Vic- torian Land Conservation Council 13 Study Areas with Families alphabetical within the four vascular plant groups — ferns, conifers, monocotyledons and dicotyledons. There are 182 Families, 959 Genera and 3542 species in- volved. (B) The distribution according to the 24 Major Grids with Genera and species alphabetical for convenience. Approximately September/October 7700 individual Major Grid records have been added in the past decade. In both Checklists computer numbers and both scientific and common names are given to assist a wide spectrum of interested observers and recorders. Comparisons of Study Areas and Major Grids highlights the value of plant recording for distribution and conservation purposes. Both Family and Genera Index are provid- ed. The large Victorian Map clearly illustrates the 13 Study Areas, 24 Major Grids and ap- proximately 1000 Minor Grid boundaries. Beauglehole’s earlier publications ‘The Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee and Corangamite-Otway areas of Victoria’ are available from the same address for $5 per copy. 227 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable SIR HENRY WINNEKE, KCMG, KCVO, OBE, KStJ, QC. Key Office-Bearers 1980-1981 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Treasurer: Subscription Secretary: F.N.C.V. C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Editor: Mr. R. WALLIS, C/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544. Librarian: Mr. P. KELLY, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Assistant Librarian: Miss M. J. LESTER, 4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra, 3141 (26 1967) Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161 (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. MICHAEL McBAIN, 19 Foster St, St Kilda, 3182 (534 2293) Day Group: C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Mammal Survey: Mr. RAY GIBSON, 26 McCulloch Street, Nunawading, 3131 (874 4408) Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (596 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. I. F. MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 1194) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1980 MEUNNDLNL 0 1511222548 De perm p oras ERE rS LEER: birtrE dimi yi Ro erae vg rS £e $12.00 Uaec ud SV TAE EET D, TATTOO ee ee oe koe cU WEE EIECTUS A $14.50 DIENEN Sand Delireg Personb s. or Iur Ta dad Dey ect cae Dd Fan dicun e e pneri prev dr s $10.00 coque oeil Viola darte creed e LTD LE RE DISCE TETTE TU TRRERRRTRENET a ANN A $12.00 DEM ioso922 correr ose ea date cube rU ep eva d fes EE S VINAR N $2.50 ES MLSS CRN SY POLLAN SES 20V 871 ye Pete LE ching TETEN OTa $10.00 Doce bSobHontioMietorian Neturnlist i... X 20 V beer sli eh rrr chev tasnaeestbns liven etlicerste $12.00 MEME c2 Le Sre:d si Gres rito seit bce EL SR eLRaA4es zit oa au All Yu dO $1.75 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. 69 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE FNCV DIARY OF COMING EVENTS GENERAL MEETINGS At the National Herbarium, the Domain, South Yarra. Monday, 8 December, 8.00 p.m. Programme hosted by the Hawthorn Junior FNC. Monday, 12 January, 8.00 p.m. Members night. Intending speakers (particularly those with slides) should contact Brian Smith or Wendy Clark beforehand. New Members — November/December meetings. Ordinary Barrie Bolton, 4 Viewbank Rd, Glen Iris. Mark Cavill, 202 Monbulk Rd, Emerald. David Cowan, 52 Roberts St, Frankston. Maire Devanne, St Andrew's Hospital, Cathedral Place, East Melbourne. Julien Duclos, 17 Bolton Ave, Hampton. David Frusher, 432 Hawthorn Rd, South Caulfield. Peter Gell, 22 Kenmace St, Mont Albert North. L. Hanks, 484 Abbotsford St, North Melbourne. Sigrid Kraemers, Dept. of Geography, Melbourne University. Ian Mansergh, 7 Hallcroft St, East Hawthorn. William Norris, 4/25 Vickery St, Bentleigh. Donna Prest, 20 Yardley St, Maidstone. Stephen Reilly, 94 Collins St, Thornbury. Bruce Rigby, 22 Victoria Ave, Canterbury. Catherine Zerbe, 65 Anderson's Creek Rd, East Doncaster. Joint Kate Burchell & M. Canaider, 100 Napier St, South Melbourne. Nicholas Dudley & Jacqui Scott, 16 Kumala Rd, Bayswater. Mr M. H. & Mrs U. N. Griffiths, 19/166 West Toorak Rd, South Yarra. Bryan & Margaret Walker, 4 Oxford St, Malvern. Country Susin Churchill, 100 Hull Rd, West Pennant Hills, N.S.W. FNCV EXCURSIONS Saturday, 17 — Sunday, 25 January. Mt Kosciusko. See September/October Naturalist for details. Sunday, 1 February. Flinders — Marine biology. Leader: Dr Brian Smith. Bring containers for specimens. The coach will leave Batman Ave at 9,30 a.m. Fare $6.50. Bring two meals. Saturday, 7 — Monday, 9 March. Castlemaine. This is the weekend when the Victorian Field Naturalists Clubs Association has its annual get- together, this year to be hosted by the Castlemaine Field Naturalists Club. Short half-day excursions have been prepared as well as evening meetings. Further details will be given in the next Naturalist and at General Meetings. A coach has been chartered for the weekend and accommodation booked on a B & B basis at a cost of $60.00 per per- son for the weekend. Bookings should be made with the Excursion Secretary accompanied by a $10.00 deposit. The coach will leave Flinders St from the Gas and Fuel Corporation at 8.30 a.m. on Satur- day, 7th. Bring a picnic lunch. Preliminary notices: The Arnhemland-Kimberleys safari mentioned in the last Naturalist is booked out but it is planned to run a second trip starting 5th September, 1981, with a similar itinerary. Special study trips: Contact Wendy Clark for details (A.H. 859-8091). Saturday, 21 — Sunday, 22 February. Bat-catching expedition to the Daylesford region. Bring all camping gear and food. Sunday, 22 March. Fossil excursion to limestone quarry at Geelong. (Continued on page 271) Ihe Victorian Naturalist Volume 97, Number 6 November/December 1980 Centenary Year 1880-1980 ISSN 0042-5184 Editor: Robert L. Wallis Assistant editor: F. Dane Panetta Editorial Committee: H. Cohn, R. Kent, B. Smith The Frogs of French Island and Phillip Island by M. J. Littlejohn . 232 The Orange-bellied Parrot: Species Endangered by Improperly Assessed Development by R. Charles Anderson, Valda Dedman andiGhriepDodslitys s ac CAL arate: CHB a eco ER AE 235 Deletion of Victorian Vascular Plants and Their Grid Distribution DV AT CSBeaugishoIe Am PN TOTEM Er reden 247 The Flora and Avifauna of Dannevig, Norman and Wattle Islands, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria by F. I. Norman, R. S. Brown and: M» Deersorn- +r: aec OTHER ads d 249 Observations on The Vulnerability of Two Species of Wattled Bats (Chalinolobus) to Avian Predators by R. A. Young............. 258 Extension of The New South Wales Range of The White-footed Dunnart (Sminthopsis leucopus Gray) by D. H. King. ........... 263 Aragonite from Melbourne by A. W. Beasley.................- 266 Cover illustration: Spotted Grass Frog (Limnodynastes tasmaniensis) Photograph by R. Gaymer The Frogs of French Island and Phillip Island By M. J. LITTLEJOHN f Introduction The terrestrial faunas of continental islands often are of considerable biogeographic interest for they may show the effect of area on taxonomic diversity, or may reflect the changes in the fauna of the adjacent mainland after the formation of the islands following the late Pleistocene eustatic rise in sea level. Accordingly, the amphibian faunas of the two large islands in Westernport Bay: French Island (16835 ha) and Phillip Island (10100 ha) were investigated and compared with that of the coastal areas on the adjacent mainland. Both islands are of low relief (mostly below 150 m), and are located between 145° 05’ and 145° 30’ east longitude and between 38° 15’ and 38° 35’ south latitude. The average annual precipitation in this area ranges from 700 mm to 900mm with rain in all months, but with a slight winter maximum (Central Planning Authority 1968). Mean maximum and mean minimum temperatures at Cowes (on Phillip Island) are 18.8°C and 10.3°C respectively; January and February are the warmest months (mean maxima 24.2°C and 24.5°C), and July and August are the coldest months (mean minima 6.9°C and 7.3°C) (Central Planning Authority 1968). The natural vegetation associations on Phillip Island have been greatly modified by the activities of European man, and very few undisturbed areas remain (Seddon 1975). However, about half of the area of French Island is crown land, and has been retained in a relatively unmodified state (Land Conservation Council 1973). Methods Most of the distributional data were obtained by making road traverses in a t € € € —IÜ— t Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052. 232 vehicle when calling frogs can be identified by their characteristic male breeding calls (Littlejohn and Martin 1969). Previously available information was summarized by Brook (1979), and only a few records were listed for French Island and Phillip Island. Additional information was obtained from general collecting in the study areas. While Phillip Island was visited on several occasions, mainly in the autumn and spring, French Island was only visited once (October 7-11, 1979), when extensive transects were made through most of the accessible areas of the island. Data for the adjacent mainland, additional to those summarized by Brook (1979), were obtained by making transects in the autumn and spring during 1979 and 1980. Results French Island Three species: Litoria ewingi, Limnodynastes dumerili insularis and Ranidella signifera, are common and widespread on the island, and were calling strongly and breeding during early October. Series of specimens of each of these species were obtained at a dam, 0.6 km W of McLeod. Two adults of Litoria raniformis were collected 1.0 km NE and 3.5 km W of McLeod, at the eastern end of the island. Crinia haswelli was heard calling at six localities in the central and eastern areas of the island (1.5 km S of Clump Lagoon; 1.0 km SW, 2.0 km SSW and 3.5 km SSE of Mount Wellington; 0.6 km W and 1.0 km NE of McLeod), and five specimens were obtained. Four specimens of Pseudophryne semimarmorata, an autumn-breeding species (Brook 1980), were found in the McLeod farm area; this taxon was the only species recorded from the island by Brook (1979). Phillip Island Litoria Four species: L. ewingi, Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 verreauxi, L, d. insularis and R. signifera occur commonly over most of the island. They utilize farm dams, roadside drains, and natural swamps for breeding, and strong choruses of all species were heard in the spring. Adults of L, raniformis were seen at farm dams and by roadside drains in the Rhyll- Cowes area, and this species presumably occurs elsewhere on the island. No other species of anurans were detected, even though repeated transects were made through apparently suitable areas during their breeding seasons. Brook (1979) indicated that three species occur on Phillip Island: L. ewingi, L.d. insularis and R. signifera. Mainland Coastal Areas of Westernport Bay All seven species found on the islands also occur on the adjacent mainland (Brook 1979, Littlejohn unpublished observations), together with three additional species: Geocrinia victoriana, Limnodynastes peroni and Limnodynastes tasmaniensis (southern call race) (Brook 1979, Littlejohn unpublished observations). Thus far, C. haswelli has only been found in a limited area at the southern edge of Hastings (Littlejohn unpublished observations). The autumn-breeding species, G. victoriana, while common in the wetter and elevated regions of western Gippsland and the northern Mornington Peninsula, has only been found close to the coast between Grantville and The observations). The remaining eight species are common and widespread in coastal mainland areas of Westernport (Brook 1979, Littlejohn unpublished observations). Discussion and Summary The anuran species present on French Island, Phillip Island, and the adjacent coastal mainland are summarized in Table 1. There are six species on French Island, and five species on Phillip Island, with four species being common to both islands. C. haswelli and P. semimarmorata are found only on French Island, and L. verreauxi only on Phillip Island. Ten species occur on the adjacent mainland, including G. victoriana, L. peroni and L. tasmaniensis, which are not found on either island. It is possible that G. victoriana is part of the fauna of French Island, because the island was only visited in spring; this autumn-breeding species is secretive out of its breeding season, and thus could have been missed. Only observations during the autumn (April-May) can decide this question. It is considered most unlikely that L. peroni and L. tasmaniensis occur on either island, or that C. haswelli and P. semimarmorata are on Phillip Island, because surveys were made during the breeding seasons of these species. It is interesting to note that P. semimarmorata was heard in chorus at San Remo, but was not heard on the eastern end of Phillip Island on Gurdies (Littlejohn unpublished the same evening, even though Table 1 Anuran species composition of the islands and adjacent mainland of Westernport Bay Adjacent Species French Phillip Coastal Island Island Mainland Crinia haswelli + 2 + Geocrinia victoriana 3 4 Limnodynastes dumerili insularis + + + L. peroni - H + L. tasmaniensis - g + Litoria ewingi + + ^ L. raniformis + + + L. verreauxi - T 4 Ranidella signifera + + + Pseudophryne semimarmorata + - + TOTAL 6 5 10 November/December 233 apparently suitable habitats were present. It has been estimated that the drowning of Westernport Bay began about 10,000 years ago with the recovery of the world sea level after the last glacial period of the Pleistocene Epoch, and that the present coastal configuration was assumed about 5,000 to 6,000 years ago (Marsden and Mallett 1975). The absences of the very common mainland species, L. tasmaniensis, L. verreauxi and P. semimarmorata on one or both islands are particularly interesting, for apparently suitable habitats are present (Littlejohn unpublished observations). L. tasmaniensis and P. semimarmorata occur on Flinders Island, and L. peroni on King Island (Littlejohn and Martin 1974), so that they clearly were in the Bass Strait area at the time of lower sea levels. These absences are difficult to explain. Recent historical changes may account for the elimination of these species from the island faunas; however, the species occur in similarly-modified habitats on the adjacent mainland (Littlejohn unpublished observations). Presumably, chance effects have operated, based on the relatively small sizes of the islands and associated small population sizes of species of the endemic fauna, making local extinction a more likely event (MacArthur and Wilson 1967), Littlejohn and Martin (1974) have summarized the available information on the relationship between number of species and area of an island for other middle-latitude continental islands of Australia. Flinders Island (1329 km?) and King Island (1101 km?) each have six species of anurans, Maria Island (96 km?) has five species, and Deal Island (ca 16 km?) lacks amphibians. The 234 potential number of species available to colonize these islands was estimated to be ten (Littlejohn and Martin 1974), the same number available to colonize French Island and Phillip Island (Table 1). French Island (168 km?) with six species, and Phillip Island (101 km?) with five species, are thus comparable to Maria Island, which was isolated from Tasmania at about the same time as the Westernport islands. Acknowledgements The field surveys were carried out with the support of the Australian Research Grants Committee (Grant D17715598R). Dr G. F. Watson assisted with part of the survey of French Island; he also provided valuable comments on the manuscript. REFERENCES Brook, A.J. (1979). Atlas of Frogs of Victoria. Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne. Publication No, 2, Brook, A.J. (1980). The breeding seasons of frogs in Victoria and Tasmania. Victorian Nat. 97: 6- ll. Central Planning Authority (1968). Resources Survey: West Gippsland Region. Government Printer: Melbourne. Land Conservation Council (1973). Report on the Melbourne Study Area. Land Conservation Council: Victoria. Littlejohn, M.J. and Martin, A.A. (1969). Mating call as an aid to the identification of the frogs of the Melbourne area. Victorian Nat. 86: 126-127. Littlejohn, M.J. and Martin, A.A. (1974). The Amphibia of Tasmania. In: Biogeography and Ecology in Tasmania. (W. D. Williams, ed.). Junk: The Hague. pp. 251-289. MacArthur, R.H. and Wilson, E.O. (1967). The Theory of Island Biogeography. Princeton University Press: Princeton. Marsden, M.A.H. and Mallett, C.W. (1975). Quaternary evolution, morphology, and sediment distribution, Westernport Bay, Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 87: 107-138. Seddon, G. (1975). Phillip Island: Capability, Conflict and Compromise. Centre for Environmental Studies, University of Melbourne. Publication No. 4. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 The Orange-bellied Parrot: Species Endangered by Improperly Assessed Development By R. CHARLES ANDERSON? VALDA DEDMAN * CHRIS DOUGHTY # Introduction Study Objectives The study was designed to: i) develop a simple method of assess- ing the status of and to propose management strategies for an en- dangered species; ii) involve naturalists groups, govern- ment and private agencies; iii) determine habitat/behaviour inter- relationships of the Orange-bellied Parrot and related Neophema Species. Orange-bellied Parrot: Life History The Orange-bellied Parrot (Neophema chrysogaster) (hereafter referred to as ''The Parrot’’) is not a well known species. Jarman (1965) For- shaw (1969), Milledge (1972), Loyn and Chandler (1978) and Lane et al, (1979) have prepared valuable reviews of this Parrot’s biology. Most individuals of this Parrot are presumed to undertake a yearly return migration from Tasmania to the mainland. About March to April a group of the Parrots migrate from some of the breeding grounds in south west Tasmania (Brown & Wilson, 1980) to probably either King Island and/or Vic- toria and South Australia. The Parrot(s) arrive in April or May at King Island and usually depart in July (Jarman 1965). However, Hinsby (1946) states the Parrot can still be found on the West Tasmanian Coast in winter. [n October, the Parrots migrate in groups from areas in Victoria presumably to Tasmania via King Island. + c/- Dept. Applied Biology and Environmental Science Ballarat C.A.E., Mt. Helen, 3350 * ¢/- Geelong Field Naturalists, 69 N. Valley Road, Highton, 3216 8 c/- Bird Observers Club Victoria, Box 2167T, G.P.O., Melbourne, Vic. 3001 November/December Large numbers (‘‘several thousand’’) of the Parrot have been seen in spring to summer of 1836, 1886 and 1918 (Ashby and Morgan in Jarman (1965) ). These appear to be very rare eruptions of the population in coastal South Australia. (Ashby and Morgan in Jarman (1965) ). This other population may breed in South Australia, (L. Delroy, pers. comm.) and may or may not migrate to Tasmania. In the Sydney area of New South Wales, the Parrot has un- fortunately not been reliably observed for over 70 years and is presumably ex- tinct here, (Jarman 1965; Sharland 1974). Parrot Behaviour The Parrot can be distinguished with some field experience from other Neophema Parrot species. Distinguishing features of the Parrot in- clude: — the warning call: a rapid 'chitter- chitter', close to a buzzing sound; — the bright green, grass coloured back, particularly in the male; — the lack of yellow near the pale/dark blue patches over the eye; — less dark blue (about 2 mm) than pale blue on the edge of the wing. The Parrot’s feeding, roosting, resting, calling, flying, breeding, and other behaviour has been very little described. Breeding in the wild has been poorly documented with only few, uncertain natural records. The Parrot was thought to breed in nests on the ground (Morgan in Jarman (1965) but tree hollows (Sharland and Hinsby in Jarman (1965); Belcher 1902; North 1912; Brown & Wilson 1980) appear to be the norm, In captivity, the Parrot was bred successfully in Australia, (Gokel 1975) and in Holland (Swaenepoel, 1972). 235 Figure 1. The Orange-bellied Parrot (Neophema Chrysogaster) Photograph: Cyril Loubshare. Other activities such as a soft tinkling call in flight or chirping when feeding are little described (Jarman 1965; Forshaw 1974). Habitat Most sightings of the Parrot have been coastal in the three states. Very few inland sightings have occurred and are generally no more than 20-50 miles inland in lake or woodland areas. Additional possible inland sightings in 236 Victoria have been reported at Port Campbell in 1979 and Lake Reeve (P. Goldstraw, pers. comm.). Previously, Jarman (1965) indicated the Parrot may have been seen at Woolsthorpe, Naringal and Lake Colac. In South Australia and Victoria, the Parrot’s prime habitat has been coastal salt marsh, adjacent grassland, and introduced plant communities. In Tasmania, the Parrot is regularly seen in coastal grassland, heath and eucalypt woodlands (Milledge 1972). Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Saltmarsh Community: Victoria The distribution of the Saltmarsh Shrubland Community was surveyed in Victoria and found to be primarily coastal and occasionally inland in the Mallee (Carr et a/ 1979; Willis 1970, 1972). However, Arthrocnemum arbusculum — dominated saltmarsh totals only a few hundred hectares from Breamlea to Corner Inlet (M. Barson, pers. comm.). Saltmarsh of other types, i.e. A. halocnemoides occurs elsewhere on the southern Australian coast and on various offshore islands (Specht et al 1974; Barson 1976; Barson & Calder 1976; Saenger et al 1977; Butler 1977; Kirkpatrick 1977; Kratochril 1972). In general, this type of Salt Marsh community is limited to a zone of about two hundred metres inshore and is about 1.2 metres in height if dominated by A. arbusculum and 0.3m high if dominated by A. halocnemoides. Saltmarsh plant species have a very specific salinity requirement related to elevation, rainfall, tidal and ground water influences (Clarke & Hannon 1967, 1969, 1970, 1971). South Australia/Tasmania Saltmarsh Community: The Parrot prefers coastal habitat (Jarman 1976; Milledge 1972; Loyn & Chandler 1978). There would be about 100 and 400 km of coastline in South Australia and Tasmania with a potential habitat of thousands and several thousands ha., respectively. Only a small proportion is apparently used as evidenced by sightings of the Parrot. Methods There were two objectives to the study and hence there were two field groups, designated Habitat and Parrot. These parties worked simultaneously on each specific sighting. For each sighting, the following was recorded on a proforma: Habitat Data and Mapping — the plant species within a three metre radius and vegetation association type November/December — the degree of flowering and seeding of each species and in particular, species on which the Parrot(s) fed — the height of each species and the Parrot(s) height range above the ground — the time of day, general weather and other physical characteristics 1:10,000 or 1:2500 scale maps were used for habitat mapping. These were prepared from blow-ups of Victorian Crown Lands & Survey Department Black and White Aerial photographs. From this and ground observations, vegetation was identified (Bridgewater 1974; Willis 1970, 1972) and classified according to a combined Specht/Land Conservation Council of Victoria type, (Specht et al 1974; Land Conservation Council of Victoria 1973). The species composition and structure and approximate area of each habitat association type was mapped from aerial and ground observations. Parrot Study The following was also recorded on a pro forma — — number(s) and individual(s) group(s) — activity: feeding, roosting, flying (direction and height above ground) breeding, resting, etc. — length of time spent on this activity and whether human observation had any effect — any other comments Field groups met at a study site in the morning and the habitat was covered in a standard direction by one to three groups of individuals, walking, wherever possible, with only 15 metres between them. An experienced observer accompanied each group and if possible, was between each observer. If a Parrot was sighted then the group recorded data for up to 20 minutes and a 150 cm coded wooden stake was left at a site. Disturbance of Parrots was minimized and any disturbance due to survey was noted. This method was adapted for use from a study on the Ground Parrot (Pezoporus wallicus wallicus) in N.S.W. (Forshaw & Fuliagar, pers. comm.). The various study reports from each sex(es) of 237 date were then confirmed and compiled as soon as possible. Plant specimens which were difficult to identify were forwarded to the National Herbarium of Victoria. A summary of study dates and localities is given in Table 3. N PORT PHILLIP The Spit BAY Point Wilson GEELONG BELLARINE PENINSULA Swan, Island LED Scale 1 250000 Figure 2. Location of The Spit (Pt. Wilson) and Swan Island. Results Feeding Behaviour In half of the sightings (Table 1) the Parrot was observed in behaviour classified as feeding. A very large proportion — about 60% of the feeding sightings were on Arthrocnemum arbusculum (Shrubby Glasswort). About 30% of the feeding sightings were from the grassland association. The Parrot did feed on 22 plant species overall. In 1978 only a small proportion of the feeding was on introduced species, mainly grasses. In 1979, a very large proportion of the feeding was on introduced grasses (Table 1 & 2). In most sightings the Parrot fed on only 2 or 3 plant species (Tables 1 & 2). The Parrot fed either on A. arbusculum individuals of an average height of about 1.25 — 1.86 metres, or on the ground. In 1979, feeding patterns reversed and the Parrot fed in the Saltmarsh association only 29% of the time and fed in the grassland association 65% of the time. 238 Over-night Roosting Activity The Parrots were seen flying at heights of about 100-200 m when arriving at Swan Island. This occurred twice in the morning from a south- easterly direction and once leaving at night in that direction. A similar observation of this Parrot leaving at dusk was recorded at the Spit (Chandler pers. comm.). Resting, Flying, Calling and Other Activities Resting and Flying behaviour were about equally represented in the remaining two quarters of the sightings. Most flights were 50 m or less off the ground (Table 1). In only four sightings overall did the Parrot vocalize either the rapid ‘‘chitter-chitter’’ buzzing warning call, a soft chirping when feeding or tinkling sound in flight. In two sightings, one Parrot was seen preening by water and six Parrots were observed near à water hole at Swan Island but not drinking. No trends in these sightings regarding the Parrot's behaviour in relation to the month, time of day or percent flowering/seeding of species were found. In about half of the sightings there was some flowering/seeding present (Table 4). No substantial differences between behaviour and habitat interrelationships were found between the Spit and Swan Island. Clearly, a study of this type should be several years in duration. Parrots migrated from The Spit after 24th September, 1978, earlier than from Swan Island. In 1979, migration at Swan Island commenced about the beginning to middle of October. Possible Sex/Immature Ratios Data was available for a few sightings at two locations. In one Parrot, a mixed pattern of yellow and green feathers was noted on the back. A similar unsexed specimen was noted in the Victorian National Museum collection. The male/female ratio observed at The Spit was approximately 1:1 (table 4). On Swan Island thirteen males were seen to Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 LAND TENURE Scale 1:80000 ICI Australia Melbou/rne Metropolitain Board |of Works Proposed State Wildlife Reserve monwealth plosives Reserve Point Wilson Figure 3. The Spit locality: vegetation and sightings. See text for explanation of symbols. possibly 8 or 9 females and one possible immature (Table 4). Habitat Mapping The three types of habitat mapped at The Spit (Figure 2) are listed in Table 5. Habitat types at Swan Island were fairly similar. Generally speaking there was more native Grassland present near the Spit than at Swan Island (Figure 3), but more Sand dune/Strandline Vegetation present at Swan Island. Precise figures are not yet available. Habitat Utilization The sightings were concentrated in the south-western and north-western sectors November/December of The Spit at areas marked with an asterisk in Figure 2. The sightings on Swan Island were as dense per unit area (32 sightings/ha) as those at The Spit but were found only in the western sector (marked with an asterisk) in 1978. In 1979, some sightings were also made at the area marked with an X. Discussion Field Identification of Neophema species In the case of Orange-bellied Parrots, it may now be possible in the field to distinguish the female and juvenile. There are few clear cut differences except that the adult male is 239 Table 1 — Percentage of sightings of Orange-bellied Parrot related to activity/plant species: 1978 VEGETATION FEEDING FLYING ROOSTING CALLING FLUSHED TOTAL TYPE/ASSOC. FAMILY/ SPECIES Saltmarsh Arthrocnemum SHRUBLAND arbusculum 28.6 12.6 1572 2.3 1.5 58.2 Suaeda australis 2 0.6 1.9 2.3 0.6 7.7 Salicornia quinqueflora 0.7 0.4 1.1 Salomus repens I2 1.2 Frankenia pauciflora 0.5 0.4 0.9 Distichlis distichophylla 1.2 1.2 ASSOCIATION TOTAL 70.3 Remanent & Acacia sp. 2:3 2:3 Introduced WOODLAND/ *Cupressaceae sp. 2.3 2.3 GRASSLAND *Stenotaphrum Secundatum 1.2 1.2 Poa annua 0.9 0.9 Poa poiformis 0.6 0.6 *Sherardia arvensis 0.1 0.1 *Cerastium glomeratum 0.9 0.4 1.3 *Trifolium dubium 1:2 1.1 23 Triglochin mucronata 0.7 0.7 Plantago varia 0.8 0.8 Disphyma austrate 0.6 0.6 Spergularia media 0.7 0.2 0.9 Graminae sp. (Unknown) 4.5 4.5 “Brassica sp. 0.3 0.3 Cotula coronopifolia 0.3 0.3 Rhagodia sp. 0.3 0.3 *Rumex sp. 0.3 0.3 Lepidium 0.2 0.2 *Sonchus oleraceus 0.2 0.2 SAND DUNE 20.1 & STRANDLINE Atriplex paludosa 2.4 2.3 3.3 7.0 A. cinera 0.3 0.3 Leptospermum sp. n2 1.2 8.5 50.6 15:5. 21.9 4.6 73. 99.9 * INTRODUCED SPECIES DATE: 1979 FEEDING FLYING ROOSTING CALLING OTHER TOTAL VEGETATION ASSOCIATION FAMILY/ SPECIES Saltmarsh Grassland Arthrocnemum 10.8 10.8 *Graminae 54 5.4 Poa sp. -— 27 *Arctotheca calendula 2.7 — 8.1 29.1 5.4 64.8 — 2.7 =% 2.7 100 QUEENS¢LIFFE SWAN ISLAND (J Grass/Unknown N salt Marsh Sand Dunes - - Study Area was Westof --- line Scale 1:100000 Figure 4. Swan Island locality: vegetation and sightings. distinguishable from the female and juveniles. However, a pale yellow underwing bar seems to be only found in females and juveniles. The bars are much reduced and not so bright in the female, (P. Brown, pers. comm.) Other Neophema species, e.g. the Blue-wing Parrot are similar but even in poor weather conditions these 2 species can be observed and differentiated in the field from about 20-35 m. Characteristics of Immature Parrots — Underwing Bar Neophema It was interesting to note the presence of an underwing bar in flight and a horn/orange coloured beak in one Parrot, possibly indicating an immature (A. Isles pers. comm, Forshaw 1974). Loyn & Chandler (1978) observed the presence of 3 immatures in about 92 Parrots. Table2 Locality and the number of vegetation species on which the Parrot was observed DATE: 1978 THE SPIT SWAN ISLAND 30th July 18 — 19th August 3 3 3rd September 2 — 15th October 3 5 19th October N/A 2 3rd November — 16 2nd December November/December 241 Table3 Average Group size and range of number of parrots seen: 1978-79 GROUP SIZE AVERAGE GROUP SIZE DATE LOCALITY NO. OF SIGHTINGS (1978) THESPIT SWAN ISLAND OTHER* SP SW (*all O sightings) 30 July 2-11 N.D. Killarney Beach 4.3/8 N.D. Port Fairy 19 August 2-17 3-15 Edward's Pt. 5.4/7 7.6/6 Killarney Beach Port Fairy 3 September 2-5 — Killarney Beach 4.6/3 — Port Fairy 24 September 1-12 3-10 Killarney Beach 4/3 7.7/9 Port Fairy Pt. Henry 15 October — 2-15 — — 3.6/14 Cumulative Av. 4.7 5m 5 November — 2 — — 1.5/2 Overall av. 4.7/21 5.4/31 SWAN ISLAND DATE: 1979 GROUP SIZE AVERAGE GROUP SIZE/ NO. OF SIGHTINGS 29 April — — 3 June — — ] July — — 5 July 1-19 8.7/6 29 July 3-15 9.8/6 30 July 17 /\ 31 July 10 7 ] August 5 /l 5 August 13 /1 9 August 8 /l 12 August 0 /1 28 August 17 /1 4 September 1-15 10.5/6 6 September 11 September 7-24 13.4/5 12 September 2542 /l 13 September 12 /1 19 September 2 /l 24 September 21 /1 27 September 14 /1 30 September 4-24 11.279 Cumulative average 11.57/44 11 October 7 /l 15 October 6 /1 22 October 1 /\ 29 October 4 /l 30 October 5 /l 5 November 2 /l 11 November 0 /1 Overall average 10.47/51 NOTE: 2 sighted at Lake Connewarre on 17 July and 21 August, 1980 242 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Table4 Sex ratios by sighting and location : 1978 THE SPIT 6 males : 5 females? : l imm ? SWAN ISLAND 2 males : 1 female? : I imm ? 1 male: 1 female? : 9 males : 6 females? : SWANIS. TOTAL 12 males : 8 females? : | imm? OVERALL TOTAL 18 males : 13 females? : 2imm? Beak Colour The beak colour probably changes from orange horn colour to grey/black about 5-6 months after hatching. This and wing bar characteristics have been noted in aviary bred Blue-winged and Elegant Parrots but to varying degrees (Joseph 1979; A. Isles pers. comm.; Lewitzka/Hutchings pers. comm.; Gokel, 1975). Proposed Management of the Orange-bellied Parrot in Victoria With any endangered species, it is a common practice to delineate critical habitats for an animal's various activities (Ripley & Lovejoy 1979). Lane et al 1979 found the Parrot pecks about 10-12,000 times daily at Pt. Wilson in saltmarsh. Plant seeds here are minute with fleshy parts on the exterior that are apparently discarded. Roosting off the ground by one or more 'sentry' birds, that observe for predators, etc., occurs at Pt. Wilson and Tasmania (Lane et al 1979 a, b). It appears from our study that Saltmarsh Shrubland and adjacent Grassland of the Arthrocnemum arbusculum association is very critical preferred habitat for most activities of the Parrot in Victoria. The associated buffer of Salicornia Herbland, Sand Dune/Strandline and Woodland are also essential critical habitat. In particular, the habitat near Pt. Wilson, adjacent to the proposed I.C.I. Table5 Habitat types found at the Spit TYPE/ASSOCIATION Saltmarsh shrubland: plant is a seemingly irreplaceable habitat for this species. Over eighty per cent of the known population were seen at The Spit (F. Lobb, pers. comm.). Critical Questions The questions to answer regarding critical habitat ecology and behaviour still are: i) Where does the Parrot roost in Victoria at night? ii) Where do the Parrots breed and why are numbers of immature or yearling Parrots so low? Concern should also be raised at the low number(s) of the Parrot seen and that the overall population appears to be about 100, (B.O.C. in Geelong Regional Commission 1978; R.A.O.U. in Geelong Regional Commission 1978; Dedman 1979; Green 1978; Loyn and Chandler 1978) but more detailed surveys are required before the total population number can be ascertained. Concern should also be expressed that possibly only three immatures were seen out of the about 92 Parrots observed in the I.C.I. study, (Loyn and Chandler 1978). iii) Can we create more natural or other suitable coastal saltmarsh habitats, artificially feed and/or restock the wild population? iv) Why is the Parrot so reliant on this particular habitat? TYPICAL SPECIES Arthrocnemum, Suaeda, Salicornia Distichlis Sand dune and Strandline: Atriplex, Cakile, Melaleuca, Leptospermum Woodland/Grassland: November/December E. viminalis, Casuarina stricta Acacia, Poa, Stipa sp. 243 Figure 5. View of coastal study area. In Victoria, there is a critical scarcity of habitat, there being only a few hundred hectares. In South Australia and Tasmania, it appears that there is some other limiting factor(s) associated with the low total population. Several year's work still needs to be done — similar to the situation with the Whooping Crane, Peregrine Falcon, and Californian Condor overseas (Ripley & Lovejoy 1979). v) Most importantly, I.C.I. Australia must scientifically assess at Point Wilson all the potential effects of detrimental factors on the Parrot and other wildlife related to their establishing and maintaining the Petrochemical Plant. Will this species adapt if I.C.I.'s development is expected to disrupt its prime wintering habitat? Problems such as the following could arise: 1. Noise of the level that affects 244 wildlife and habitat will be generated (United States Environment Protection Authority 1971). 2. Groundwater and drainage changes could significantly alter the critical salt-marsh habitat (I.C.I. Australia 1978, 1979). 3. Levels of lighting and airborne chemicals proposed could be intense enough to be adverse to the Parrot and other wildlife. Parrots have a sense of smell (Bang & Cobb 1968; Mykytowycz 1978). Flames of off-shore drilling rigs in the northern North Sea have adversely affected and killed many birds (Sage 1979). Proposed Answers These critical questions could be answered by proposals to: i) appropriately study and band some Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 aviary bred Orange-bellied Parrots, provided there are adequate numbers and that radio tracking studies of aviary bred Blue-wing Parrots are successful. Leg banding of Orange-bellied Parrots and Blue-winged Parrots has been carried out in South Australia in the past and would probably require stainless steel bands (D. Purchase, pers, comm.). ii) search for the Parrot at all known past sighting localities simultaneously, provided the three State and Federal government bodies, several naturalist groups and private commercial interests can co-operate effectively. iii) assess the impact of the proposed plant at Pt. Wilson on the Parrot. LC.I. Australia has indicated in various reports, newspapers, and newsletters (I.C.I. Australia 1978; Australian Conservation Foundation 1978, 1979) that it will undertake essential and extensive impact studies but appears not to have done so (G. Wischer, B. Jenkins, pers. comm., 1979). This type of impact study has been carried out to assess the impact of a proposed Viewing Tower on a large Ibis colony near Kerang in Victoria, (C. Anderson, R. Weber, unpub. data 1977, 1978), overseas with a Power Plant, (Andrews and Anderson 1978), with Chemicals, (Ellison and Clearly 1978), in Australian Airports, (Van Tets et a/ 1977) and the Alaskan Arctic Pipeline, (McCourt et al 1974; Lenazy 1974; Gollop et al 1974; Salter and Davis 1974). Lanscaping and other devices cannot stop the effects of noise, lights and high towers (Sage 1979). LC.I. Australia will hopefully prove that the proposed plant will not contribute to the extinction of this rarest species. If it appears that the Parrot will not adapt, the onus is on I.C.I. Australia to devise and test, in conjunction with the appropriate parties, plans that will ensure the continuation of this species. November/December iv) When the World Wildlife Fund study of the Parrot begins in 1979, answers to these important questions to the Parrot’s survival must be provided. The future of one of the 1.U.C.N.’s (International Union for Conservation/Nature) and the I.C.B.P.'s (International Council for Bird Preservation) rarest parrots in the world is thus still very uncertain. Australian people will not have much to say for themselves if they stand by and let a species as rare as the Whooping Crane become ex- tinct. Summary The Orange-bellied Parrot (Neophema chrysogaster) was surveyed by volunteer naturalist observers, co- ordinated by the Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Victoria, to assess the Parrot's habitat and behaviour inter- relationships. The survey found the Parrot during 1978 in only two of six coastal survey locations. The total numbers of the Parrot seen were 25 individuals at the Spit (near Pt. Wilson) and 17 individuals at Swan Island. The Parrot was seen feeding in about a half of all sightings, mainly on Shrubby Glasswort (Arthrocnemum arbusculum) in 1978. The Parrots fed in grassland in about two-thirds of all sightings in 1979. Salt Marsh shrubland and contiguous coastal native or introduced grassland habitat are considered critical for feeding and other behaviour of the Parrot, and for the survival of this species in its wintering grounds in Victoria. Acknowledgements We wish to thank the sixty members of the Warrnambool and Geelong Field Naturalists Club and Bird Observers Club and other observers that participated in the 1978/79 surveys. The co-operation of the Fisheries and Wildlife of Victoria, South Australia and Tasmania, National Herbarium and Museum of Victoria, Melbourne 245 Metropolitan Board of Works, Commonwealth Department of Transport, Australian Army, C.S.LR.O. Division of Wildlife Research, Messrs D. Pike, G. Wischer of 1.C.1. Australia, F. Lobb, J. For- REFERENCES Andrews, C,B. & Anderson, M.P. (1978). Impact of a Power plant on the Ground-Water System of a Wetland. Groundwater. 16; 105-111. Australian Conservation Foundation Newsletter. Tjurkulpa Dec., 1978 and February, 1979. Bang, B.G. & Cobb. S. (1968) The size of Olfactory Bulb in 108 Species of Birds, The Auk, 85: 55-61. Barson, M.M. & Calder, D.M. (1976) Sites of Special Scientific Interest in the Victorian Coastal Region. Report on Botanical Aspects for the Town and Country Planning Board, School of Botany, University of Melbourne. Barson, M.M. (1976). Tidal Salt Marshes in Victoria Victoria's Resources 18(3): 11-14 and 20. Belcher, C.F. (1902), Birds of the District of Geelong, Australia: 188. Bridgewater, P. (1974), Artificial key to Saltmarsh Plants of Temperate Australia, Operculum, Jan- Mar: 16-24, Brown, P. & R, Wilson (1980), Orange-bellied Parrot Project RAOU Newsletter 43:1. Butler, A.J. (1977). Distribution of Sediments of Mangrove Forests in South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 10]; 35-44, Carr, G.W. & Kinhill Planners (1979). Survey of Victorian Coastal Salt Marsh Distribution in relation to the Orange-bellied Parrot, 1.C.1. Australia, Melbourne. Clarke, L.D. & Hannon, N.J. (1967) The Mangrove Swamp & Saltmarsh Communities of the Sydney District, I. Vegetation, soils and climate. J. Ecol. 55: 753-71. Clarke, L.D. & Hannon, N.J. (1969). The Mangrove Swamp & Saltmarsh Communities of the Sydney District. Il, The Holocoenitic complex with particular reference to physiography. J. Ecol. 57; 213-34, Clarke, L.D. & Hannon, N.J. (1970), The Mangrove Swamp & Saltmarsh Communities of the Sydney District. I1. Plant growth in relation to salinity & water logging. J, Ecol, 58: 351-69. Clarke, L.D. & Hannon, N.J. (1971). The Mangrove Swamp & Saltmarsh Communities of the Sydney District. IV. The Significance of Species Interaction. J. Ecol, 59: 535-53. Dedman, V. (1979). Orange-bellied Parrot Survey at Swan Island, Geelong Nat., 16: 2. Ellison, L,N. & Cleary, L, (1978). Effects of Human Disturbance on Breeding of Double- Crested Cormorants, The Auk. 95: 510-17. Forshaw, J. (1974). Australian Parrots. Melbourne, Geelong Regional Commission (1979). Report of the Hearing Committee to Amendment No. 6 to the Geelong Regional Interim Development Order Geelong Regional Commission, Geelong. Gokel, N. (1975). The Orange-bellied Grass Parakeet, Austral. Avicult, Jan.: 14. Gollop, M.A. and Davis, R.A. (1974). ''Gas compressor noise simulator disturbance to snow geese, Komakuk Beach, Yukon Territory, September, 1972". Disturbance to Birds by Gas 246 shaw, P. Gullan, Messrs Chandler, Lane and Loyn, Drs D. Evans, D. Purchase and B. Jenkins, A. Mclvey, Mrs Judith Rushford, Mrs Margaret Anderson, Mrs Ellen McCulloch and Dr D. Robertson was much appreciated. Compressor Noise Simulators, Aircraft. and Human Activity in the Mackenzie Valley and the North Slope, 1972. Edited by W.W.H. Gunn and LA. Livingston, Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol 14, Canadian Arctic Gas Study, Ltd., and Alaskan Arctic Gas Study Co, Gollop, M.A., Davis, R.A., Prevett, J.P., Felske, B.E. (1974). ‘Disturbance studies of terrestrial breeding bird populations: Firth River, Yukon Territory, June, 1972". Disturbance to Birds by Gas Compressor Noise Simulators, Aircraft and Human Activity in the Mackenzie Valley and North Slope, 1972. Edited by W.W.H, Gunn and J.A. Livingston, Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol. 14. Canadian Arctic Gas Study, Ltd., and Alaskan Arctic Gas Study Co., Arctic Institute of Canada, Montreal. Gollop, M.A., Goldsberry, J.R., Davis, R.A. (1974). “Effects of gas compressor noise simulator disturbance to terrestrial breeding birds, Babbage River, Yukon Territory, June, 1972". Disturbance to Birds by Gas Compressor Noise Simulators, Aircraft and Human Activity in the Mackenzie Valley and the North Slope, 1972. Edited by W.W.H. Gunn and J.A. Livingston, Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol. 14, Canadian Arctic Gas Study, Ltd., and Alaskan Arctic Gas Study Co. Arctic Institute of Canada, Montreal. Green, R.H. (1978). Birds of Tasmania. Launceston Museum, Tasmania. Hinsby, K.B. (1946). The Orange-Bellied Parrot, EMU 47:67. ICI. Australia Ltd, (1978). Point Wilson Development Outline of Proposal and Attachments. ICI Australia, Melbourne. ICI. Australia (1979). Point Wilson Plan of Development. ICI Australia, Melbourne, Jarman, H. (1965). The Orange-breasted Parrot. Austral. Bird Watcher, 2: 155-67. Joseph, L. (1979). Neophemas Newsletter: 2-3. Kirkpatrick, J.B. (1977). The Native vegetation of the West Coast Region, Tasmania. In M.R. Banks & J.B. Kirkpatrick (ed.) Landscape and Man, Royal Society of Tasmania, Hobart, Kratochril, M. (1972). Mangrove Swamp & Saltmarsh Communities in Southern Australia. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S. W. 97: 262-75. Land Conservation Council, Victoria (1973). Report on the Melbourne Study Area Report. Lane, B.A. & Kinhill Planners (1979)a Avifauna Study ICI Point Wilson Development Progress Report, March to June, 1979. ICL Australia, Melbourne. Lane, B.A. & Kinhill Planners (1979)b Results of a Study of the Orange-bellied Parrot in South-west Tasmania, ICI Australia, Melbourne. Lenarz, M. (1974). “The Reaction of Dall sheep to an FH-1100 helicopter" The Reaction of Some Mammals to Aircraft and Compressor Station Noise Disturbance, edited by R.D. Jakimchuk, Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol. 23, RAOU Atlas Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Canadian Arctic Gas Study, Ltd. and Alaskan Arctic Gas Study Co, Arctic Institute of Canada, Montreal, Quebec. Loyn, R. & Chandler, C, (1978). Avifauna Study, LC, Point Wilson Development. Progress Report June to October. Kinnaird Hill de Rohan & Young Pty. Ltd., Melbourne. McCourt, K.H., Feist, J.D., Doll, D., Russell, J.J, (1974). Disturbance Studies of Caribou and Other Mamunals in the Yukon & Alaska., 1972. Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol. 5, Canadian Arctic Gas Study Lid., and Alaskan Arctic Gas Study Co. Arctic Institute of Canada, Montreal. Milledge, D. (1972). The Orange-bellied Parrot in Tasmania. The S. A. Ornithologist, 26: 56-7. Mykytowyez, R. (1978) They follow their noses. Austral, Nat. Hist. 19: 143-9, North, A.J. (1912). Nests and Eggs of Birds found Breeding in Australia & Tasmania, Vol 3. Sydney, Australia Museum. Ripley, S.D. & Lovejoy, T.E., (1979), Threatened & Endangered Species Habitat. 7; 21-28, Saenger, P., Specht, M.M., Specht, RL., & Chapman, V.J. (1977). In Mangal & coastal salt- marsh communities in Australasia, V.J. Chapman (ed.) Wet Coastal Ecosystems, Elsevier, Amsterdam. Sage, B. (1979), Flare up over North Sea Birds. New Scientist 81: 464-8, Salter, R. & Davis, R.A., (1974). "Snow geese disturbance by aircraft on the North Slope, September, 1972". Disturbance to Birds by Gas Compressor Noise Simulators, Aireraft and Human Activity in the Mackenzie Valley and the North Slope, 1972, edited by W.W.H, Gunn and J.A. Livingston, Arctic Gas Biological Report Series, Vol. 14, Canadian Arctic Gas Study, Ltd., and Alaskan Gas Study Co. Sharland, M,S.R. (1947). Two Neophema Parrots Emu, 46; 258-64, Specht, R.L., Roe, E.M, & Boughton, V.H. (1974), Conservation of Major Plant Communities in Australia and Papua New Guinea. Aust, J, Bot., Suppl. No. 7. Swaenepoel, G. (1979), The Orange-bellied Grass Parakeet, Austral. Avicult. 1972/March: 37-43, United States Environment Protection Authority. (1971). Effects of Noise on Wildlife and Other Animals, van Tets, Vestjens, W.I,M., D'Andria, A.H. & Barker, R. (1977). Guide to the Recognition and Reduction of Aerodrome Bird Hazards, Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra, Willis, J.H. (1970). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria, Vol. 1, Melbourne University Press, Willis, J.H. (1972), A Handbook to Plants in Victoria, Vol, 2. Melbourne University Press. Deletion of Victorian Vascular Plants and Their Grid Distribution By A.C. BEAUGLEHOLE ! Introduction Since the publication of “A Hand- book to Plants in Victoria" by J. H. Willis (1970 & 1972) and ‘‘The Distribu- tion of Victorian Plants” by Churchill & de Corona (1972), the present author, with the help of others, has been compil- ing a list of species which have been deleted from the Victorian flora for various reasons e.g. now considered to be hybrids, or no longer recognized as distinct at species level; no records of spontaneous occurrence in Victoria etc. The author (1978, 1979 & 1980) has already published many of these, but at that time Major Grids were not specified. They are specified here as this affects the species totals for the Major Grids involved. * 3 Beverley Street, Portland, 3305. November/December In order to gain an appreciation of such discrepancies the author felt it is necessary to publish such information for the benefit of other workers. Criticisms, comments and suggestions to assist in further up-dating would be welcomed. Acknowledgement I wish to thank all those persons who have helped with up-dating of our Vic- torian flora (persons too numerous to mention individually). Deletion of Victorian vascular plants and their grid distribution The following list is based on the alphabetical arrangement of Churchill & de Corona (1972). 247 Symbols preceding names: F Form (Species in brackets) H Hybrid (Parents in brackets) N Not recognized for Victoria V Variety or subspecies (Species in brackets) * Species introduced to Victoria NOTE: GRIDS with CAPITAL LETTERS indicate that these affect assessment of Grid species totals i.e. the same Grid was recorded for both species and variety etc. (207 Grids are affected). Grids with small letters do not affect grid species totals i.e. such grids were only recorded once for such species. Grids follow name of plant. H Acacia grayana (A. brachybotrya x A. calamifolia) C V Acacia paucijuga (A. deanei) hlm Rvw H *Agropogon littoralis (*Polypogon monspeliensis x *Agrostis stolonifera) N F Aphanes pentamera (A. australiana) C F Asplenium adiantoides (A. falcatum) d e N Atriplex inflata AFGM N Atriplex muelleri AGP H Caladenia tutelata (Glossodia major x Caladenia deformis) D F Caleana sullivanii (Paracaleana minor) CDJ V Callitris verrucosa (C. preissii) ABC F Calochilus saprophyticus (C. campestris) EpV H Chiloglottis pescottiana (C. trapeziformis x C. gunnii) V H Cyathea marcescens (C. australis x C. cunninghamii) KTZ F Daviesia virgata dhjmnprStVWZ F Diuris brevissima (D. maculata) DHJMNS H Diuris palachila (D. maculata x D. pedunculata) DHJMNRT N Epilobium tasmanicum SV V Eucalyptus cephalocarpa (E. NRSW V Eucalyptus maidenii (E. globulus) twz V Eucalyptus stjohnii (E. globulus) jKnPrT N Eucalyptus stricta S N *Ficus carica Z N *Fumaria officinalis CMN ?H Grevillea williamsonii (?) D F Haloragis depressa (Gonocarpus micranthus) VZ N Haloragis glauca (Gonocarpus glauca) CGR F Haloragis rubra (Gonocarpus tetragynus) CN (D. mimosoides) cinerea) 248 F *Juncus acutiflorus (?) EJIKNQRSVW V Juncus fockei (J. holoschoenus) CDJMNVWZ N *Kickxia commutata J N Kochia villosa (Maireana villosa) abcfghmn (records belong to M. decalvans) V Lepidium dubium (L. aschersonii) JK F Leptospermum grandifolium (L. lanigerum) JNRSTVWZ N *Lupinus hirsutus BH N Luzula campestris cdehjkmnprstuvwxz N Mecodium dilatatum (Hymenophyllum dilatatum) S F Microtis biloba (M. unifolia) CDNTV F Microtis bipulvinaris (M. parviflora) CDEJP F Microtis holmesii (M. parviflora) T N Olearia stellulata E N *Oxalis tetraphylla W F Patersonia longifolia (P. sericea) Z H Persoonia lucida (P. levis x P. linearis) Z V Phebalium ovatifolium (P. squameum) sw V Phebalium ozothamnoides (P. squamulosum) vWZ F Pimelea collina (P. linifolia) DEJMNRSTW F Pimelea micrantha (P. curviflora) Cg N Potamogeton cheesemanii CD N Potamogeton lucens W F Potamogeton sulcatus (P. tricarinatus) a CgNRUVW F Prasophyllum colemaniae (P. odoratum) N F Prasophyllum gracile & P. frenchii (P. fuscum) bCDEHJJ (note J twice) kmNPrs F Prasophyllum | odoratum (P. patens) bcDEhJKMNPrSTvwZ N Pterostylis acuminata NRSVW F Pterostylis celans (P. nana) E F Pterostylis crypta (P. obtusa) T H Pterostylis toveyana (P. alata x P. concinna) DJNP N *Rubus scabripes EK H Senecio orarius (S. lautus x S. sp.) PTZ N Solanum eremophilum H N *Solidago canadensis KTW N Stylidium despectum CDEHJMNPRZ N Stylidium lineare VW HorF Thelymitra cyanea (T. renosa ?x) Z H Thelymitra irregularis (T. ixioides x T. carnea) ENTZ F Thelymitra murdochae (T. aristata) T F Thelymitra nuda (T. longifolia) CDP V Thelymitra rubra (T. carnea) DeJKMNpSTvWZ F Tieghemopanax multifidus sambucifolia) WZ (Polyscias Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 H Trymalium ramosissimum (T. daltonii x Spyridium parvifolium) DJ F *Vicia angustifolia (*V. sativa) AANPSTw REFERENCES 1. Beauglehole, A. C., 1978a. Alterations and addi- tions to the vascular flora of Victoria — Part 1. Victorian Nat. 95: 67-74. 2. Beauglehole, A. C., 1979, The Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee. Western Victorian Field Naturalists' Clubs Association: Portland. 99 pp. 3. Beauglehole, A. C., 1980 The Distribution and Conservation of Vascular Plants in the Corangamite-Otway Area, Victoria. Western Vic- torian Field Naturalists’ Clubs Association: Portland. 108 pp. 4. Churchill, D. M. & de Corona, A., 1972. The Distribution of Victorian Plants. Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne. 5. Willis, J. H. 1970 A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 1. 2nd. Ed. Melbourne Univ. Press, Melbourne, 6. Willis, J. H., 1972. A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 2. Melbourne Univ. Press, Melbourne. The Flora and Avifauna of Dannevig, Norman and Wattle Islands, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria By F. I. NORMAN , R. S. BROWN AND D. M. DEERSON f Introduction Gillham (1960, 1961, 1962) reported on aspects of the vegetation of eight Promontory islands. Since her visits the floristics of another island, Cliffy, have been discussed (Hope and Thomson 1971) and more recent observations on Rabbit and Citadel Islands have been presented (Norman 1967, 1970; Norman and Brown 1979, Norman and Harris 1980). As no botanical details have been provided previously for Norman and Wattle Islands, and Dannevig was last investigated in 1959, we present information collected on 12 December 1979 (Wattle) and 17 January 1980 (Norman and Dannevig). Observations on the avifauna are also summarised. Some climatic details for the Promontory lighthouse have been provided elsewhere (Hope and Thomson 1971). Dannevig Island (within the Glennie Group of islands) lies about 360 m to the south of Great Glennie, some 9.8 km south-west of Tidal River on the Promontory mainland. The 19.6 -ha island is about 960 m long, 390 m wide at the widest point and reaches 76.5 m at the summit on the southern end. It is generally narrow and steep-sided, rises to a central ridge above the western and x Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, 123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, Victoria 3084 November/December eastern coasts, and has a flatter area above the south-eastern end. Soil development is restricted, being most extensive above and around the south and south-eastern coast. Elsewhere massive outcrops of rock dominate the surface, and in some areas bare rocks slope, often directly, into the sea. As with all Promontory islands, Norman Island is of coarse-grained granite. The island rises to domed peaks at the northern and southern ends, and has a flat and low central shoulder. The highest point (96 m) is on the northern end. The island is about 1400 m long, 660 m wide across the northern end and occupies about 48.0 ha. Most of the island’s eastern slopes, which are less steep than those elsewhere, are well- covered with soil exceeding 0.4m in places. However, outcrops of rock occur extensively on the island and soil is present only near the summit on the exposed western slopes. The shoreline is primarily of granite blocks and boulders; sheer faces enter the sea on the southern and north-western ends. The western shore of the shoulder extends seawards as granite boulders, but on some sections of the eastern coast low cliffs occur above wave platforms. Wattle Island is about 0.5 km south of Wilsons Promontory, and 5 km west- south-west of the lighthouse. The island is narrow, about 350 m at the widest 249 point and runs, generally east-west, for about 1030m. Wattle Island, some 21.7 ha in area, rises to a central spine which reaches 82 m towards the western end. Derived soils, organically rich as on other islands, contain large quartz crystals. Generally the island's northern slopes are well-vegetated, but the exposed, southern side of the island is often sheer and supports less vegetation. Around most of the island, but particularly on the southern coast, the bedrock drops into the sea as boulders or as rounded or faulted sheets. Methods The major plant communities (defined by the dominant species) were identified and their approximate distribution was plotted onto aerial photographs of each island. Plant specimens were collected, breeding localities for some seabird species were identified and miscellaneous observations on other bird species were made as the islands were traversed. Areal measures derived from the photographs, and used below, are approximate only and would be modified considerably by the topographic variations. Results Flora A listing of the vascular plants found on each island is given in Table 1. DANNEVIG ISLAND In 1959 Gillham recorded 20 vascular species from Dannevig, 19 of them native species; we found a further 5 species in 1980. The major plant community was a Poa poiformis tussock grassland which was restricted mainly to the eastern side and to the flatter area above the south coast, where the community was more uniform, and contained few rock outcrops, Included in this community were occasional Bulbine bulbosa, Correa alba and Alyxia buxifolia; Apium prostratum was found in sheltered crevices, and Tetragonia implexicoma was infrequent in otherwise bare areas between boulders. Disphyma australe formed a disjunct 250 community up the western slopes towards the summit, though on the eastern side the community was lower and more restricted. Mats of Salicornia quinqueflora were also present along the summit on the northern end. Vegetation covers only about 7 ha (c. 36%) of the island’s planar surface, and bare rock dominates the island’s topography. NORMAN ISLAND We found 27 vascular species on the island in January 1980, though the dry summer may have reduced the number of species available (particularly grasses). P. poiformis tussock grassland formed the island's major community (Figure 1), occupying some 20.8 ha (c. 43% of the surface). In general the community was fairly uniform and dense but was more open on the west; elsewhere the community contained small bare areas previously dominated by Senecio lautus (which had died back). Associated with the Poa were Bulbine bulbosa, Pelargonium australe, and Helichrysum spp. Soil accretion was influenced by exposure and by the slope of underlying bedrock but soil depths often exceeded 0.4m. On the northern face of the southern peak, and scattered on the northern end, were small areas dominated by a mixed shrub community. Generally Alyxia buxifolia was the most abundant species, but other species, Acacia stricta, Leucopogon parviflorus, Melaleuca ericifolia and Leptospermum laevigatum were variously dominant and Correa alba, Apium prostratum, Helichrysum sp. and Rhagodia baccata were often associated with them. Occasionally Tetragonia implexicoma trailed in and around the dense stands of bushes, particularly on the eastern slopes, but small stands on the more exposed areas tended to be confined to crevices, or areas sheltered by large outcrops of rock. Disphyma australe dominated the other major community on Norman Island. Usually this prostrate species was established in rock crevices from which it extended over rock surfaces. Vic. Nat. Vol, 97 Table 1. Species lists for Dannevig, Norman and Wattle Islands; Dannevig details for 1959 from Gillham (1961). DANNEVIG NORMAN WATTLE Asplenium obtusatum Scirpus nodosus Juncus maritimus Bulbine bulbosa semibarbata Phragmites sp. Poa poiformis Stipa teretifolia Carpobrotus rossii Disphyma australe Tetragonia implexicoma Apium insulare ?prostratum Alyxia buxifolia Brachycome diversifolia Helichrysum apiculatum bracteatum *Hypochoeris sp. Olearia phlogopappa Senecio lautus *Sonchus oleraceus Sambucus gaudichaudiana Stellaria multiflora Casuarina stricta *Chenopodium album Rhagodia baccata Salicornia australis quinqueflora Crassula macrantha sieberana Lepidium praetervisum Leucopogon parviflorus Pelargonium australe Lobelia alata Lavatera plebeia Acacia ?stricta *Albizia lophantha Kunzea ambigua Leptospermum laevigatum Melaleuca ericifolia Muehlenbeckia adpressa Calandrinia calyptrata Correa alba Solanum aviculare Cover was usually moderate, and apparently was related to exposure. Thus the community occurred high above the splash zone on the western coast, but on the western shore of the shoulder the species formed a dense low sward which was evidently well-grazed, and manured, by Cape Barren Geese. Included within the community were occasional small stands of P. poiformis, Tetragonia implexicoma, Carpobrotus rossii and Apium prostratum. The last species was more abundant in sheltered areas. A small stand of Phragmites sp. was present on the sheltered, eastern coast under the low cliff and was supported by November/December 1959 1980 + E + + + + + + + h * * * * 4- * * + + + + + 4 + + + + 4 + + + + + + + 4 4 [ + + + + B + + L 4 [ + + + + + [ H + sp. + + + 4 + H + + sp. " + M * * * + + (Fam.) + + + + + + + + x fe + + + * * + + a presumably permanent seepage. WATTLE ISLAND Three communities were identified on Wattle Island; their distribution is shown in Figure 2. As on the other islands Poa poiformis tussock grassland provided most of the island’s vegetation cover (c. 9.6 ha, 45% of the island’s area). However, unlike most of the other Promontory islands, the growth form of the Poa on Dannevig and Wattle Islands was dense, compact, short and matted (see also Gillham 1961). This community was usually uniform throughout its extent, but did include small stands of Senecio lautus, 251 Disphyma australe and isolated Solanum aviculare and Helichrysum bracteatum. There was no well- developed supra-littoral community and Poa grew down towards the splash zone, particularly on the western slopes. Soil depth within the community varied but in several areas on the northern side it exceeded 0.5 m, deeper than that found under the Disphyma community. The Disphyma australe herbfield was confined to a small area (c. 1.1 ha) on the south-eastern side of the island, and to isolated areas some 10-30 m above the northern splash zone. Cover was NORMAN generally complete where the species was established in soil but occasional stands were rooted in crevices and extended over rocks. Except for individual P. poiformis tussocks and Bulbine bulbosa on the higher reaches the community included few species. A mixed scrub community dominated usually by Leptospermum laevigatum was a feature of the island's spine. This community, which often was 2-3 m high, included Correa alba, Albizia lophantha and, particularly on the western end, occasional Alyxia buxifolia. Associated with this ISLAND | | BARE ROCK = DISPHYMA ZY POA an SCRUB NS ERODED AREAS e N e e Figure 1. Approximate distribution of major plant communities on Norman Island, January 1980. 252 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 WATTLE ISLAND [ ] BARE ROCK EE DISPHYMA [/ B scrus SS 0 500 1000 m NY ERODED AREAS rx Figure 2. Approximate distribution of major plant communities on Wattle Island, December 1979. community, although not exclusively, Norman Island, and penguins, were luxuriant forms of Apium prostratum, Olearia phlogopappa and Pelargonium australe. On the western end of the island a few small clumps of Casuarina stricta grew amongst a denser stand of Leptospermum. Shrub species were found as small stands over much of the island but they were less frequent on the southern slopes. Old stumps and branches scattered about the island provided evidence of a previously more extensive distribution. Birds There is little information on the islands’ avifauna. A.H. Mattingley provided some details for an article on Victorian islands (Commonwealth of Australia 1912), which listed Cape Barren Geese and Hooded Dotterels on November/December muttonbirds and oystercatchers on both Norman and Wattle Islands, Lane (1979, pers. comm.) has provided notes on birds of the three islands; Gillham (1961, 1962) discussed some of the seabirds on Dannevig Island and Dorward (1967) recorded Cape Barren Geese on all three islands. These records, and our observations, may be summarised as follows:— Eudyptula minor Little Penguin Gillham (1961) noted, as did Lane (1979), that penguins bred on Dannevig. Whilst no attempt was made to estimate numbers during our visit, few burrows were found and most nests were under rocks on the south-eastern coast. The topography of the island, and the exposure of the western side, could limit 253 Table 2. Species: area ratios for some Promontory islands compared with details from the Hogan Group. The Victorian islands are ranked in order of increasing exposure as estimated by Gillham (1961). TOTAL SPECIES: AREA RATIOS Species Native Area All Native species (ha) species species Hogan Group Long! 54 41 18.2 1:0.3 1:0.4 East 8 7 10.1 1:1.3 1:1.4 Hogan! 145 87 131.6 1:0.9 1:1.5 Corner Inlet Doughboy” 107 85 3.2 1:0.03 — 1:0.04 Benison* 66 55 5.0 1:0.08 1:0.09 Promontory Islands Granite* 22 15 1.05 1:0.05 1:0.7 Rabbit 63 49 30 1:0.5 1:0.6 Cliffy! 4l 23 7.7 1:0.2 1:0.3 McHugh* 18 18 9.2 1:0.5 1:0.5 Dannevig? 25 23 19.6 1:0.8 1:0.8 Citadel? 25 21 18.8 1:0.8 1:0.9 Wattle 27 24 21.4 1:0.8 1:0.9 Norman 27 26 48 1:1.8 1:1.8 1. From Scarlett, Hope and Calder (1974). 2. From Gillham (1961) and unpublished data. 3. From Norman (1970) and unpublished data. 4. From Hope and Thomson (1971). 5. From Gillham (1961) and this survey. 6. From Gillham (1961) and Norman and Brown (1979). numbers. Puffinus tenuírostris Short-tailed Shearwater On Norman Island burrows were relatively few, and nest sites were again mainly under rocks. Only a few penguin tracks were noted on the eastern side, and Lane's estimate of 400-500 breeding pairs (in 1979) seems appropriate. Lane (pers. comm.) found 150-200 burrows in a small area of Wattle Island, and we found burrows scattered over the whole island, but more concentrated along the northern edge. Burrows or nest sites may number about 1000, a large proportion of which are under rocks and in crevices. Pachyptila turtur Fairy Prion The corpses of several Fairy Prions were found on Wattle Island, occasionally near Pacific Gull nests, but neither Lane (pers. comm.) nor we found any evidence of nesting. Lane (1979) found breeding birds on Dannevig and we found a few dead birds on the western side. We also found dead prions on Norman Island (also near Pacific Gull nests) though no nest burrows were definitely identified. 254 On Dannevig Island we found shearwater burrows only under Poa, and mostly on the southern end. The mean density of burrows in 15 circular quadrats of 20 m? was 0.7/m? and extrapolation for the 6.5 ha of burrowed tussock suggests that the total number of burrows was 44,600 + S.E. 3400, far in excess of Gillham's (1961) total of 2,000-3,000. Extrapolation of mean burrow density (0.7 burrows/m?) with area burrowed on Norman Island gave a total of 145,000 + 6825. On Wattle Island shearwaters nested throughout the island, mostly under Poa, wherever the depth of soil allowed. Average burrow density in 30 circular quadrats of 20 m? was 0.81/m and the estimated number of burrows was 77,750 x 2875 in the Poa and a further 5700 + 1525 in the Disphyma, where burrow density in five 20m? quadrats was 0.5/m’. On this island, as on Norman or Dannevig, the steepness of the island's slopes would markedly increase the surface area and therefore the burrow estimate must be considered minimal. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Pelecanoides urinatrix Common Diving-Petrel Lane (pers. comm.) found dead petrels on Wattle Island, and recorded them nesting on Norman and Dannevig Islands. We identified only three burrows on the eastern coast of Norman Island but Gillham (1961) found several hundred burrows, apparently of this species, on Dannevig Island. Ardea novaehollandiae White-faced Heron We saw one bird on Norman Island. Leucocarbo fuscescens Black-faced Shag In November 1979 Lane (1980) recorded about 30 birds nesting on the eastern side of Dannevig, and young birds were still present in January 1980. Gillham (1961) did not record breeding on the island in 1959. We found no evidence of recent nesting on Norman and Wattle Islands (though 15 and 80 + birds, respectively, were roosting there), nor did Lane find nests on his earlier visits. Cereopsis novaehollandiae Cape Barren Goose Dorward and Pizzey (1965) reported three or four pairs of geese on Wattle in 1964, and we saw a similar number. Lane (pers. comm.) considered that there were some 70 geese on Norman Island, where he banded non-flying young but our counts were less (eight birds including flying young). On Dannevig, where Gillham (1961) recorded breeding, we saw five Cape Barren Geese though the species was not listed by Lane (1979). Dorward (1967) recorded three pairs on Dannevig and five on Norman Islands. Haliaeetus leucogaster White-bellied Sea Eagle. A nest of this species was found on Wattle Island (containing leaves of Banksia integrifolia and Eucalyptus baxteri, species not recorded there). An adult and flying young were disturbed from the site as we landed. Circus aeruginosus Marsh Harrier Recorded on Norman Island by Lane (pers. comm.) and by us. November/December Falco peregrinus Peregrine Falcon One bird seen on Wattle Island. Falco berigora Brown Falcon One bird seen on Wattle Island. Falco cenchroides Australian Kestrel Only recorded on Norman Island, during Lane's (1979) visit and ours. Rallus philippensis Buff-banded Rail We found a nest with six eggs in Poa tussock on the southern slopes of Wattle Island. Haematopus fuliginosus Sooty Oystercatcher Wattle Island held about six pairs, and two nests were found there; we estimated at least four pairs on Dannevig Island and six on Norman Island, where Lane (pers. comm.) also found two nests. Larus novaehollandiae Silver Gull Breeding was not recorded on Wattle Island in November 1979 (Lane, pers. comm.), but we found 68 nests, mainly with eggs, on the northern coast. There were two colonies on Norman Island, of about 35 and 50 pairs, and at least 10 nests on Dannevig. Lane (pers. comm.) found breeding birds on both islands in November 1979 and about 12 nests on Dannevig in 1978 (Lane 1979). Larus pacificus Pacific Gull Lane found a nest on Dannevig in November 1979, and we considered that more than 20 pairs were still breeding in January 1980. At least 35 pairs were present on Norman Island, though Lane had estimated 120 birds, including nesting pairs, in November 1979. Lane recorded nesting on Wattle and we estimated about 30 pairs still breeding in December 1979. Sterna bergii Crested Tern Four birds were present on Norman Island, but we found no nests. Hirundo neoxena Welcome Swallow Recorded by Lane in November 1979 on Wattle Island, and we saw birds there and on Norman Island. 255 Turdus merula Blackbird Blackbirds were seen on Wattle Island (6-8 birds), on Norman (3) and on Dannevig (1) Islands. Lane recorded them on all islands during his earlier visits. Sericornis frontalis White-browed Scrubwren At least 10 birds were recorded on Wattle Island. Zosterops lateralis Silvereye Two were present on Wattle Island, and others were flying across to the Promontory. Corvus tasmanicus Forest Raven Recorded on Norman and Wattle Islands. Discussion Poa poiformis tussock grassland, which usually supported large colonies of shearwaters, formed a major community on each of the three islands discussed here, as indeed it often does throughout the Bass Strait islands (e.g. Gillham 1961, 1962; Norman 1970). The succulent Disphyma australe also formed extensive communities but the distribution of communities of mixed shrubs is restricted on the islands (though on Wattle Island there was evidence of a wider coverage previously). Gillham (1961) suggested that the number of plant species per unit area on the Promontory islands decreases with increasing exposure; this correlation is improved if only native species are considered (Hope and Thomson 1971). Whilst it is apparent (Table 2) that the sheltered Corner Inlet islands have more native, and total, species per hectare, most of the other Promontory islands have ratios within the range 1:0.6-0.8 (all species) and 1:0.5-0.9 (native species). However, Norman Island appears more impoverished, and Cliffy Island more enriched, than the other islands. The dry summer may well have reduced species available on Norman when we visited it, whilst Cliffy Island has a high alien content (Hope and Thomson 1971). The reconstructed ratios given in Table 2 (which include island areas recalculated 256 from recent aerial photographs, and an increased number of species compared with that available to Gillham (1961) ) do not show a clear series of increased number of species : area with decreased exposure sensu Gillham, and some previous anomalies which she showed have now disappeared. An increase in the number of plant species on Rabbit and Citadel Islands may be associated with the extinction of rabbits on the two islands (Norman and Brown 1979, Norman and Harris 1980) but Gillham's collections were made when drought was affecting islands and her species totals were presumably incomplete (Gillham 1961). Additionally, the use of planar areas as distinct from actual surface areas discounts the range of topographic variation, and hence growth opportunities. Hogan and Cliffy Islands have a larger proportion of alien species than do other islands considered here (Table 2) possibly a consequence of earlier human activity (Scarlett, Hope and Calder 1974; Hope and Thomson 1971). Whilst the influence of rabbits has been to reduce the number of species and to encourage aliens (Gillham 1961, Norman 1970), the varying human utilisation of Bass Strait islands has undoubtedly played a major role in their floristics. Stocking of some islands, and associated introduction of selected species, together with burning and deliberate removal of scrub and grazing, would all assist in the reduction and degradation of the native communities. Some visitors to the Promontory islands may have reduced scrub (by fire, or deliberate cutting as on Citadel), and could also have assisted in the spread of alien species. That Rabbit Island was frequently visited, and was occupied for a period, has been discussed elsewhere (Lennon 1974, 1975); Citadel and Doughboy Islands were also inhabited for periods (Gillham 1960, Norman and Brown 1979). In contrast, that few alien species have been recorded on Norman (1), Dannevig (2), Wattle (3) Islands, and none on McHugh, may suggest that these islands have not been subjected to detrimental human activities. If, as suggested elsewhere (Norman Vic. Nat. Vol, 97 1970), Promontory islands had a central shrub-dominated flora with coastal Poa poiformis tussock grassland, then removal of the scrub would influence the bird species using the islands. Other reports on the avifauna of islands off Wilsons Promontory (Abbott 1973, Norman and Brown 1979, Norman and Harris 1980, Wainer and Dann 1979) have indicated a paucity of passerine species. This note confirms the generalisation for a further three islands. Whilst Dannevig, Norman and Wattle Islands each hold large numbers of a few species of breeding seabirds, passerine species are few and breeding records absent (although the scrubwren, on Wattle Island, and the blackbird, on all islands, may be presumed to breed). The simple structure of the islands' existing major plant communities allows little scope for permanent utilisation by passerines, and those which have been recorded are probably transitory. Doubtless extended observation would add other birds to the species lists, including trans-Bass Strait migrants, but if, as Abbott (1973) suggested, the passerine fauna became extinct on islands such as these, the various human activities may have contributed to such declines. Acknowledgements We would like to thank the National Parks Service, Victoria, for approval to collect material from these islands. Mr R. Truscott landed us on Wattle Island and Mr R. Burbury on Norman and Dannevig. Most of the plant identifications were made at the National Herbarium, Melbourne, and we are indebted to those involved. Mr B. Robertson assisted in the survey of Wattle Island and Mr S.G. Lane provided details collected during his visits in November 1978 and 1979. REFERENCES Abbott, I. (1973). Birds of Bass Strait, Evolution and ecology of the avifaunas of some Bass Strait islands. and comparisons with those of Tasmania and Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 85: 197-223. Commonwealth of Australia, (1912). Islands off the coast of the Commonwealth, 3. Victoria, pp. 51- 59 in Official Year Book no. 5. Dorward, D.F. (1967). The status of the Cape Barren Goose Cereopsis novaehollandiae. Int. Council Bird Pres. Xth Bull. (1967): 56-71. Gillham, M.E. (1960). Destruction of indigenous heath vegetation in Victorian sea-bird colonies. Aust. J. Bot. 8: 277-317. Gillham, M.E. (1961). Plants and seabirds of granite islands in south-east Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 74: 21-35. Gillham, M.E. (1962). Granite islands of south-east Victoria as a seabird habitat, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 75: 45-63. Hope, G.S. and Thomson, G.K. (1971). The vegetation of Cliffy Island, Victoria, Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 84: 121-128. Lane, S.G. (1979). A visit to islands of Wilsons Promontory, Victoria. Corella 3: 29-30. Lane, S.G. (1980). Black-faced shags breeding on islands off Wilsons Promontory. Aust. Bird Watcher (in press). Lennon, J. (L.) (1974). Wilsons Promontory in Victoria, its commercial utilization in the nineteenth century. Vict. Hist. Mag. 45: 179-200. Lennon, J.L. (1975). Our changing coastline. Vict, Hist. J. 46: 476-A88. Norman, F.I. (1967). The interaction of plants and animals on Rabbit Island, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 80; 193-200, Norman, F.I. (1970). Ecological effects of rabbit reduction on Rabbit Island, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 83: 235-252. Norman, F.I. and Brown, R.S. (1979). A note on the vegetation of Citadel Island, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria. Victorian Nat. 96: 137- 142. Norman, F.l. and Harris, M.P. (1980). Some changes in the flora and avifauna of Rabbit Island, Wilsons Promontory, Victoria. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. (in press). Scarlett, N.H., Hope, G.S. and Calder, D.M. (1974), Natural history of the Hogan Group. 3. Floristics and plant communities, Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. 107: 83-98. Wainer, J, and Dann, P. (1979). The birds of Great Glennie Islands, Bass Strait, Aust. Bird Watcher 8: 47-50. HAWTHORN JUNIOR FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB Publications for Juniors “Introducing Australian Native Orchids'"" “How and Where to collect Fossils” “Helpful Hints for Nature Study" for all nature lovers young or old. 24 pages 75 cents 25 pages 75 cents 27 pages 50 cents The three books posted anywhere for $2.50. Order from the F.N.C.V. Sales Officer. November/December 257 Observations on the Vulnerability of Two Species of Wattled Bats (Chalinolobus) to Diurnal Avian Predators. BYR. A. Introduction Insectivorous bats are preyed upon by a large number of predators. In their review of bat mortality, Gillette and Kimbrough (1970) list 69 vertebrate and 5 invertebrate predators of bats. With the exception of the bat hawk, Macheiramphus alcinus, which subsists primarily on a diet of bats, most other vertebrates are opportunistic predators of bats (Black, et. al., 1979). Some predators occasionally inflict high mortality on bats that select roosts accessible to predators or that commence foraging flights during the twilight period (Allen, 1939), This paper reports differences in vulnerability of Gould's wattled bats (Chalinolobus gouldii) and chocolate wattled bats (Chalinolobus morio) to diurnal avian predators at two roosting sites in south- eastern Queensland. Study Sites and Methods Evening emergence of C. morio was observed 28 times between 1971 and 1975 at a roost located in the Bunya Mountains (elevation 1050m), 150 km NW of Brisbane. The bats occupied the attic of a building adjacent to subtropica! rainforest. The roost serves as a maternity site and was occupied by bats in all months, except June to mid- August. Gould's wattled bats (C. gouldii) were observed 14 times between February and October 1975, in the city of Toowoomba (elevation 575m), 110 km W of Brisbane. This colony occupied the attic of a building in a 8 ha residential park. The attic was used as a maternity site during the summer of 1973-74 (H. Benecke, pers. comm.). Lactating females and non-fledgling juveniles were present when I first entered the attic on 18 February 1975. Population size was estimated by +Darling Downs Institute of Advanced Education. Toowoomba. Qld. 4350. 258 YOUNG f counting bats as they emerged in the evening or by counting individuals within the roost. Time of emergence of the first bats was recorded. Bats collected in the roosts were weighed (£0.1g), aged (juveniles or adults), examined for injuries and reproductive condition, and banded prior to release. Pregnancy was assessed by abdominal palpation. Injuries were classified as minor or major based upon size, location and healing status of wounds. Results No predation of C. morio was recorded during 28 observations conducted at the time of evening emergence. Potential diurnal predators commonly observed near the roost were pied currawongs (Strepera graculina), Australian magpies (Gymnorhina tibicen), laughing kookaburras (Dacelo gigas), and occasionally pied butcherbirds (Cracticus nigrogularis) and grey butcherbirds (Cracticus torguatus). During 14 evenings of observation at the roost of C. gouldii, diurnal birds were observed capturing or attempting to capture bats on three occasions. On 15 September 1975 at 6.00 p.m. (EST), a pied butcherbird (Cracticus nigrogularis) intercepted and captured a bat as it flew from the attic. The bat was approximately 0.2 m from the attic when captured. The butcherbird carried its prey to a tree located approximately 200m from the roost and was not observed again that evening. During the next observation periods (12 and 13 October 1975), three bats were captured in flight and four unsuccessful attacks by pied butcherbirds were observed. All captures or attempted captures were made with the birds beak. The unsuccessful attacks on flying bats occurred about 100m from the roost; these bats suddenly altered their flight Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 a. Population size 210 180 I———winter——— ——4 150 o r «X © 120 u o c 90 ul a A 60 no z data 30 [0] FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEPT OCT b. Injury frequency (o) 100, 43 69 23 26 1 55 25 80 [7] j= < m 60 u e 40 o e 20 no data [0] [rud FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEPT OCT 1975 Fig. 1. Population size (a) and injury frequency (b) for Chalinolobus gouldii. Open bars represent no visible injuries; stippled areas represent minor injuries and black areas represent major injuries. Sample sizes are given above each bar. pattern, in a manner suggestive of avoidance behaviour, just prior to interception. Only a single butcherbird was present at any one time during these observations. Pied butcherbirds are relatively common in Toowoomba and nest during September and October. Pied currawongs pursued bats on two Occasions, but no captures were observed. November/December On 12 and 13 October, about 50% of the C. gouldii observed leaving the roost displayed abnormal flight. These bats “flopped” down the roof and became airborne after falling from the edge of the roof. The resulting flight path was often within 1.5m of ground level. Several bats flew erratically close to ground level until gaining sufficient altitude to land in a nearby tree, whereas 259 others laboriously attempted to re-enter the attic. One weakly flying adult female which landed on the ground had a portion of the liver protruding from an abdominal wound and a badly torn wing membrane. All three bats captured by pied butcherbirds displayed this weak flight. Awkward flight is often exhibited by young bats and females in advanced pregnancy. The weak flight of C. gouldii observed on 12 and 13 October was apparently due to injuries inflicted by 2110 2100 2050 2040 2030 H = 2020 [v] w 2010 o ü o 2000 i g 1950 u T 1940) © - T MX | 1930 v 1920 1910 1920 1930 1940 TIME OF ASTRONOMICAL SUNSET (GMT) 1900 1910 predators, because no juveniles or females in late pregnancy were observed in a sample of 21 bats examined in the attic on 13 October. The frequency of injured C. gouldii and the estimated size of the colony are given in Fig. 1. In the October samples (n = 25) 60% of living bats had either major or minor injuries. Seven of the 15 injured bats (46.6%) had wounds to the head and/or wings severe enough to impair foraging efficiency. Weight losses of 7.1% and 14.5% occurred in O——O C.morio y= 2559 *.9242x rz. €- --9 C.gouldii y=1.3766+.8535x TE. 1950 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2100 2110 Fig. 2. Correlation between time of emergence from the roost and astronomical sunset for Chalinolobus morio and C. gouldii. Times are Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Regression equations and correlation coefficients (r) for each species are also shown. 260 Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 two banded adult females which received major injuries between 19 September and 13 October. During the same recapture interval, two uninjured adult females increased in weight by 3.6% and 5.5%. Severely infected wounds occurred in 53% of bats with major injuries. During the study of C. morio over 1,000 adults and fledgling juveniles were examined, but only 20 bats were observed with injuries (4 major and 16 minor), During September and October seven dead adults (6 fémales and 1 male) and two (severely injured) moribund C. gouldii were found in the attic; all these bats were banded prior to September. One of the dead bats had a broken forearm, but the injury status of the other dead bats could not be assessed accurately due to decomposition. During the previous 7 months, only eight dead adult bats were found in the attic. The rapid population decline of C. gouldii during October (Fig. 1) was probably caused by two factors: consumption and mutilation by diurnal predators and dispersal to other roosts. Disturbances during sampling within the attic may have caused some bats to leave the roost. However, the colony did not increase after regular sampling was discontinued in October 1975. Only seven bats were subsequently recorded in the attic during four summer observation periods between December 1975 and February 1978. Although no light intensity measurements were recorded at the roosts, it was apparent that C. gouldii commenced foraging at higher light intensities than C. morio. The relationship between emergence time of the first bats and astronomical sunset is shown in Fig. 2. Emergence time was highly correlated with astronomical sunset in C, morio (r = 0.97) and in C. gouldii (r = 0.87). The mean time (£ SE) of emergence of the first bats after sunset was 14 + 2.7 min (n = 14) and 21 31.1 min (n = 28) for C. gouldii and C. morio respectively. This difference in emergence time was significant (Student's t-test = 2.376, P<0.05). In addition to emerging earlier than C. November/December morio, C, gouldii occupied a roost where apparent sunset was nearly concurrent with astronomical sunset, resulting in à high light intensity at the time of emergence. At the roost of C. morio, apparent sunset occurred about 30 minutes prior to astronomical sunset. During cloudy conditions (2509/9 cloud cover), C. morio emerged 19 € 1.6 min (n = 11) after sunset, compared with 21 +1.5 min (n = 17) during clear conditions, These differences in emergence time were not significant (t = 0.96, P20.05). Insufficient observations during clouding weather prevented a similar comparison for C. gouldii. Discussion Vulnerability of bats to diurnal avian predators depends primarily on light intensity at the time of emergence. Most insectivorous bats emerge prior to dark and are easily caught by diurnal birds (Allen, 1939; Baker, 1962; Black, 1976; Black, et. al, 1979). In contrast, nocturnal owls are generally inefficient predators of bats (Dwyer, 1966; Morton, 1975; Morton, et. al., 1977; Morton and Martin, 1979). The reasons why bats emerge prior to dark and risk predation by diurnal birds are not fully understood. Available evidence suggests that timing of feeding activity in bats and many other animals is controlled by complex interactions between an internal rhythm (circadian system) and external cues such as, light intensity, temperature, weather, and prey abundance (Herreid and Davis, 1966; Kunz, 1974; Curio, 1976, Bay, 1978; Funakoshi and Uchida, 1980). Light intensity is the main external cue controlling emergence time (Gould, 1961; Herreid and Davis, 1966). Several other studies have shown that emergence time of insectivorous bats was closely synchronized with astronomical sunset despite light intensity variations due to local topography at roosts (Dwyer, 1964; Herreid and Davis, 1966). Perhaps arousal from daily sleep and the readiness to forage is controlled by a circadian rhythm synchronized to astronomical sunset, with a minimum 261 threshold light intensity acting as a flight stimulus. The intensity of this threshold light stimulus varies with different species. Some bats such as, Chalinolobus gouldii respond to relatively high light intensities. Light intensity at the time of astronomical sunset will influence the risk of predation by diurnal predators. Therefore, roost site selection is an important factor affecting the vulnerability of bats to diurnal predators. The risk of predation during emergence would be reduced at roosts located in terrain where light intensity attenuates rapidly prior to astronomical sunset. Acknowledgements ] am grateful to H. Young, H. Spencer and L. Rice for assistance in the field. I also thank L. Edward for typing the manuscript. REFERENCES Allen, G.M. 1939. Bats. Dover Publications, New York. 368 pp. Baker, J. K. 1962. The manner and efficiency of raptor depredations on bats. Condor. 64:500- 504. Black, H.L. 1976. American Kestrel predation on the bats Eptesicus fuscus, Euderma maculatum and Tadarida brasiliensis. Southwest Nat, 21(2):250-251. Black, H.L., G. Howard, and R. Stjernstedt. 1979, Observations on the feeding behaviour of the bat hawk (Macheiramphus alcinus). Biotropica. 11:18-21. Bay, F.A. 1978. Light control of the circadian activity rhythm in mouse-eared bats (Myotis myotis Borkh. 1797). J. Interdiscipl. Cycle Res. 9:195-209. Curio, E. 1976. The Ethology of Predation. Springer-Verlag. Berlin, Heidelberg, and New York. 250 pp. Dwyer, P.D. 1964. Seasonal changes in activity and weight of Miniopterus schreibersi — blepotis (Chiroptera) in north-eastern New South Wales. Aust. J. Zool. 12:52-69. Dwyer, P.D. 1966. Mortality factors of the bent- winged bat. Vic. Nat. 83(2):31-36. Funakoshi, K. and T.A, Uchida, 1980, Feeding activity of the Japanese lesser horseshoe bat, Rhinolophus cornutus cornutus, during the hibernation period. J. Mamm. 61:119-121. Gillette, D.D., and J.D, Kimbrough. 1970. Chiropteran mortality, pp. 262-283, in About Bats (B.H. Slaughter and D.W. Walton, eds.). Southern Methodist Univ. Press, Dallas, Texas, 339 pp. Gould, P.J. 1961. Emergence time of Tadarida in relation to light intensity. J. Mamm. 42:405-407. Herreid, C.F., II, and R.B. Davis. 1966. Flight patterns of bats. J. Mamm 47:78-86. Kunz, T.H, 1974. Feeding ecology of a temperate insectivorous bat (Myotis veliter). Ecology, 55:693-711. Morton, S.R. 1975. The diet of the barn owl Tyto alba in southern Victoria. Emu. 75:31-34. Morton, S.R., M. Happold, A.K, Lee, and R.E. MacMillen, 1977. The diet of the barn owl. Tyto alba, in south-western Queensland, Aust, Wildl. Res, 4:91-97, Morton, S.R. and A.A. Martin 1979, Feeding ecology of the barn owl, Tyto alba, in arid southern Australia. Aust. Widl. Res. 6:191-204. Monotoca rotundifolia J.H. Willis (Epacridaceae) Discovered in Southern New South Wales Monotoca rotundifolia is a small prostrate or ascending inconspicuous shrub up to 0.3m high typically with distinctive rotund leaves 3- 6mm long (which often appear saddle-shaped because of the recurved lateral margins), solitary axillary flowers, and petals with conspicuously papillose inner surfaces. J.H. Willis based his description of the species, Muelleria 1 (3): 141 (1967), on specimens collected by K.C. Rogers early in 1964 in montane mallee heath growing on poor slaty ground at Brumby Point (overlooking the Reedy River gorge), 1250m alt., N.E. Nunniong Plateau (+37° 03'S, 148° 06'E), East Gippsland, Victoria. As the only subsequent collections of M. rotundifolia also came from the type locality on the Nunniong Plateau the species has always been considered to be extremely localised in its distribution and endemic in Victoria. It was therefore of considerable interest to 262 receive at the National Herbarium of Victoria material of M. rotundifolia from 1. Garven, Geography Department, School of General Studies, Australian National University, Canberra, collected on 26 May 1980 at Big Badja Hill (36° 02'S, 149° 33'E), 1360m. alt, southern New South Wales, and to be informed that the species was also seen but not collected at Wadbilliga Trig., Kybeyan Range (36° 20'S, 149° 36'E). The occurrence of M. rotundifolia in southern New South Wales significantly extends the known distributional range of the species and a search of the intervening high ground between the Victorian and New South Wales populations may well yield additional records of the species. J.H. Ross National Herbarium of Victoria Birdwood Avenue South Yarra,3141. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Extension of the New South Wales Range of the White-footed Dunnart (Sminthopsis leucopus Gray) By D. H. KiNG* Introduction Sminthopsis leucopus was originally described as Phascogale leucopus by Gray (1842) from a young adult male collected in Tasmania. Two males, described as Antechinus ferruginifrons, were later collected in New South Wales (Gould 1854), but the precise location of those collections remains in doubt (Tate 1947; Troughton 1964), The type and the New South Wales specimens were subsequently referred to Sminthopsis by Thomas (1888). The absence of published records of S. leucopus for New South Wales since 1854 led Archer (1979) to record its extinction in that State, However, the recent examination by Morton, Wainer and Thwaites (1980) of the collections of 6 Australian museums confirmed the presence of S. leucopus in coastal New South Wales; extending its northern distribution to 36°S. A new record Six males and two females were cap tured by the author on the Jervis Bay Peninsula on the south coast of New South Wales during a study extending over 2544 trap nights between 12 March and 18 August 1978, The animals were caught in Elliot traps baited with peanut butter and rolled oats on two 1.4 hectare rectangular grids adjacent to Wreck Bay Road at map references 35"09'40'' S., 150°42'00’’ E. and 35°09’ 25" S., 150?42'20"' E. (Fig. 1). Habitat The study area is floristically complex * Department of Zoology, Australian National University, Canberra, A.C.T, 2600 November/December heathland dominated by the heath leaved banksia (Banksia ericifolia), the stunted she-oak (Casuarina distyla) and the broom tea-tree (Leptospermum scoparium) to 1.0 m tall, Dagger hakea (Hakea teretifolia) is also promi nent in some areas, Many low woody ħeath plants, herbs and grasses comprise the understorey which appears to vary in density with the soil depth and drainage characteristics (Ingwersen 1976), Im mature grass trees (Xanthorrhoea spp.) to 0.5 m tall are scattered throughout the heath, Small mallee-form scrubby gum (Fucalyptus stricta) and red blood- wood (E. gummifera) to about 4.0 m tall, with a stem diameter of about 50 mm, form small chimps amongst the heath plants, The tall shrubs are general- ly absent under the mallee canopies, but herbs proliferate in these positions and a deep litter of leaves and twigs, contain ing extensive small mammal runways, has accumulated under most clumps, A few mature red honeysuckle (Banksia serrata) are present, The thin sandy soil overlies an undulating sandstone foun- dation which breaks the surface in some areas, forming flat sheets to 5.0 m diameter, The whole study area was burnt in a moderately hot. fire in December 1972 (Ingwersen 1976), and many charred HB, ericifolia stems and some Xanthorrhoea spp. stumps to 200 mm diameter remain as structural com ponents of the regenerating heath, The small mammals Five small terrestrial mammal species were trapped in small numbers; (in decreasing order of density) an undescribed Antechinus sp. (King, in preparation); the Swamp Rat (Rattus lutreolus); the House Mouse (Mus 263 TERRITORY OF JERVIS BAY 4 Paes Area (Airfield a — Study grids ES nfl Scale ,— metres 3^ 0 1000 Fig. 1 Location of Jervis Bay study sites. musculus); the White-footed Dunnart (S. leucopus) and; the Bush Rat (R. fuscipes). S. leucopus was trapped on every visit to the area after March, and one male (No. 2) was apparently resident between June and August (Table 1). One female was caught at the edge of the understorey of a mature B. serrata 10 m from the road edge. All other captures were between 30 m and 110 m from the road at sites with poor cover. Three in- dividuals were trapped at one site on the edge of a large exposed sandstone sheet. S. leucopus was not trapped at sites of good cover, whereas the Antechinus and R. lutreolus were frequently caught there. Discussion This new record extends the northern distribution of S. leucopus in New South Wales to latitude 35°S. However, a recent record (M. Archer, pers. comm.) from Mt. Spec, Queensland (18?57'S), suggests that the true mainland distribution spans much of the 264 eastern and south-eastern coastal region. The presence of S. leucopus on the Jervis Bay Peninsula in 6 year old heath suggests that it should be found in similar habitat elsewhere on the south coast of New South Wales. Recent exten- sive surveys of the mammal fauna of the south coast between latitudes 35?S and 37?30'S, however, have failed to record S. leucopus (Newsome, Mcllroy, Catling 1975; Tidemann 1978; Coyne, Hinchey, Jenkins 1979). Its apparent absence may be an artefact, either of limited trapping effort in the ap- propriate areas, or of its exclusion from traps by other species. S. leucopus may only occupy (or be trappable in) habitat in coastal New South Wales which is marginal for competitor species. The habitat in the study area is apparently sub-optimal for other species sympatric with S. leucopus, as total trapping suc- cess in the heath never exceeded 13%, but was usually more than 30% in near- by wet and dry forests (King, unpublish- ed data). No S. leucopus were trapped in the forest. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 Table 1. Captures of S. leucopus at Jervis Bay, 1978. August * Skulls and skins in the Australian National University Zoology Department collection. Acknowledgements My thanks are extended to Mr C. R. Tidemann and Dr J. L. Carstairs for their help and encouragement, and to Dr M. Archer and Dr J. H. Calaby for helpful discussions. REFERENCES Archer M. (1979) The status of Australian dasyurids, thylacinids and myrmecobiids. In: ‘The Status of Endangered Australasian Wildlife’. Proceedings of the Centenary Sym- posium of the Royal Zoological Society of South Australia, Adelaide, 21-23 Sept., 1978. M. J. Tyler (ed.). Royal Zoological Society of South Australia: Adelaide. Coyne P.C., Hinchey M.D., Jenkins R.W.G. (1979) ‘Beecroft Peninsula Resources Survey’. Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service: Canberra. Ingwersen F. (1976) ‘Vegetation of the Jervis Bay Territory’. AGPS: Canberra. Gould J. (1854) ‘Mammals of Australia’, Vol. 1. The author: London. Gray J.E. (1842) Description of some new genera and fifty unrecorded species of Mammalia. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 10, 255-267, Morton S.R., Wainer J.W., Thwaites T.P. (1980) Distributions and habitats of Sminthopsis leucopus and S. murina (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae) in southeastern Australia. Aust. Mammal. 3, 19-30. Newsome A.E., Mcllroy J., Catling P. (1975) The effects of an extensive wildfire on populations of twenty ground vertebrates in South-East Australia. Proceedings of the Ecological Society of Australia, 9, 107-123. Tate G.H.H. (1947) Results of the Archbold Ex- peditions. No. 56. On the anatomy and classifica- tion of the Dasyuridae (Marsupialia). Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist, 88, 101-155. Thomas O. (1888) ‘Catalogue of the Marsupialia and Monotrema in the collection of the British Museum (Natural History)’. British Museum (Natural History): London. Tidemann C.R. (1978) Mammals. In: ‘Land Use on the South Coast of N.S.W.’. M.P. Austin and K.D. Cocks (eds.) Vol II, Biophysical background studies. R.H. Gunn (ed). CSIRO: Melbourne. Troughton E. (1964) A review of the Marsupial genus Sminthopsis (Phascogalinae) and diagnosis of new forms. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 89, 307-321. Erratum The index to Vol. 96 of the Victorian Naturalist was compiled by Arthur Theis, not James A. Baines, as stated. November/December 265 Aragonite from Melbourne By A. W. BEASLEY T The opportunities to collect mineral specimens from rock exposures in our Australian capital cities are now almost non-existent. However, in the past this was not so. Many beautiful specimens of minerals were collected in earlier times from quarries and other excavations in some of our capital cities, especially in Melbourne. An appreciable part of Melbourne lies on basalt, the most common volcanic rock. Quarrying Operations in Melbourne began soon after white set- tlement. During last century, and even in the early part of the present century, there were quite large basalt quarries in some of the inner suburbs of Melbourne, such as Clifton Hill, Rich- mond and Burnley. Beautiful crystallis- ed specimens of the carbonate mineral, aragonite, and also zeolite minerals were collected from the basalt quarries in these suburbs in former times. They were found in cavities in the basalt, and were sought after by mineral enthusiasts and quarry workers. Unfortunately, these old quarries are no longer available for mineral collecting; most have been filled with rubbish by municipal authorities. Basalt is a hard, fine-grained rock but, fortunately for mineral collectors, it sometimes contains cavities in which striking crystallised minerals may be found. Most of the cavities were formed by the expansion of gases (mainly steam) escaping from solution as the lava solidified on cooling, but some were formed from other causes. The cavities generally are most abundant near the top of the old lava flows, but sometimes are relatively abundant near the bottom of individual flows. During the final stages of solidifica- tion of the lava, many of the cavities were filled with mineralised aqueous solutions that circulated through the basaltic mass. At a later time, some of ! 3 Georgian Court, Balwyn, Victoria. Honorary Associate in Geology, National Museum of Vic- tora, 266 the cavities in the rock were filled with percolating groundwater that contained dissolved mineral matter. It is from these solutions that the various minerals were deposited in the basalt cavities. Aragonite is, in my opinion, the most spectacular mineral found in the basalt formerly quarried in the inner suburbs of Melbourne. It commonly occurs in the cavities as radiating groups of acic- ular (needle-shaped) crystals, and these groups are objects of great beauty. It seems that crystallisation began from various points or nuclei and the needle- like crystals grew outwards, often form- ing beautiful rosettes and sheaves. Aragonite has the same chemical com- position as calcite, namely calcium car- bonate, but it has a different crystal structure and different physical proper- ties. Aragonite crystallises in the or- thorhombic system, and a common crystal habit is acicular pyramidal, con- sisting of a long slender vertical prism terminated by a combination of a very steep dipyramid and first-order prism. According to Deer, Howie and Zussman (1966), the crystallisation of aragonite is favoured in general by temperatures of 50 degrees to 80 degrees C. Experiments by geochemists have shown that car- bonated waters containing calcium more often deposit aragonite when they are hot and calcite when they are cold. Many good specimens of aragonite were collected in Melbourne in the past, particularly from the Corporation Quarry at Clifton Hill, Chamber's Quarry at Richmond, and a fairly large quarry at Burnley. It can be presumed that the calcium in the lime-rich solu- tions from which the aragonite was precipitated was leached from the plagioclase feldspar and pyroxene that compose much of the basalt. The Corporation Quarry, located at the end of Ramsden Street, Clifton Hill, just adjoining the Merri Creek, was par- ticularly large. According to Mitchell (1942), Melbourne Council authorities worked this quarry for over 70 years, and nearly 40 metres of basalt was ex- Vic, Nat. Vol, 97 ==- Fig. 1, Aragonite (magnified) from Clifton Hill, a Melbourne suburb. posed in the deepest part of the quarry. Pritchard (1910) states that what was then known as the Melbourne Corpora- tion began taking stone for road metal and other purposes from this locality in 1855, whilst quarrying there is known as far back as 1846. The location of the former quarries in Richmond and Burnley is shown on the geological map of Melbourne which accompanies the publication **Geology of the Melbourne District, Victoria’’ by Bell, Bowen, et al. (1967). Pritchard (1944) records the fact that the largest of the Burnley quarries, known as Willis’ Quarry, ceased opera- tions only a few years before 1944. Usually the aragonite is colourless or white, but it also varies in colour from yellow to brown due to traces of iron ox- ide as an impurity. Globular or mam- millary calcite lines some of the cavities in which aragonite occurs, and zeolite minerals such as phacolite (a variety of November/December chabazite) and phillipsite also are sometimes present. Fortunately, a reasonably large number of aragonite specimens from the old quarries in Melbourne are held in the safe keeping of the National Museum of Victoria. They were col lected by such men as the late S. R. Mit- chell and Dr. G. B. Pritchard, both pro- minent in Field Naturalists Club circles. Some of the men who worked in the basalt quarries appreciated the beauty of the minerals and made private collec- tions of choice specimens. One such per- son was the late Felix Westwood of Footscray who donated specimens to the National Museum of Victoria as early as 1907. Following his death, the executrix of his Will contacted me at the Museum about what she should do with his col- lection of mineral specimens. An inspec- tion of the collection revealed that it contained some particularly fine 267 specimens of acicular aragonite as well as zeolites and other minerals from the old basalt quarries. I was successful in persuading her to donate the collection of 420 specimens to the National Museum of Victoria. It is good to pause and really look at crystallised specimens of minerals. Groups of delicate, needle-like crystals of aragonite can be objects of quite outstanding beauty. The contrast be- tween the slender colourless or pale- coloured crystals and the dense, very dark-coloured rock in which they are found, enhances the aesthetic appeal. REFERENCES Bell, G., Bowen, K.G., et al. 1967. Geology of the Melbourne district, Victoria. Bull. geol. Surv. Vict. 59, 1-95. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A. and Zussman, J., 1966. An Introduction to the Rock-forming Minerals. Longmans, London. Mitchell, S.R., 1942. Minerals of the suburban area, Vict. Nat. 59:116-118. Pritchard, G.B., 1910. The Geology of Melbourne. Tait, Melbourne. Pritchard, G.B., 1944. Old Yarra History. Cheshire, Melbourne. Female Teal Calls the Tune Recently, during the height of the duck shooting season, | was down at Werribee Sewerage Farm and made the following observation. On walking along the edge of a settling pond opposite South Spit a pair of Chestnut Teal (Anas castanea) swam slowly out from the edge of the pond toward the centre. All the time eyeing me warily, but making no sound and showing no signs of wing shuffling, which ducks often do when nervous, When only about fifty metres away from the observer, the male decided he had had enough and started to take off. However, when about six inches off the water surface, the female, showing no signs of taking-off, uttered a sharp hissing sound (*'ts-suck .. . ts-suck’’). Immediately on the sound being uttered the male aborted take-off (although already off the actual water surface) and flopped back into the water. Then joining the female, both swam away from me, toward the other side of the settling pond, eyeing me all the time. This behaviour of the female teal (who did not appear injured) seemed very strange, for normally teal fly off very quickly at the sign of the human intruder. A possibility is that she was able to recognise the shape of a rifle or shotgun, saw I was not carrying one, therefore took the risk of remaining in the water. Also, there were shooters nearby, and the probability of one of the two ducks being shot in flight would be much greater than if in a large flock (maybe the female was able to see this?). Certainly whatever the reason, the female teal appeared to be the “boss”. I wonder if anyone else has observed such behaviour in any species of duck? M. Schuk “Tasmanian Bird Atlas” by David Thomas. 215 x 152mm, 171 pp including figures, tables and maps. University of Tasmania, Hobart, 1979. $43.50 plus postage (from The Fauna Office of Tasmania, Box 252C, G.P.O., Hobart, Tasmania 7001). Tasmania is the third Australian State to produce à bird atlas. South Australia led the way in 1977 with, A Bird Atlas of the Adelaide region, published by the South Australian Ornithological Association. Victoria followed in 1978 with, A Bird Atlas of the Melbourne Region, by Helen l|. Aston and Rosemary Balmford, and published by the Vic- torian Ornithological Research Group. The Tasmanian Bird Atlas differs in that it covers the entire State — the only State ''. . . with clearly defined bio-geographic boundaries," Now that the Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union's, Atlas of Australian Birds is well under way, all of these 268 publications are important for many and obvious reasons. Many bird-watchers maintain distribution maps of their own, so this pooling of knowledge adds to our ornithological store. Participants become trained as field recorders, modifications and improvements are studied and problems are ironed out. All of this is very valuable experience if steps are to be taken towards the preservation of our bird life. The atlas under review started out as a personal venture by the author, but as the project progressed other local bird-watchers made their records available, Ninety percent of the records are based Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 on observations made since 1960, with the remain- ing ten percent extracted from literature, With one exception, distribution maps are given for all species recorded from more than ten grid blocks, These maps are based on ten minute grid blocks, This results in 138 maps, The exception is the Clamorous Reed Warbler Acrocephalus stentorets, This species is included ** ., , because it is known to breed regularly but has a very restricted distribution’, which, I suppose, is as good a reason as any, A fur ther 94 species are listed at the back of the book, It is a pity that these were not also placed on the maps, perhaps using a small rectangle to indicate their distribution, Pelagic birds are not included. Due to lack of space, information relevant to each mapped species is conveyed in the accepted ab- breviated form — a letter or a series of letters — 41 altogether, This tends to make the bottom of the page of some species such as the Forest Raven (p159), Grey Fantail (p122) or Black-faced Cuckoo Shrike (p111) appear to be carrying a coded message intended to confuse the enemy, However, perseverance divulges a surprising amount of in- formation, as do the few additional comments which conclude the notes for most species, Although comparisons are odious, in this ease they are inevitable, and with each succeeding atlas one seeks improvements and innovations, Here, in cluded between pages 98 and 99, are two readily detachable maps, One gives Tasmanian vegetation zones and the other, effective rainfall zones. Another worthwhile addition on each page is an inset map, indicating the mainland range of each species. Regretfully, there is no map with place names listed, To Australians, detailed maps are readily available, but this omission could prove a distinct handicap to anyone working in another part of the world, Perhaps this can be remedied in a future edi tion, Because maps portray distribution so much more vividly than words, this atlas is weleomed. The book is of a convenient size, nicely presented and an im portant addition to our ornithological literature, a foundation to be built upon as our knowledge of distribution is extended, (Mus) Tiss Krioor Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Reports of recent activities Centenary Expedition November 1-8, 1980 The centenary expedition of the F.N,C.V. was based at Wilson's Promontory, à most suitable venue as the F.N.C, V. had played an important part in establishing the Promon- tory as a national park the first in Victoria, About 160 people attended; some camped in tents or caravans and others stayed in the comfortable cabins provided at Tidal River. Day excursions were arranged to a number of places including Lilly Pilly Gully, Tongue Point, Chinaman's Creek and Corner Inlet, whilst some members walked to Sealer's Cove, the light house or Waterloo Bay. The Tongue Point walk was of con- siderable interest as 12 orchid species were found, Members watched a sea eagle, and Dr Willis with a few naturalists crossed to the island just off the point and found bushes of the crimson berry (Cyathodes juniperina) in fruit. A few bushes were also found on the mainland. The walk ended at Derby River. In Lilly Pilly Gully many lilly pillys had grown or regenerated since the last bush fires, and a pair of spotted pardoletes gave great pleasure as they fed their young in a hole in a bank quite unconcerned by watching naturalists. A highly successful trip was made, with the help of the rangers, to Chinaman's Creek, The very rare slender tree fern (Cyathea cun- ninghamii) was found there, including 4 specimen 40 feet high; also two plants of the oval wedge fern (Lindsaea trichomanoides). This is the only place in Victoria where the latter has been found, We met each evening to hear lectures given November/December by Dr Willis and the Rangers, Peter Thomas and Malcolm Turner and to exchange nature notes, One evening the District Supervisor Bob Jones came to speak on Park Manage- ment, In the mornings we were fortunate to see some of the animals caught by the Mam- mal Survey Group. It was very interesting to see one of the four poteroo species captured, These animals were later released. Our thanks go to the rangers who helped make this such an interesting and enjoyable expedition. Full details will be published in a later issue. General Meeting Monday 13 October Representatives of the Geology, Botany and Mammal Survey Groups spoke on aspects of Wilson's Promontory, Mr Tom Sault stated that The Prom is one granite mass where sedimentary deposits have been mostly worn away and the exposed granite weathered to rounded shapes, Miss Pat Carolyn showed colour slides of vegeta- tion of various parts. Mr Malcolm Turner spoke of six distinct habitats in The Prom and of some of the animals peculiar to such habitats, Some maps would have been appreciated, General Meeting Monday 10 November Professor Stubbs, President of the Royal Society, presented the 1980 Natural History Medallion to Mr Michael Tyler and spoke of Mr Tyler's work with frogs and his wide ac- tivities for conservation, 269 Speaker for the evening, Mr Tyler, told us of the great increase of knowledge of Australian frogs during the last 20 years. In 1961 there were 91 known species, in 1980 160, and he suspects there could be up to 250 Australian species. Mr Tyler showed colour slides of frogs ranging in size from 3mm to 130mm, frogs in astonishing variety of colour and form, from dry areas and wet areas, burrowers and tree- dwellers, and some with very curious habits. In one species, the male houses the tadpoles in a pocket in the thigh; in another, the female swallows the tadpoles, releasing them when frogs, and herself not feeding during those 40 odd days. It was a wholly fascinating address. Before the meeting, Prof Stubbs and Mr Tyler were dinner guests of FNVC Council at Domain Hotel accompanied by other members and previous Medallionists. More Activity Needed from Naturalists for Conservation LCC Study Area Reports. The Land Con- servation Council receives far fewer submis- sions from naturalists re their Study areas than it receives from developers. Therefore, developers have the edge over conserva- tionists. Any person who knows of any rare, in- teresting or restricted species (flora or fauna) should submit his observations to the LCC or, if you prefer, to FNCV Council to handle the submission for you. Reports by Mr Cliff Beauglehole following the LCC Study Area Reports bring attention to particular aspects or to deficiencies in the LCC report. Buy the Beauglehole reports ($5 apiece), study them and write to LCC (or FNCV) emphasising the aspects you think are most necessary for conservation. The reports are ‘‘Distribution and Conservation of Native Vascular Plants in the Victorian Mallee 1979" and similarly ‘* ... in the 270 Corangamite-Otway area Victoria both with large fold-out maps. 1980", Vascular Plant Checklists for various areas in Victoria are being produced by Mr Beauglehole at considerable effort and cost. If the checklists are not sold in sufficient quantity ($6 apiece) the work will have to stop and both science and conservation will be the losers. Buy the various area lists as they become available. More submissions to LCC, more money — they are the essential tools to work for con- servation in Victoria. FNCV members and other naturalists are urged to supply more of both. The Beauglehole reports and checklists can be obtained from FNCV Sales Officer, Mr D. E. McInnes, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3135. Prices include postage in Vic- toria. Vic. Nat. Vol. 97 (Continued from page 230) All FNCV members are invited to attend any Group meeting, no extra charge. At the National Herbarium, the Domain, South Yarra, at 8.00 p.m. Third Wednesday — Microscopy Group There will be no December meeting. Wednesday, 21 January. Members’ exhibits. Wednesday, 18 February. Programme for 1981. Members' exhibits. Second Thursday — Botany Group Thursday, 12 February. North America — the beauty of the wild plant. GROUP MEETINGS Speaker: Mary Doery. At the Conference Room, the Museum, Melbourne, at 8.00 p.m. Good parking — enter from Latrobe St, First Monday — Marine Biology and Entomology Group There will be no January meeting. Monday, 2 February. Holiday observations and members’ exhibits, Monday, 2 March. Molluses of Port Phillip Bay. Speaker: Dr Brian Smith. GROUP EXCURSIONS All FNCV members are invited to attend Group excursions. Botany Group — last Saturday. Saturday, 28 February. Mt Donna Buang. Day Group — third Thursday There will be no January outing. Thursday, 19 February. Botanic Gardens: Australian border and fern gully. Meet at the corner of Domain Rd and Park St at 11.30 a.m. Leader; A. Fairhall 578-2009, Thursday, 19 March. Train outing to Fern Tree Gully National Park, Train to Upper Fern Tree Gully from Flinders St at 10,15 a.m. Leader: I, Gillespie 578-1879. There will be no April outing. Mammal Survey Group Friday, 26 December, continuing for 7-10 days. Camp, high plains in Bast Gippsland, Saturday, 24 — Monday, 26 January. Australia Day weekend, Gelliondale, Centenary Nature Show Lower Melbourne Town Hall Fri-Sun, 10, 11, 12 October The Show included a great variety of displays, some of them being contributed by affiliated clubs. One of the most impressive was by our Mammal Survey Group. Sundry stuffed animals were set amongst trees and undergrowth and gliders were suspended in mid-air. With the lamps provided, visitors could do some spotlighting themselves and were shown how the various traps are used. A take-away leaflet provided information about the animals displayed. Hawthorn Juniors showed methods of preserving and mounting insects and fossils, and a great attraction was the pond where visitors could fish up small pond-life with the handnet and then examine their finds under a low-power microscope. Montmorency Club had a substantial timber bird-hide behind which were various stuffed birds in a natural setting with painted backdrop. Visitors peeped at the unsuspec- ting birds through a slit in the wall — one slit at child eye-level, another at adult level. With an appropriately painted background, Black Rock Club had a coastal exhibit with tanks of marine creatures and other coastal life with showcards and diagrams. There was a display of ‘Common Native Plants — from coast to the hills’ with colour posters behind of the different areas — coastal heathland, Dandenong foothills, forest and fern gully. A series of glass cases of labelled rocks and fossils told the story of the earth’s formation through the ages. Many microscopes had an extraordinary variety of objects for examination, and there was a continuous small movie of pond life. There were displays of various gall insects and the strange growths they produce, cases of butterflies, photos etc of excursions by the Day Group, talks and demonstrations on plant propagation which attracted keen gardeners, a table on FNCV history and ac- livities, a table for sale of publications, Centenary T-shirts and other merchandise, and a rug made from wool dyed with dif- ferent eucalypt leaf extracts. And there were masses of wildflowers — all home-grown of course. They were on several large circular tables and provided at- tractive colour throughout the hall. One table exhibited plants especially attractive to birds. The flowers were provided by members of several clubs. Costs exceeded takings, but the purpose of the Show was to make the public more aware of the FNCV and to get more people more in- terested in natural history. Thanks go to all members who put in so much work to achieve that purpose. Special thanks go to Miss Marie Allender as convenor of the organising com- mittee. — i] Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Established 1880 OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron: His Excellency the Honorable SIR HENRY WINNEKE, KCMG, KCVO, OBE, KStJ, QC. Key Office-Bearers 1980-1981 President: Dr. BRIAN SMITH, 8 Hunsford Avenue, North Clayton, 3168 (560 8358) Secretary: Miss WENDY CLARK, 27 Rangeview Grove, North Balwyn, 3104 (859 8091) Correspondence to: FNCV, National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Treasurer: Subscription Secretary: F.N.C.V. C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Editor: Mr. R. WALLIS, C/- State College of Victoria—Rusden, Blackburn Road, North Clayton, 3168, 544 8544. | Librarian: Mr. P. KELLY, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Assistant Librarian: Miss M. J. LESTER, 4/210 Domain Road, South Yarra, 3141 (26 1967) | Excursion Secretary: Miss M. ALLENDER, 19 Hawthorn Avenue, Caulfield, 3161. (527 2749) Book Sales Officer: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) Group Secretaries Botany: Mr. MICHAEL McBAIN, 19 Foster St, St Kilda, 3182 (534 2293) Day Group: C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141. Geology: Mr. T. SAULT, C/- National Herbarium, The Domain, South Yarra, 3141 Mammal Survey: Mr. RAY GIBSON, 26 McCulloch Street, Nunawading, 3131 (874 4408) Microscopical: Mr. M. H. MEYER, 36 Milroy Street, East Brighton (596 3268) Entomology and Marine Biology: Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (211 2427) FNCV Kinglake Nature Reserve: McMahons Road, Kinglake. Bookings and keys: Mr. 1. F. MORRISON, 788 Elgar Road, Doncaster (848 1194) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.C.V. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club’s reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1980 le iyi tate Le oh eh ee er ee eh PEDE d $12.00 Pas ea rell LL METRE ETE TU P IPS PEG TRES Dy OPI it ie M Me crt rure $14.50 Country Members and Retired Persons C MM om vp DENEN. $10.00 Joint Country and Joint Retired ....... Bistior 2.7: che ae the au Joli s er uir Subscription to Victorian Naturalist............. $ Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist. .... 0.0.0.0... .cccceceeeee-- eee. DR E Individual Journals 1 All subscriptions should be made payable to the Field Naturalist Club of Victoria and posted to the Subscription Secretary. @ JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD., WEST MELBOURNE